Andrew Wireless Innovations Group 9GB2000 Cellular Repeater User Manual vol1eac200drev1b2

Andrew Wireless Innovations Group Cellular Repeater vol1eac200drev1b2

users manual

EAC-2000 MANUAL ADDENDUM FOR DIGITAL OPERATIOND R A F T15 July, 19991.1 IntroductionThis section of the manual describes EAC-2000 operation when it has TIA-136digital-channel sets installed. An EAC-2000 may be ordered directly from thefactory with digital channel sets installed, or upgrade kits may be ordered to adddigital channel-set capability to an existing EAC-2000 installation. In general the installation issues (isolation needs, channel selection, etc.) areidentical for either type of system and are covered in detail in the AMPS EAC-2000manual. The differences between a TIA-136 equipped system and a standardAMPS-only system will be covered in this section.The hardware differences for a digital-equipped EAC-2000 are:1.1.1 Controller ModuleController Module 19-20001-1 is required for TIA-136 digital operation. If anexisting EAC-2000 installation has the older (analog only) 19-5598-1 ControllerModule installed, it must be replaced with the dual-mode 19-20001-1 ControllerModule. The 19-20001-1 module will process both analog and digital calls.1.1.2 RF ModuleThe 19-20000-1 IS-136 RF Module is required for TIA-136 operation. It may beplaced in any card cage slot in place of the analog 19-5599-1 Cellular I.F. modulewithin the following constraints:• A 19-20000-1 module must be placed in slot 5 for DCCH operation.• A 19-20000-1 module must be placed in slot 6 if dual-mode hand-inoperation is desired. If DCCH-only operation is implemented or if hand-in of DTC calls is not required, then the analog 19-5599-1 Cellular I.F.module may be left in slot 6.• If dual-mode (analog control channel as well as a DCCH channel)operation is desired, then an analog 19-5599-1 module must be installed inslot 1 for the analog control channel.
• Any combination of 19-2000-1 IS-136 RF modules and 19-5599-1Cellular I.F. modules may be placed in the remaining slots in the cardcage.1.1.3 45W PA ModuleThe 1819.G1 class AB linear PA must be used with the 19-20000-1 module. Theclass C PAs (21-117-1, 21-396-1, etc.) are usable only with the analog 19-5599-1Cellular I.F. modules. Note also that the 1819.G1 linear PA cannot be used inplace of a class C PA. No power output will be provided in either case if the PAis mismatched with its corresponding RF module.Note that the 1819.G1 PA, the 19-20000-1 and the 19-20001-1 modules havereverse-colored labels (white on blue instead of blue on white) to provide a quickvisual aid in identifying the modules required for TIA-136 operation. The1819.G1 PA also has a label on its handle stating that it is an “IS-136 Linear PA”.It is also white-on-blue to match the corresponding controller and RF modulelabels.1.2 Kit ContentsTo allow field conversion of EAC-2000 installations to digital operation, two kits areavailable:If the EAC-2000 has a 19-5598-1 Controller module installed, then a EK2000DCCHkit must be ordered. The EK2000ACCH kit consists of:• One 19-20001-1 Controller Module• One 19-20000-1 IS-136 RF Module• One 1819.G1 IS-136 Linear PAIf the EAC-2000 has a 19-20001-1 Controller module installed, then anEK2000DTC kit must be ordered. EK2000DTC kit consists of:• One 19-20000-1 IS-136 RF Module• One 1819.G1 IS-136 Linear PAThe EK2000DTC kit may be used for the DCCH channel if the EAC-2000 alreadyhas the 19-20001-1 Controller Module installed. Otherwise, any number ofEK2000DTC kits may be ordered to add or increase DTC capacity in the EAC-2000.Any shortage or apparent damage should be resolved before beginning theinstallation.
1.3 Saving the existing System ConfigurationIf the Controller in an existing EAC-2000 installation is being upgraded to the 19-20001-1 version, then many of the parameters programmed into the existing systemwill also need to be copied to the new controller. To assist in this operation a blankParameter Worksheet is included in the appendix. This provides a place to list thecurrent setup parameters so that they can be entered as the new digital-capableController is installed. The highlighted entries on the Parameter Worksheet aredigital-specific and will entered later.Information on connecting a local terminal to the EAC-2000D is contained in Section4.4 of Volume 1 of the EAC-2000 Manual.1.4 Determining the Digital-specific Parameters1.4.1 Identifying the Digital Donor Control ChannelThe digital donor control channel is the IS-136 control channel of the primary cellsite with which the EAC-2000 will communicate. It can be used in conjunction withan Analog Donor Control channel where both analog only and IS-136 mobiles are tobe served in the boosted coverage area.•When the booster is adjacent to a single cell site, the control channel(s) of thatcell site is(are) the donor control channel(s).•When the booster is adjacent to several cell sites, the control channel(s) of thecell site with the most unused channels should be chosen. (This cell is then referredto as the primary donor cell.) More than one cell site being received by a donorantenna can result in unwanted hand-offs by the cellular system, causing droppedcalls. Therefore the donor antenna should be positioned to favor the desired donorcell site. As in the analog case, the reverse-path signal level received from the EAC-2000 by the adjacent cell sites must be less than the signal level received by theselected donor site. Usually a 10 dB margin is sufficient.•When both analog and digital donor channels are selected, it is best if they areboth from the same donor cell site as that makes positioning of the donor antennaeasier.
1.4.2 Selecting a Boosted Digital Control ChannelThe boosted digital control channel (selection X) is the control channel that will beused in the EAC-2000 coverage area. Select a channel that meets the followingrequirements:•At least a 3 channel separation from any donor channel (both control and voice)•At least a 21 channel separation from any boosted channel (both control and voice). (Closer spacing is possible with higher losses, consult the factory)•Conforms to the local system configuration. (Since IS-136 mobiles areassisted in finding a DCCH, the system must be configured to add theboosted Digital Control Channel to those information broadcasts). There areseveral strategies in the cellular system setup that can assist mobile DCCHselection. These are described in the appendix System Integration Issuesand Strategies.1.4.3 Recording the digital parameters on the Parameter WorksheetTo make it easier to program the digital parameters into the system, they may beentered onto the parameter worksheet. The digital parameters are highlighted sothey can be easily found.2.0 Installing the new HardwareThis section of the manual details the installation of the hardware contained in theDCCH kit. By convention the DCCH hardware is installed in slot 5, so any AMPShardware (PA and RF Module) currently installed in slot 5 must be removed orrelocated to another unused slot. The analog 19-5598-1 Controller will be removedso it can be replaced with the 19-20001-1 IS-136 controller included in the DCCHkit.This upgrade will require the system be removed from service for a period of timeand should be scheduled to reduce impact on service.2.1 Removing the AMPS hardwareBe sure that all current set-up information from the system has been recorded asdescribed in section 1.3 of this manual.Slot 5 is the fifth position from the left in the RF/IF module card cage. Thecorresponding PA position is the upper right slot in the lower (for a 10-channel
EAC-2000) PA cage. For a 5-channel EAC-2000, it is in the upper right slot of thePA cage.When no traffic is currently being handled by the booster shut off the booster.Remove the Controller, RF module and PA that are currently in slot 5.2.2 Installing the DCCH hardwareInstall the 1819.G1 IS-136 PA into PA Slot 5Install the 19-20000-1 IS-136 RF Module into IF slot 5Install the IS-136 Controller into the controller slotConnect the jumper cable from the IS-136 Controller to the IS-136 RF module asshown in the detail Figure 1.Verify all modules are fully seated, the retaining screws on the Controller and RFModule are finger-tight, and the front-panel data cable is correctly installed betweenthe 19-20001-1 Controller and the 19-20000-1 IS-136 RF Module in slot 5.If DTC kits are being installed, place the 19-20000-1 I.F. modules in the desiredslots. For DTC hand-in, a 19-20000-1 module must be placed in card cage slot 6.19-20000-1 modules may be placed in any other available slot for DTC operation.If analog control channel operation is to be provided, then an analog 19-5599-1Cellular I.F. module must be left in card cage slot 1. If necessary, existing 19-5599-1 analog modules may be removed to make room for the new 19-20000-1 digitalmodules.Note: The IS-136 PA(s) will be installed as part of the following procedure.2.3 Preparing the AMPS hardwareSince the Controller contains all of the channel assignment information, when thesystem is initially powered up with the 19-20001-1 Controller the system willattempt to run with the factory defaults, causing a mismatch with the combinertuning. Therefore it is recommended that all the analog PA’s be pulled so that theyremain in their slot but do not make contact with the backplane connector. Thiswill effectively take them out of the system until the channels are correctlyprogrammed.
2.4 Connecting a Local TerminalThe IS-136 Controller uses the same RS-232 parameters and same style cable as theoriginal controller. Connect the terminal as follows.1. Using the data cable that was provided with the EAC-2000, connect theterminal to the 25-pin D-sub connector located on the front of thecontroller module.2. Power up the terminal and set it to the following parameters:•9600 baud•Even parity•7 data bits, 1 stop bit•Full duplex (no local echo)If possible, also set the terminal to—•All capitals•Send carriage return only (no line feed)•Disable AUTO XON/XOFF and soft scrollIf you are using a terminal emulation program, select TTY or VT100. BeLocal TerminalConnectorJumper CableFigure 1Detail showing Local Terminal Connector and Installed Jumper Cable
aware that some terminal emulation programs generate extraneous charactersthat may interfere with communicating with the EAC-2000.3. Power up the EAC-2000. (After about 2 seconds, the terminal should respond CONSOLE LOCKED.)4. Enter <CR> (carriage return or enter, depending on the keyboard). (The terminal should respond with a welcome message and prompt you for a password.)•If something comes up but is illegible, check the terminal setup.• If nothing comes up, power down. Recheck the power hookup, theterminal hookup, and the terminal setup.5. Enter the password, followed by <CR>. The default password is 1234. (Theterminal should respond with more salutation and the > prompt.) The systemis ready for you to set parameters.2.5 Configuring the SystemConfiguring the system consists of re-entering previous analog channel and setupinformation as well as the new digital setup parameters into the IS-136 Controller.To make this operation easier, the setup screens exactly parallel those used in theAMPS EAC-2000, with additions to cover digital operation as needed. Since formany systems the default values are acceptable, reprogramming of those values willnot be needed. The defaults for both the AMPS and digital-equipped EAC-2000 areshown on the Parameter Worksheet.2.6 Changes to the SET Menus for DCCH and DTC OperationThe following changes have been made to the SET menus to accommodate DCCHand DTC operation:1) In the RF Boards / Position X menu, STATUS parameter, the following choicesare now available (for all boards except board 6): (0) DISABLED (1) ENABLED AMPS Control (2) ENABLED AMPS Voice (3) ENABLED TDMA DCCH (4) ENABLED TDMA DTCFor board 6, the choices are:(0) DISABLED(1) ENABLED Scan
Note that only one position Status may be set to ENABLED AMPS Control.Also, only one position Status may be set to ENABLED TDMA DCCH2) The Boosted Channel (whether it is voice, analog control or DCCH) is now set inthe RF Boards / Position X menu. For example, if you have the "Status" of aboard set to ENABLED TDMA DCCH, the position menu for that board willdisplay as follows:Position 5A Status ...............................ENABLED TDMA DCCHB Boosted DCCH Channel ................. 169C Diversity ............................ON3) On the PA Menu, Selection K, "Key Forward PA" has been changed as follows.If you select a PA number for which the associated Board STATUS is ENABLEDTDMA DCCH or ENABLED TDMA DTC, then you will be prompted to enterthe desired PA output power. The allowable range is 33 to 48 dBm in one dBincrements. In the case of the digital PA, there is no power adjustment screw.Rather, the power out is controlled by software to be in a range of the PA powerset point - 0 to +0.5 dB.Once you have entered the desired power out, the PA will be keyed, and the PApower out reading will be displayed as usual. During this display, the PA powerout setting may be adjusted up or down by entering "U" or "D". This allows thepower out to be adjusted to compensate for the varying losses in the combiner andthe duplexer such that the desired power out at the antenna connector can beachieved.Following is the display that occurs when a TDMA PA is keyed. Enter your selection ...k NOTE: Keying PA may cause calls to drop and will disrupt service in the EAC coverage area. Enter RETURN to exit or number of PA to key : 5 PA 5 is DTC or DCCH; PA Output is software controlled to a target range of PA Power Setting +/- .3 dB ... Current PA Power Setting is : +46.5 dBm Enter new value (or RETURN if no change) ... While keyed, Enter "U" or "D" to adjust the PA Power Setting ... Current PA Power Setting is : +46.5 dBm PA Position 5 Channel Number 169 PA Power +46.6 dBm
4) On the PA Menu, if any board has Status set to Enabled TDMA DCCH orEnabled TDMA Voice, additional power settings appear. Following is the full PAMenu.Power AmplifiersA Forward PA Power Step - Voice ..................0B Forward PA Power Step - Control ................0C Forward PA Power Step - Hand-off................0D Forward PA Power Low Alarm Point - Voice........+40.0 dBmE Forward PA Power Low Alarm Point - Control......+40.0 dBmF Forward PA Power Low Alarm Point - Hand-off.....+40.0 dBmG Reverse PA Power Set - Voice ...................+20 dBmH Reverse PA Power Set - Control .................+20 dBmI Reverse PA Power Low Alarm Point - Voice........+15 dBmJ Reverse PA Power Low Alarm Point - Control......+15 dBmK Key Forward PA .................................POWER ADJ / COMBINER TUNINGL Key Reverse PA .................................POWER MEASUREMENTM Forward PA Power Low Alarm Point - DCCH ........+40.0 dBmN Reverse PA Power Set - DCCH ....................+20 dBmO Forward PA Power Low Alarm Point - DTC .........+40.0 dBmP Reverse PA Power Set - DTC .....................+20 dBmX Done with this menuNote that selections M through P are new. They allow setting of the Forward PAPower Low Alarm Point and Reverse PA Power Set for DCCH and DTC boardsand PAs. These settings correspond in functionality to their counterparts for theanalog voice and control channels.Note that there is no "Reverse PA Power Low Alarm Point" setting for the DTCor DCCH reverse PAs. The TDMA boards perform closed loop power control andreverse PA power out checking. There is still an alarm generated if the ReversePA power output is low, however, the threshold at which the alarm occurs is notoperator settable.5) The Control Channels menu (under the System Parameters menu) has beenchanged to accommodate extra settings for DCCH. The following additionalmenu items will appear if a board Status is set to Enabled TDMA DCCH.I Donor DCCH Channel ................................. 400J DCCH Channel State During "All Channels Busy" ...... DIRECTED RETRYThe Donor DCCH Channel setting has obvious functionality.The DCCH Channel State During "All Channels Busy" paramater hasfunction that controls the Boosted DCCH operation when all channelsare busy (or, if there is no Donor DCCH being received).The available choices are as follows. (1) Off
(2) DENY ACCESS, BUT COUNT (3) BOOST ACCESSES (4) DIRECTED RETRYThese selections are identical to the selections for the analog "Control ChannelState when All Channels Busy" parameter.6) The Control Channels Menu no longer has a "Boosted Control Channel" selection.This channel is now entered in the RF Board menu.7) The Voice Channels Menu no longer has a "Boosted Voice Channels" selection.These channels are now entered in the RF Board menu.8) The RSSI Alarm Points menu under the Alarms menu has two new settings toaccommodate the DCCH. The new RSSI Alarm Points menu is as follows: RSSI Alarm Points A Donor Control Channel RSSI - High Alarm Point ........DISABLED B Donor Control Channel RSSI - Low Alarm Point .........-80 dBm C Donor Voice Channel RSSI - High Alarm Point ..........DISABLED D Donor DCCH Channel RSSI - High Alarm Point ...........DISABLED E Donor DCCH Channel RSSI - Low Alarm Point ............-80 dBmNote that selections D and E are new. They allow the setting of the RSSI levelsthat cause alarms for the Donor DCCH.9) The PA power settings for the forward PA for DCCH and DTC have a resolutionof 0.1 dBm. Also, the settings for the analog PA's have been changed to have aresolution of 0.1 dBm. The associated powers reported with the "SSS" commandand the "PWR" command will read with resolution of 0.1 dBm.Note that the accuracy of this reading ultimately depends upon the calibration ofthe sensor in the PA or or the M1 antenna power sensor. Typically, this accuracyis +/- .75 dB.The reason power out is reported with a resolution of 0.1 dB even though theaccuracy is no better than 0.75 dB is to allow small changes in output power to beresolved and displayed. For example, if a reported power out changes from +46.7dBm to +46.2 dBm in a short term, the appropriate conclusion to draw is that (1)the power out initially was 46.7 +/- 0.75 dBm and (2) the power out dropped byabout 0.5 dB.
3.0 Tuning the Transmitter Combiner and Setting Output PowerThe combiner must be tuned and the output power levels set whenever the boostedchannels are entered or changed. For the upgrade to DCCH at least the boostedDCCH will be new and will require adjustment. Any other channel changes willalso require retuning.Even if the DCCH is only new channel to be tuned, it is preferable to repeak thecombiner and verify the output power for the other channels.3.1 Tuning the DCCH Combiner PA 51. With the system power OFF, connect power-measuring equipment to the M1antenna port (see Figure XX). Be sure that PA 5 (the IS-136 PA) is fully seated).Remove the cover plates from the forward combiner(s) to reveal the combinertuning screws. Then turn the power back on. Output power may be monitoredusing a through-line wattmeter (or a wattmeter with a built-in load) to monitoroutput power.2. From the SET Main Menu, type B <CR> to display the Power Amplifiers Menu.A Forward PA Power Step - Voice ..................0B Forward PA Power Step - Control ................0C Forward PA Power Step - Hand-off................0D Forward PA Power Low Alarm Point - Voice........+40.0 dBmE Forward PA Power Low Alarm Point - Control......+40.0 dBmF Forward PA Power Low Alarm Point - Hand-off.....+40.0 dBmG Reverse PA Power Set - Voice ...................+20 dBmH Reverse PA Power Set - Control .................+20 dBmI Reverse PA Power Low Alarm Point - Voice........+15 dBmJ Reverse PA Power Low Alarm Point - Control......+15 dBmK Key Forward PA .................................POWER ADJ / COMBINER TUNINGL Key Reverse PA .................................POWER MEASUREMENTM Forward PA Power Low Alarm Point - DCCH ........+40.0 dBmN Reverse PA Power Set - DCCH ....................+20 dBmO Forward PA Power Low Alarm Point - DTC .........+40.0 dBmP Reverse PA Power Set - DTC .....................+20 dBmX Done with this menu3. Type K <CR> to key a forward PA.4. Type 5 <CR> to key PA 5 and display the forward power output as measured at thesensor.
5. Refer to the illustration affixed to the inside of the front door of the EAC-2000cabinet to determine which combiner cavities coordinate with which PAs. Loosenthe lock nut and adjust combiner cavity 5 using a screwdriver.•If using a wattmeter, adjust for maximum power output as indicated by thewattmeter.•Retighten the lock nut.NOTE: The power reading displayed on the terminal will not vary as thecombiner is tuned. Combiner Cavity6. Adjust the power output for PA 5 from the laptop computer as described inparagraph 3) in section 2.6.F NOTE: The PA power level displayed on the terminal is 3 to 4 dBhigher than the power level at the antenna port because of internal cableand combiner losses. The displayed PA power ranges from +38 to +47dBm (7–45 watts), which corresponds to a range at the M1 antennaconnector of +34 to +43 dBm (3–20 watts). If the displayed power levelis used instead of a wattmeter, take these differences into consideration.
Always use a wattmeter if an accurate power level reading at the M1antenna connector is desired.3.2 Adjusting Combiners and Power levels for PAs 1-4, and 7-11In a like manner the combiner can be tuned for the remaining analog channels by selectinga new PA each time. Each PA should be fully seated in its slot before proceeding. Thepower level is set differently on the analog PA’s as follows:1. Adjust the power output for each PA using a small screwdriver or adjustment tool toturn the PA power potentiometer on the front of the PA (Figure 4-9). Use awattmeter, if available, to measure the power output. Adjust to the level necessaryto meet the authorized ERP level from the antenna.F NOTE: The PA power level displayed on the terminal is 3 to 4 dBhigher than the power level at the antenna port because of internal cableand combiner losses. The displayed PA power ranges from +38 to +47dBm (7–45 watts), which corresponds to a range at the M1 antennaconnector of +34 to +43 dBm (3–20 watts). If the displayed power levelis used instead of a wattmeter, take these differences into consideration.Always use a wattmeter if an accurate power level reading at the M1antenna connector is desired.Location of Analog PA Power Potentiometer
2. Note that the PA power potentiometer has a 7–10 dB turn down range. If thepower out cannot be adjusted low enough, hit ESC to return to the PowerAmplifiers Menu.Select B, Forward PA Power Step - Control. This allows entry of a settingbetween 0 and 3. Increasing the step by 1 causes the maximum power out to bereduced by 4 dB (2→8 dB, 3→12 dB). Adjust this parameter in conjunction withthe potentiometer to achieve the desired output power.3. Repeat steps 3 (selecting a new PA each time) through 7 to adjust the remaininganalog PAs (if installed).If low power out is desired, use selection A, Forward PA Power Step - Voice, forPAs 2–5 and 7–11.4. When all PAs have been adjusted, make a second pass through the PAs to checktuning and power levels, and make further adjustments as needed. This step isneeded because one of the cavities might have been close to the point to which asecond cavity was being tuned. This would cause erroneous power readings andadjustment during the initial pass.3.3 Adjusting the PA 6 Power LevelPA 6 output power does not pass through the combiner. (For a description of PA 6function, see Section 2 of Volume 3, Technical Information.) To adjust its powerlevel—1. Turn the power off, move the power measuring equipment to the M2 antenna port,and turn the power back on.If low power out of PA 6 is desired, use selection C, Forward PA Power Step -Hand-off, to reduce the maximum power out.NOTE: If a digital module is installed in slot 6, then use the procedure described inparagraph 3) in section 2.6 for setting the power output level.
EAC-2000 Operating Parameters Work SheetSerial Number ____________________ (from “SSS” command)RF Boards1234567891011Status _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____Diversity_____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____Power AmplifiersForward PA Power Step - Voice _____Forward PA Power Step - Control _____Forward PA Power Step - Hand-off _____Forward PA Power Low Alarm Point - Voice _____Forward PA Power Low Alarm Point - Control _____Forward PA Power Low Alarm Point - Hand-off _____Reverse PA Power Set - Voice _____Reverse PA Power Set - Control _____Reverse PA Power Low Alarm Point - Voice _____Reverse PA Power Low Alarm Point - Control _____Site IdSite Identification ______________Multi-Hop Feature _____Control ChannelsDonor Control Channel _____Boosted Control Channel _____RF Board Pair to Use for Control _____Control Channel State _____Directed Retry Channels 1_____ 2_____ 3_____ 4_____ 5_____ 6_____Backup Control Channel Option _____Revertive Control Channel Option _____• Substitute Control Channel _____• Booster Link Channel _____• These selections only appear if Backup Control Channel is enabled or if Multi-Hop mode3 or 4 is selected.Voice ChannelsBoosted Voice Channel 2 ____ 3 ____ 4 ____ 5 ____ 7 ____ 8 ____ 9 ____ 10 ____ 11 ____Donor Voice Channels5970 Hz SAT 6000 Hz SAT 6030 Hz SAT____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ________ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ________ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ________ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ________ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ________ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ________ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ________ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ________ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ________ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____Modem ControlMaster Password ________________Restricted Password ____________Console Timeout _____Auto Dial Enable _____Dial-up Phone Number 1 __________________________
Dial-up Phone Number 2 __________________________Auto Dial Trials Max _____Max Auto Dial Trial Period _____Delay Between Auto Dial Trials _____Modem Mobile MIN ________________Modem Mobile Power step _____Modem SetupNOTE: Record these strings before the upgrade, but do NOT reenter them after version 2X.03 orlater is installed. Versions 2X.03 and later have new default strings that allow the remote link torun at high baud rates and to use error correction.Init String __________________________Dial Command _________________________Hangup String _______________________Local Port Baud Rate _____Local Port Comm Params _____Remote Port Baud Rate _____Remote Port Comm Params _____Thresholds and Power Control MenuMobile Dynamic Power Control Threshold _____Hand-in Threshold _____Multi-Donor Activation Threshold _____Hand-back Threshold _____Hand-in Mobile Power Step _____Hand-back Mobile Power Step _____RSSI Averaging Speed _____Delay Between Hand-in Attempts _____Station Power Class Selective Boosting ___________Call Disconnect ParametersDonor RSSI _____Sat Fade Timeout _____Max Number of Hand-back Attempts _____Minimum Delay Between Hand-back Attempts _____Call Processing Parameters MenuMobile RSSI > Threshold Parameters _____Hand-back Grab-back Control _____Alarms MenuAntenna Return Loss - Low Alarm Point _____
PA to Antenna Return Loss - High Alarm Point _____PA Temp - High Alarm Point _____PA Temp - Fan Activation Point _____PA Temp - PA Power Cutback Point _____Power Control Causes PA Power Cutback _____+28 Volt Supply - PA Power Cutback Point _____+28 Volt Supply - Low Alarm Point _____+12 Volt Supply - Low Alarm Point _____+6 Volt Supply - Low Alarm Point _____External Analog Inputs MenuPA 1-6 Cage: PA 7-11 Cage:Ext. Analog Input 1 Alarm State _____ Ext. Analog Input 1 Alarm State _____Ext. Analog Input 2 Alarm State _____ Ext. Analog Input 2 Alarm State _____Ext. Analog Input 3 Alarm State _____ Ext. Analog Input 3 Alarm State _____Ext. Analog Input 4 Alarm State _____ Ext. Analog Input 4 Alarm State _____External Digital Inputs MenuPA 1-6 Cage: PA 7-11 Cage:Ext. Digital Input 1 Alarm State _____ Ext. Digital Input 1 Alarm State _____Ext. Digital Input 2 Alarm State _____ Ext. Digital Input 2 Alarm State _____Ext. Digital Input 3 Alarm State _____ Ext. Digital Input 3 Alarm State _____Ext. Digital Input 4 Alarm State _____ Ext. Digital Input 4 Alarm State _____External Digital Outputs MenuPA 1-6 Cage: PA 7-11 Cage:Ext. Digital Output 1 State _____ Ext. Digital Output 1 State _____Ext. Digital Output 2 State _____ Ext. Digital Output 2 State _____Ext. Digital Output 3 State _____ Ext. Digital Output 3 State _____Ext. Digital Output 4 State _____ Ext. Digital Output 4 State _____Critical Alarms(NOTE: default values for these are shown)Board Out-of-Service Alarm...........................................CRITICAL ___________Board ROM Alarm.........................................................CRITICAL ___________Board Calibration Memory Alarm ..................................CRITICAL ___________Serial Data Link Alarm ..................................................CRITICAL ___________Personality Mismatch Alarm...........................................CRITICAL ___________Synthesizer Unlocked Alarm ..........................................CRITICAL ___________RVS PA PWR Low Alarm ............................................ CRITICAL ___________RSSI Alarm ...................................................................LOG ONLY ___________PA Out-of-Service Alarm ..............................................CRITICAL ___________PA TEMP - High Alarm ................................................CRITICAL ___________
PA Power - Low Alarm ................................................. CRITICAL ___________PA to Antenna Loss High Alarm ...................................CRITICAL ___________Antenna RET Loss Alarm .............................................. CRITICAL ___________ROM Alarm ..................................................................CRITICAL ___________RAM Alarm ..................................................................CRITICAL ___________NOVRAM Alarm .......................................................... CRITICAL ___________SAT Detector Alarm ...................................................... CRITICAL ___________Power Supply Voltages - Low Alarm..............................CRITICAL ___________External Analog Input Alarm.......................................... LOG ONLY ___________External Digital Input Alarm ..........................................LOG ONLY ___________RSSI Alarm PointsDonor Control Channel RSSI - High Alarm Point NONE _____Donor Control Channel RSSI - Low Alarm Point -80 dBm _____Forward Voice Channel RSSI - High Alarm Point NONE _____
$036($& 0DQXDOInstallation • Operation • TechnicalOrder No. 27-7654-3Issue 12/95© Copyright 1995 Allen Telecom SystemsAll Rights Reserved
Field SupportIf you need technical assistance with the EAC-2000™, contact at one of the following telephone numbers:Extend-A-Cell : (800) 800-EAC4 (3224)or (216) 349-8413Systems Engineering Department: (216) 349-8413The AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual (Order No. 27-7654-3, 12/95) includes thefollowing: 27-7655-2 Volume 1, Installation Procedures 27-7656-2 Volume 2, Operating Procedures 27-7657-2 Volume 3, Technical Information 27-7658-3 Appendices 27-7659-2 Glossary and Index 27-7660-1 Parts and Accessories Ordering Informationii
LIMITED WARRANTYALLEN TELECOM SYSTEMS, a Division of the ALLEN TELECOM GROUP,INC. ("ALLEN TELECOM") warrants, on the terms and conditions hereto set forth,all products manufactured by it to be free under normal use and service from defectsin materials and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of shipment,to the first consumer (the "Warranty Period").ALLEN TELECOM’s obligation under this Limited Warranty is limited to promptrepair or replacement of the product, at its option, without charge, at an authorizedALLEN TELECOM dealer or at the factory of ALLEN TELECOM in Cleveland,Ohio, when the product is returned to an authorized dealer or to the factory with alltransportation charges prepaid and examination of the product shall disclose it to havebeen defective in the respects aforesaid during the Warranty Period.The Limited Warranty shall not be extended beyond its original term with respectto any part or parts repaired or replaced by ALLEN TELECOM hereunder.The Warranty Period shall not apply to any product which has been repaired oraltered in any manner by anyone other than ALLEN TELECOM or an authorizedoutlet of ALLEN TELECOM, or if the defect, malfunction or failure of the productwas caused by damage by lightning, flood or other acts of nature or by power surges,or from unreasonable use, or from improper installation or application, or to anyproduct which has not been maintained or used in accordance with the operatingspecifications set forth in ALLEN TELECOM’s written instructions.IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANYPARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE WARRANTYPERIOD SPECIFIED ABOVE.UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL ALLEN TELECOM BE LIABLE FORANY CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES FOR BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY OROF ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY.Some states do not allow limitation on how long an implied warranty lasts, so theabove limitation may not apply to you. Some states do not allow the exclusion orlimitation of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusionmay not apply to you. This Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you mayalso have other rights which vary from state to state.ALLEN TELECOM neither assumes nor authorizes any person to assume for itany obligation or liability other than as herein expressly stated.iii
&RQWHQWV Quick Start Checklist...................................... ix1. Introduction ........................................ 1-12. Preliminary Decisions ................................. 2-13. Installing the Hardware ................................ 3-14. Setting Up for Initial Operation .......................... 4-15. Installing the Remote Link .............................. 5-16. Optimizing Performance ............................... 6-17. Multi-Hop™ Operation ................................. 7-18. Operation with Multi-Donor™ Units ....................... 8-19. RESERVED FOR FUTURE USE ......................... 9-110. Combined Operation: Multi-Hop / Multi-Donor.............. 10-11. Introduction ........................................ 1-12. SET Command...................................... 2-13. System Monitoring Commands .......................... 3-14. Special Commands ................................... 4-1 1. Introduction ........................................ 1-12. EAC-2000™ Description ............................... 2-13. Specifications and Drawings ............................ 3-1A. Troubleshooting Guide ................................A-1B. Isolation .......................................... B-1C. Reference Oscillator Adjustment .......................... C-1 ........................................... Glossary-1................................................ Index-1.......................Parts-1AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual (27-7654-3, 12/95) Page vv
9ROXPH,QVWDOODWLRQ3URFHGXUHV27-7655-2Issue 12/95© Copyright 1995 Allen Telecom SystemsAll Rights Reserved
Field SupportIf you need technical assistance with the AMPS EAC-2000™, contact at one of the following telephone numbers:Extend-A-Cell : (800) 800-EAC4 (3224)or (216) 349-8413Systems Engineering Department: (216) 349-8413
Contents ............................................ vi.......................................vii.......................................... 1-11.1 About This Volume ................................. 1-11.1.1 Contents .................................. 1-11.1.2 Terminology ............................... 1-31.2 About the AMPS EAC-2000™.......................... 1-41.2.1 Use of Boosters............................. 1-41.2.2 Frequency Allocation ......................... 1-41.2.3 EAC-2000 Operation ......................... 1-4................................... 2-12.1 Introduction ....................................... 2-12.2 Use of Multi-hop™ Configuration or Multi-donor™ Units ........ 2-22.3 Site Requirements ................................... 2-22.3.1 Location .................................. 2-22.3.2 ac Service ................................. 2-32.3.3 Space .................................... 2-32.3.4 Mounting Surface ........................... 2-42.4 Antennas ......................................... 2-42.4.1 Type .................................... 2-52.4.2 Placement ................................ 2-62.4.3 Measuring Signal Level and Isolation .............. 2-92.5 Selecting Channels ................................. 2-112.5.1 Identifying the Donor Control Channel ............ 2-112.5.2 Selecting a Boosted Control Channel ............. 2-122.5.3 The Revertive Control Channel Option............ 2-132.5.4 The Substitute Control Channel ................. 2-13• Disabling the Substitute Control Channel ...... 2-14• Enabling the Substitute Control Channel ....... 2-142.5.5 Selecting the Directed Retry Channels ............ 2-152.5.6 Selecting Donor Voice Channels ................ 2-162.5.7 Selecting Boosted Voice Channels ............... 2-17AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page iii
................................. 3-13.1 Introduction ....................................... 3-13.2 Mechanical Installation ............................... 3-43.2.1 Uncrating the Equipment ...................... 3-43.2.2 Mounting the Cabinet......................... 3-43.2.3 Securing the Doors .......................... 3-53.3 Connecting the EAC-2000 to ac Power ................... 3-63.4 Installing the Antennas ............................... 3-63.4.1 Connecting the Antennas ...................... 3-73.5 Connecting External Alarms/Controls (Optional) .............. 3-8........................... 4-14.1 Introduction ....................................... 4-14.2 Powering Up the EAC-2000 ........................... 4-34.3 Powering Down the EAC-2000 ......................... 4-44.4 Connecting a Local Terminal ........................... 4-44.5 Becoming Familiar with System Commands ................ 4-64.5.1 Basic Commands............................ 4-64.5.2 Using the SET Menus ....................... 4-104.6 Setting Initial Parameters ............................. 4-124.6.1 Checking System Status ...................... 4-124.6.2 Entering the Site ID ......................... 4-134.6.3 Setting the Donor Control Channel .............. 4-144.6.4 Setting the Boosted Control Channel ............. 4-154.6.5 Setting the Directed Retry Channels .............. 4-154.6.6 Setting the Donor Voice Channels ............... 4-164.6.7 Setting the Boosted Voice Channels .............. 4-184.6.8 Programming Alarms and Thresholds............. 4-184.6.9 Programming the Modem Mobile MIN, Mobile Power Step, and Passwords .............. 4-244.7 Tuning Transmitter Combiner and Setting Output Power ....... 4-254.7.1 Adjusting Combiners and Power Levels for PAs 1–5 and 7-11 .............. 4-254.7.2 Adjusting the PA 6 Power Level ................ 4-284.7.3 Setting Reverse Path Output Power (If Necessary) .... 4-294.7.4 Setting PA Power Low Alarm Points ............. 4-304.7.5 Setting Time and Report Values ................ 4-31Page iv AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)
............................... 5-15.1 Introduction ....................................... 5-15.2 Setting Up Service .................................. 5-35.3 Programming the Mobile Radio ......................... 5-45.4 Checking Out the Mobile.............................. 5-45.5 Testing the Remote Link .............................. 5-55.5.1 EAC-2000 Answering ........................ 5-55.5.2 EAC-2000 Originating ........................ 5-6 ................................ 6-16.1 Introduction ....................................... 6-16.2 Determining Hand-in and Hand-back Thresholds ............. 6-16.3 Setting Hand-in and Hand-back Thresholds ................. 6-2.................................. 7-17.1 Introduction ....................................... 7-17.2 How Multi-Hop Operation Works ........................ 7-17.3 Installing the EAC-2000 in Multi-Hop Configuration .......... 7-27.3.1 Achieving Antenna Isolation and Signal Level ........ 7-37.3.2 Enabling the Multi-Hop Feature ................. 7-37.3.3 Selecting Boosted Channels for Each Unit .......... 7-47.3.4 Setting the Hand-back Threshold ................. 7-67.3.5 Reviewing the Hand-in Threshold ................ 7-9........................ 8-18.1 Introduction ....................................... 8-18.1.1 Purpose of Multi-Donor Units ................... 8-18.1.2 MDU Operation ............................. 8-28.2 Installing the EAC-2000 for MDU Operation ................ 8-28.2.1 Achieving Adequate Signal Level at the EAC-2000 .... 8-38.2.2 Achieving Adequate Signal Level at the MDU ....... 8-38.2.3 Setting the Multi-Donor Activation Threshold ........ 8-48.2.4 Assigning a Booster Link Channel................ 8-4AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page v
. 10-110.1 Introduction ...................................... 10-110.2 Installing the EAC-2000 for Combined Operation ............ 10-210.2.1 Requirements ............................. 10-210.2.2 Channel Assignments ........................ 10-21-1. Important Terms Used in This Manual....................... 1-31-2. System Operation ..................................... 1-52-1. Pre-Installation Checklist ................................ 2-12-2. Recommended Space................................... 2-32-3 Typical Antenna Installation .............................. 2-82-4 Antenna Isolation v. Horizontal Separation .................... 2-92-5 Antenna Isolation v. Vertical Separation ..................... 2-103-1. Hardware Installation Checklist ............................ 3-23-2. EAC-2000, Front View (Door Removed) ..................... 3-23-3. EAC-2000, Back View (Door Removed) ..................... 3-33-4. Outdoor Cabinet Footprint ............................... 3-43-5. Antenna Connectors .................................... 3-73-6. External Alarm/Control Connector Pin Out .................... 3-83-7. Electrical Specifications for Inputs and Outputs ................. 3-93-8. Typical Wiring for External Inputs and Outputs ............... 3-114-1. Setup Checklist ....................................... 4-24-2. EAC-2000 Breakers .................................... 4-34-3. Breaker Locations ..................................... 4-34-4. Location of Local Terminal Connector ....................... 4-44-5. Command Definitions .................................. 4-64-6. System Commands .................................... 4-84-7. SET Command Menu Map.............................. 4-114-8. Combiner Cavity .................................... 4-254-9. Location of PA Power Potentiometer ....................... 4-275-1. Remote Link Installation Checklist ......................... 5-37-1. Example of Valid Channel Set ............................ 7-510-1. Combined Configuration Example......................... 10-110-2. Channel Assignment Example............................ 10-3Page vi AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)
Quick Start ChecklistQuick Start ChecklistThis checklist provides a brief summary of steps for starting up the AMPS EAC-2000™. For detailed instructions, see Sections 1–6. For special configurations andoptions, see Sections 7–10.(See Section 2) 4 antennas: M1, M2, D1 and mobile Isolation: greater than 75 dB measured between D1 and M1, M2. Signal level: -75 dBm or greater from donor on D1 antenna. ac power: 240 V/20 A service wired to power panel in rear. Channel separation: Boosted channel set assigned with no boostedchannel closer than 3 channels (90 kHz) to any donor channel.Separation by 150 kHz is recommended. Mobile MIN assigned for programming of modem mobile. Donor channels: Have list of donor channels and SAT ready.(See Section 4)1. Connect terminal or computer RS-232 port to 25-pin D female connectoron controller board using supplied cable. Set up terminal for 9600-E-7-1,no CTS/RTS, no X-on/X-off.2. Turn on rear panel ac breaker. 3. Turn on power supply ac breaker(s). Be sure the 6/12 V power switchis on.4. The terminal should "come alive" and display CONSOLE LOCKED.Press ENTER, and receive the banner showing the firmware revision andthe unit serial number. At the password prompt, enter the defaultpassword 1234 and <CR>.Continued . . .AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page vii
Quick Start Checklist(See Sections 4, 5, and 6)1. Type SSS <CR>. (Nothing should show DISABLED. If anything showsdisabled, refer to Appendix A, Troubleshooting Guide.)2. Type ALA <CR>. (There should be no alarms. If there are any OUTOF SERVICE or memory alarms, refer to Appendix A.) 3. Type SET <CR> and go into submenu C, System Parameters.4. Enter submenu A and program the site ID. 5. Enter submenu B and program the donor and boosted control channels.Decide how the control channel is to act when all channels are busy. 6. Enter submenu C and program the boosted voice channel numbers forchannels 2–5 and 7-11, if installed.7. Program the donor voice channels into list A, B, or C, depending uponthe SAT used at the donor. To enter a 15-channel set, enter a plus sign(+) before the first channel number. Delete unneeded channels. 8. Enter the Modem Control submenu D and program the modem mobileMIN that has been assigned. Calls made to and from this number willnot be transferred to the booster, but will be trapped-out and handleddirectly by the donor. Also set the modem mobile power step to thedesired level. 9. Turn off the system power and connect power measuring equipment to theM1 antenna port. Turn system power back on. From the SET Mainmenu, enter submenu B, Power Amplifiers. Select menu entry K (KeyForward PA) for combiner tuning. Select amplifiers 1-5 and 7-11, ifinstalled. Use a screwdriver to adjust the combiner for maximum poweroutput. Use a small screwdriver or adjusting tool to adjust the PA powerpot on the front of each PA for desired power out of the unit.10. Turn off the system power, connect the power measuring equipment tothe M2 antenna port, and turn the system power back on. From the SETMain Menu, enter submenu B, Power Amplifiers. Select menu entry K(Key Forward PA) for combiner tuning and select PA 6. Adjust thepower to be equal to the voice channel power.11. Remove the test equipment and use <CTRL> X to exit the SET menucompletely. Press <CR> at the question prompt.Continued . . .Page viii AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)
Quick Start Checklist (Continued)12. From the command entry level >, use the TIM command to set the dateand time.13. From the command entry level >, enter DCS=0, DCH=0, and ALA=0 toreset the report values.1. Connect the 4 antennas. The unit is now operational!2. Type SCS <CR> and make some calls. You will see your MINdisplayed on call originations and answers.3. Connect the handset to the connector on the front of the mobile shelf (seeSection 5).4. Program hand-in/hand-back thresholds as desired (see Section 6).5. After completing installation and setup, secure cabinet doors.See Sections 7–10 for special configurations and options.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page ix
6HFWLRQ ,QWURGXFWLRQ1.1 About This VolumeThis volume, the first of three volumes pertaining to the AMPS EAC-2000™, contains detailed procedures for installing the EAC-2000.This volume has been divided into a Quick Start Checklist and 12sections, described below. Volume 2 contains operating procedures,and Volume 3 contains technical information. A set of appendices(described below), a glossary, and an index accompany the threevolumes.• Brief summary of installation andsetup procedures.• Contents of this volume, key terms,and a general introduction to the AMPS EAC-2000.• Factors to consider beforeyou begin installation.• Procedures formechanical, electrical, and antenna installation and connectionof external alarms or controls.• Procedures forpowering up the system, connecting a local terminal,programming parameters, tuning the transmitter combiner, andsetting output power.• Procedures forsetting up, programming, and checking out the mobile, andtesting the remote link.• Procedures for settinghand-back and hand-in thresholds to optimize boosterperformance.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 1-1
(Continued)• Procedures for installingthe EAC-2000 in a Multi-Hop chain. • Specialinstallation procedures when using the EAC-2000 with Multi-Donor Units.••• Recommendations forresolving selected installation and operation problems.• Recommendations for achievingantenna isolation. Procedures for orderingparts and accessories for units that are under warranty and for unitson which the warranty has expired.For detailed descriptions of all EAC-2000 operating parameters andprocedures for setting them, refer to Volume 2. For a more detaileddescription of the EAC-2000 and how it works, refer to Volume 3. Page 1-2 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)
Figure 1-1 lists key terms used in this volume. Additional terms andacronyms are defined in the Glossary.Figure 1-1. Important Terms Used in This ManualAdvanced Mobile Phone System. Cellular standard that providescompatible operation in the 824–849 and 869–894 MHz band.To receive, amplify, and reradiate signals to fill in weakcoverage areas. A system that boosts or repeats.The area where subscribers obtain coverage through thebooster.The cell site in communication with the booster.The control channel used between the cell site and the booster(and all the mobiles in direct contact with the cell site).The control channel used between the booster and the mobile in the booster coverage area (a different frequency than thedonor control channel).™The trademarked name for a booster made by Allen TelecomSystems. The path taken by the RF signal transmitted by the donor cell,which is received, amplified, and reradiated by a booster andreceived ultimately by a subscriber in the booster coverage area.Synonymous with , usually applied to boosters thattranslate frequencies. The EAC-2000 is type-accepted as arepeater.The path taken by the RF signal transmitted by a subscribermobile in the booster coverage area, which is received,amplified, and reradiated by a booster and received ultimately bythe donor cell site.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 1-3
1.2 About the AMPS EAC-2000This section provides a brief overview of how the EAC-2000 operates. For amore detailed discussion, refer to Volume 3, Technical Information. Cellular telephone systems transmit signals in two directions betweencell sites and mobile telephones within the signal coverage area. Thesignal path from the cell site to the mobiles is called the path, and the path from mobiles to cell site is the path. If weak signal transmissions occur within the coverage area becauseof indoor applications, terrain obstructions, or distance from thetransmitter, a relatively inexpensive way to extend transmission rangeis to install a signal booster that receives the signal, amplifies it, andreradiates it. (See Figure 1-2.)AMPS cellular systems use 824–849 MHz for reverse and 869–894MHz for forward transmissions. These frequency bands are dividedinto systems A and B, each with designated and. The EAC-2000 booster uses up to 21 individual narrowbandamplifiers: 1 (reverse) for the control channel, up to nine (forwardand reverse) for voice channels, and one amplifier (forward only) forhand-in and data message transmissions. The reverse half of thisboard acts as a locate receiver. There are two amplifiers for each IFboard (forward and reverse); each is a single channel (30 kHz) wideand has dual synthesizers that control input and output channelsindependently. The simplified diagram in Figure 1-2 illustrates one board (forwardand reverse paths) being used for the control channel, and one board(forward and reverse) being used for one voice channel.Page 1-4 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)
(Continued)Figure 1-2. System Operation The EAC-2000 monitors the donorcontrol channel to obtain system-specific information. It generates acontrol channel data stream and transmits it on another controlchannel frequency. Mobiles that are unable to receive the originalchannel then lock onto the boosted control channel and communicatewith the cell site through the booster. Control channel translation ispossible because the mobiles always lock onto the strongest controlchannel. The amplifiers for boosting voicechannels are keyed as needed when voice channel activity is detectedin the boosted coverage area. The EAC-2000 identifies mobiles inthe booster coverage area by two methods: one for identifyingmobiles that place or answer calls from within the booster coveragearea and another for identifying mobiles that enter the area with a callin progress.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 1-5
(Continued)When a call is placed or answered from within the booster coveragearea, the following sequence occurs:1. The mobile accesses the reverse boosted control channel. TheEAC-2000 receives the access, then accesses the reverse donorcontrol channel. 2. The EAC-2000 waits for the corresponding voice channeldesignation message on the forward channel.3. The EAC-2000 modifies the voice channel designation messageby substituting one of its boosted voice channels for the donorvoice channel, thus sending the mobile to one of the boostedvoice channels. 4. A boost path is set up between the mobile and the primarydonor cell site, with the mobile operating on the boosted voicechannel, the donor operating on the donor voice channel, andthe EAC-2000 translating and boosting between the two.To identify mobiles that may drive into the boosted coverage areawith a call in progress, the EAC-2000 scans the donor voice channelsand maintains a Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) averagefor each channel. If the average RSSI exceeds a preset threshold, theEAC-2000 hands the mobile to one of the boosted voice channels. To provide for situations inwhich in-progress calls may be linked to various neighboring cellsites (multi-donor operation), the system allows for entry of threeseparate , one for each possibleSupervisory Access Tone (SAT) frequency. If the booster is adjacent to a single cell site, that cell site is referredto as the , and the control channel of that cell site is the. The voice channels used in the donor cellmay be entered into the donor voice channel list with the SAT of thatcell site to handle mobiles that drive between the donor and boosterwith a call up.Page 1-6 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)
(Continued)If the booster is adjacent to several cell sites and there are donorantennas pointing at these cell sites, the control channel of one of thecell sites is chosen as the donor control channel, and this cell is thenreferred to as the . The voice channels of all theneighboring cells are entered into the scan list with the SAT of theneighboring cells. Calls placed or answered from within the booster coverage area(identified by decoding the data streams) are boosted back to theprimary donor cell. Calls handed in (identified by channel scanning)are boosted back to the cell on which the call was in progress. The EAC-2000 monitors for SAT fade, weakmobile RSSI, or mobile release to determine when to hand back themobile or terminate the translation through the booster. If weak RSSIis detected, the EAC-2000 then sends the mobile a hand-off messagedirecting it back to the original donor voice channel. This allows themobile to be covered as it drives out of the booster coverage areaback into the donor cell site coverage area. When amobile is heading away from the booster coverage area, it should behanded back to the donor cell site only if there is a strong enoughsignal to support the transmission. If the mobile is heading awayfrom the donor cell, handing it back to that cell would result in aweak signal. To handle this situation, the EAC-2000 uses the .Shortly after sending the hand-off message, the EAC-2000 tries tograb the mobile back by sending it a second hand-off messagedirecting it back to the boosted voice channel. Since the mobileresponds to the strongest signal, it will ignore the grab-back messageif the signal from the donor is stronger. If the booster signal isstronger, the mobile will come back to the booster voice channel. Ifthe mobile’s RSSI is weak, the EAC-2000 will periodically sendhand-back/grab-backs but continue to handle the mobile until thesignal level is unusable.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 1-7
6HFWLRQ 3UHOLPLQDU\'HFLVLRQV2.1 IntroductionBefore the EAC-2000 can be installed, preliminary decisions must be madeabout the following:• Use of Multi-hop configuration• Booster site • Antenna placement • Control and voice channels to be used As an installer, you may be involved in some or all of these decisions. Thechecklist in Figure 2-1 provides a brief overview of preparations to be madeprior to installing the EAC-2000.Figure 2-1. Pre-Installation Checklist 1. Coverage area and distance from base station identified. (Sec. 2.3.1) 2. Electrical service verified for installation site. (Sec. 2.3.2) 3. Site selected in accordance with EAC-2000 weight and space requirements.(Secs. 2.3.3 and 2.3.4) 4. M1, M2, D1 and mobile modem antennas selected and installed. (Sec. 2.4) Minimum vertical separation of antennas achieved. 5. Antenna isolation and signal levels from the cell site measured. (Sec. 2.4.3) 6. RF channels selected: (Sec. 2.5) Donor control channel Boosted control channel Directed retry channels (at least one of the six directed retry channels shouldbe assigned)AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 2-1
2.2 Use of Multi-Hop™ Configuration or Multi-Donor™ UnitsMulti-hop operation involves setting up two or more EAC-2000 units to operatetogether in a line. This configuration is described in greater detail in Section 7.Use of Multi-Donor Units involves placing a reverse-translating Multi-DonorUnit at cell sites adjacent to the booster to allow mobiles to be handed-off to theappropriate cells as they leave the booster area. Operation with Multi-DonorUnits is described in Section 8.If either of these arrangements is to be used, system parameters will need to beset accordingly. Minimum signal level requirements will also be affected.2.3 Site RequirementsThe site chosen for the EAC-2000 must meet requirements related to location,electrical service, space, and mounting surface, as described below. If a line-of-sight path between donorcell and booster is maintained and a high-gain 6- to 10-foot (2- to 3-meter) dish antenna is used, the EAC-2000 may be placed up to 80miles (130 km) away from the donor cell. (Using frequencytranslation for both voice and control channels makes it possible toplace the booster farther from the donor cell than is possible withnontranslating boosters.) The unit should be placed as close aspossible to the antennas to avoid excessive cable loss. Losses shouldbe kept to 3 dB or less for each antenna cable.Page 2-2 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)
The following ac service is required:• 240 Vac • single-phase • 20-amp minimum service The EAC-2000 unit is approximately 2 ft (W) x 3 ft 5 in (D) x 5 ft7 in (H) (61 cm x 104 cm x 170 cm). Allow space for the unit itselfplus additional space for access to the front and rear doors.Figure 2-2. Recommended SpaceAMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 2-3
The outdoor cabinet should be bolted to a concrete or otherweatherproof pad capable of supporting approximately 250 poundsper square foot (1220 kg per square meter). Adequate drainage awayfrom the pad should be provided to prevent water from accumulatingunderneath the cabinet.2.4 Antennas The EAC-2000 requires four antennas:• Primary antenna facing donor cell site(s), used for—- Reception of control and voice channel signals from donor cellsite(s).- Transmission of control and voice signals back to cell site(s).• Primary antenna facing mobiles in the booster coveragearea, used for—- Transmission of boosted control channel and boosted voice channelsto mobiles.- Diversity reception from mobiles.- Transmission of hand-back messages to mobiles.• Second antenna facing mobiles in the booster coverage area,used for—- Sending hand-in and grab-back messages to mobiles.- Diversity reception from mobiles.- Sending data messages to multi-hop EAC-2000s and Multi-DonorUnits.• Antenna for the installed cellular mobile. Used for—- Receiving and transmitting signals from any cell site in the system.Ensure that the proper antenna type and placement have been selected for eachantenna.Page 2-4 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)
The antennas for the booster area should be chosen by the samecriteria as used for a cell site. A typical installation might use thefollowing antennas:• One high-gain directional antenna pointed toward thedonor cell. • and Two identical directional or omnidirectionalantennas.A directional antenna facing away from the donor's coveragearea is recommended for installations where the booster islocated near the edge of the donor cell's coverage area. Thisarrangement prevents the unnecessary boosting of mobiles thatare in the donor cell's primary coverage area. It also allowsfewer channels of equipment to be used at the booster location.Omnidirectional antennas are appropriate for most otherapplications. Regardless of the type of antenna chosen, theM1 and M2 antennas must have identical gain andpatterns, and be installed to cover the same area.• A low-gain or YAGI base station antenna. AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 2-5
Antenna locations must meet the followingrequirements for minimum signal level, physical separation, andisolation.• The minimum signal level from anycell to be used as a donor must be -75 dBm at the D1 antennaconnector on the EAC-2000. The minimum signal level fromthe donor cell must be at least -105 dBm at the mobile antennafeed.Multi-hop configurations: An EAC-2000 not adjacent to thedonor requires a forward signal level of at least -70 dBm (at theD1 antenna connector) from the previous EAC-2000 in the chain.Each booster along the path must be able to communicate onlywith the previous and next booster. They are not required to beable to receive from or transmit back to the donor cell site.Multi-Donor Units: The RF path between the M2 antenna andthe Multi-Donor Unit "booster link antenna" must be such thatthe Multi-Donor Units can receive at least a -100 dBm signalwhen the EAC-2000 transmits using PA 6.• For diversity operation, the M1 and M2antennas should be physically separated by 10 feet (3 m)horizontally or 3 feet (1 m) vertically. Even if diversity reception is not required, boththe M1 and M2 antennas must be installed, since bothantennas are used to transmit to the boosted mobiles.Page 2-6 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)
(Continued)• Isolation between the D1 and M1 and between theD1 and M2 antennas . Isolationbetween the mobile antenna and all of the others .Figure 2-3 shows a typical installation. M1 and M2 are placedhighest on the tower to achieve the best coverage to the boostedarea. D1 is placed below M1 and M2. At least 50 feet (15 m)of vertical separation is usually needed to meet the isolationrequirement. The isolation achieved at a given separation willvary greatly depending upon the type of antennas, nearbyreflections, etc. Fifty feet (15 m) vertical separation maynot be enough in all cases.D1 must be placed high enough to receive the requiredminimum signal level from the donor. The mobile antenna canusually be placed close to the ground. At least 35 feet (11 m)vertical separation between the mobile antenna and the others isusually needed, however, more may be required in someinstallations.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 2-7
(Continued)Figure 2-3. Typical Antenna InstallationPage 2-8 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)
To verify the correct placement and alignment of the antennas, it willbe necessary to measure the signal level from the donor cell site (onthe selected donor control channel) and the isolation between thevarious antennas to ensure they meet the required levels.To measure the donor control channel signal level—• connect a communications service monitor or some otherfrequency selective measuring instrument to the D1 antenna;monitor the control channel from the donor cell;• adjust the orientation of the D1 antenna to peak this reading; atleast -75 dBm is required.To measure antenna isolation—Antenna isolation can be measured using a spectrum analyzer and atracking generator. These functions are often combined in cellularcommunications monitors.The tracking generator output is applied to the coax connector goingto one of the system antennas, while the spectrum analyzer input isconnected to one of the other system antennas. The trackinggenerator output level should be set to maximum (usually about 0dBm), with the spectrum analyzer set to check both the transmit andreceive ends of the band. If a 0 dBm signal is used as the source, thedBm reading on the analyzer will be equal to the amount of isolationachieved between the two antennas. Isolation is usually frequency dependent, with severalnulls and peaks possible in each band. The highest peak ineither band defines the minimum isolation that is achieved witha particular antenna installation.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 2-9
(Continued)Signals from the cellular system will likely be stronger than thesweep signal received from the tracking generator, and difficulty maybe experienced in measuring the actual isolation. Many spectrum analyzers have difficulty reading signals below -60to -70 dBm when sweeping a broad bandwidth. In this case, theband may be swept in smaller frequency segments, or a separatesignal generator with higher possible output power may be substitutedfor the tracking generator. The signal generator frequency andamplitude can be manually changed to avoid conflict with existingstrong signals from the donor and other cell sites.The signal generator should be manually swept through both the lowsplit and the high split bands to determine the minimum isolationpoint.To measure isolation—1. Supply a known signal level of about 0 to +20 dBm across theband into one of the antenna feeds (M1, D1, or mobile).2. Using test equipment, measure the signal level received on theother antenna feeds. 3. Adjust antenna locations and orientations to achieve the desiredantenna isolations. 4. Move the signal source to other antennas, and recheck theisolation. Be sure to check both the forward and the reversebands.5. If the D1 antenna has been repositioned, recheck the receiveddonor control channel signal level to verify that it exceeds -75dBm.6. Record these measurements.Refer to Appendix B for a more detailed procedure for measuringisolation.Page 2-10 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)
2.5 Selecting Channels Before beginning to install the hardware, identify the various channels on whichthe system will operate: • Donor control channel• Boosted control channel• Substitute control channel (if Revertive Control Channel Option is enabled)• Donor voice channels (primary and neighboring)• Boosted voice channels• Directed retry channelsMake note of all selected channels. They will be entered as system parametersduring installation (Volume 1, Section 4). Control channel parameters are listedunder the Control Channels Menu, shown here with all available selections.Refer to this menu for sections 2.5.1 through 2.5.5.A Donor Control Channel ...................................... 337B Boosted Control Channel .................................... 340C RF Board to Use for Control Channel ............................. 1D Control Channel State During "All Channels Busy" ...... DIRECTED RETRYE Directed Retry Channels .................................... LISTF Back-up Control Channel Option ......................... DISABLEDG Revertive Control Channel Option ........................ DISABLEDH Substitute Control Channel ............................. DISABLEDI Booster Link Channel....................................... 550J Booster Link Channel - Previous EAC ........................... 571 The donor control channel (selection ) is the control channel of theprimary cell site with which the EAC-2000 will communicate.•, the controlchannel of that cell site is the donor control channel. •, the controlchannel of the cell site with the most unused channels should bechosen. (This cell is then referred to as the primary donor cell.)More than one cell site being received by a donor antenna canresult in unwanted hand-offs by the cellular system, causingdropped calls.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 2-11
The boosted control channel (selection ) is the control channel thatwill be used in the EAC-2000 coverage area. Select a channel thatmeets the following requirements:• Must be one of the dedicated control channels:– System A = channels 313–333– System B = channels 334–354• Must be different from the control channels used in cellsadjacent to the booster to avoid interference. There must be at least a 3-channel spacing between anyboosted channel and any donor channel.When the Revertive Control Channel Option (selection G) is enabled,the EAC-2000 continues to repeat the control channel (forward andreverse) when all of the normal voice channels become occupied. Ifanother call goes through, the control channel equipment isredesignated to operate as voice, and the last candidate is assigned toand boosted by the control channel equipment. Because of the fixed-tuned combiner used in the forward direction,the mobile operates in voice mode on the boosted control channel.The EAC-2000 translates the boosted control channel to the originallyassigned donor voice channel. The donor side of the EAC-2000channels is not fixed in frequency.When the call on the control channel ends, the equipment reverts torepeating the control channel. If a call on one of the normal voicechannels ends, the EAC-2000 hands-off the mobile operating on thecontrol channel equipment to the available voice channel equipment(this is referred to as ). The control channel equipmentthen reverts to repeating the control channel.Page 2-12 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)
If the Revertive Control Channel Option is enabled, the SubstituteControl Channel parameter (selection ) will appear.This parameter may be enabled to keep mobiles not in a call fromroaming during times when the control channel equipment is beingused to boost a voice call. The EAC-2000 uses channel 6 equipment(the only RF elements not involved in boosting a voice call) to putthe substitute control channel on the air.The Substitute Control Channel parameter may be disabled. In thiscase, the Revertive Control Channel option will still operate. That is,calls will be handled by the control channel equipment andtransferred to voice channel equipment when it becomes available.However, during this time no control channel will be transmitted inthe booster coverage area.This selection would be appropriate if there is sufficient controlchannel coverage from other cells throughout the majority of thebooster coverage area, or if it is permissible to allow mobiles toroam.If substitute control channel transmission is desired, a channel mustbe chosen and entered. Choose a channel that meets the followingcriteria:• Separated from the boosted control channel by at least 90 kHz.(This prevents interference. There is no advantage to greaterseparation.)• Different from the donor control channel, and separated from itby at least 90 kHz.• Different from the control channels of other cells that mayprovide coverage in the booster coverage area.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 2-13
The directed retry channels parameter (selection ) is probably thebest option for most EAC-2000 installations. The parameter is afactory-set default and is one of five options available under selection (Control Channel State During "All Channels Busy") of theControl Channels Menu. When the EAC-2000 is busy, the boosted control channel (orsubstitute control channel, if Revertive Control Channel Option isenabled) remains on the air. If more accesses or page responsescome in, the EAC-2000 sends the mobile a special "directed retry"message. This message gives the mobile a list of up to six othercontrol channels on which to attempt the access. These are the and are assigned by the customer.The list of six channels is sent to the mobile in the directed retrymessage. The mobile will scan this set of channels and try its accesson the strongest of the six channels. The donor control channel and the control channel ofcells adjacent to the boosted coverage area should be entered.The boosted control channel must not be in this list.Page 2-14 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)
The donor and boosted voice channels can be accessed from theVoice Channels Menu, shown here with all available selections.Refer to this menu for sections 2.5.5 and 2.5.6. A Donor Voice Channels (5970 Hz SAT) .................. ListB Donor Voice Channels (6000 Hz SAT) .................. ListC Donor Voice Channels (6030 Hz SAT) .................. ListM Donor Voice Channels (MULTIPLE SAT) ................ List2 Boosted Voice Channel Position 2 ...................... 3613 Boosted Voice Channel Position 3 ...................... 3824 Boosted Voice Channel Position 4 ...................... 4035 Boosted Voice Channel Position 5 ...................... 4247 Boosted Voice Channel Position 7 ...................... 4458 Boosted Voice Channel Position 8 ...................... 4669 Boosted Voice Channel Position 9 ...................... 48710 Boosted Voice Channel Position 10 ..................... 50811 Boosted Voice Channel Position 11 ..................... 529The EAC-2000 allows three lists of donor voice channels to beentered, one for each possible SAT frequency. The lists are used toidentify mobiles that may drive into the booster coverage area witha call already in progress (that is, already on a voice channel). TheEAC-2000 scans the donor voice channels on the lists, looking forRSSI above a preset hand-in threshold.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 2-15
(Continued)Identify the donor voice channels with the following guidelines inmind:• All voice channels of the primary donor cell will be entered inthe donor voice channel list with the SAT of the primary donorcell.• The voice channels of neighboring cells will not be entered intothe donor voice channel lists with the SATs of the neighboringcells unless the EAC-2000 donor antenna system has beenconfigured for multi-donor operation.• For a donor cell site to be included in the donor voice channellist, the signal level at the booster from that donor cell site mustbe the same as the primary donor. If the antenna installation issuch that this criterion is not met for one of the neighboring cellsites, that cell's voice channels should not be entered in the list. You must select channels for the boosted voice channels. Note thatthe number of boosted voice channels is almost always smaller thanthe number of channels on the donor voice channel lists. Forexample, the primary donor cell may have 15 voice channels, and theEAC-2000 may have 9 voice channels.Select an unused channel for each channel of equipment that isinstalled in the EAC-2000, according to the following guidelines: • Select the boosted voice channels in the same manner as for acell site.• Consider channel reuse in the system when assigning theboosted control and voice channels.• Be sure the channels are spaced at least 600 kHz apart to allowthe combiner to operate properly.• Be sure there is at least a 90 kHz separation between anyboosted and any donor channel. Page 2-16 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)
(Continued)The following table illustrates proper channel separation:1, 22, 43...4, 25, 47...2, 23...3, 24...If there is only one donor cell and it uses voice channels 1, 22, 43...,then the closest spaced channel set that could be used for boostedvoice channels would be 4, 25, 47.... The channel sets 2, 23... and3, 24... could not be chosen because they are too close.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 2-17
6HFWLRQ ,QVWDOOLQJWKH+DUGZDUH3.1 IntroductionThis section provides instructions for— • Mechanical installation• Connecting ac power • Installing the antennas• Connecting external alarms/controls (optional)The checklist in Figure 3-1 presents a brief overview of these installationprocedures. For more detailed descriptions of the procedures, refer to Sections3.2–3.5. Figures 3-2 and 3-3 show front and back views of the EAC-2000 with the doorsremoved.Figure 3-1. Hardware Installation Checklist 1. EAC-2000 uncrated and contents checked. (Sec. 3.2.1) 2. Holes drilled in pad (if using expandable anchors). (Sec 3.2.2) 3. EAC-2000 positioned, using lifting equipment, and bolted in place. (Sec.3.2.2) 4. With ac service breaker and all EAC-2000 switches and breakers off, acelectrical connections made. (Sec. 3.3)• Green to ground• White to neutral• Black to 240 Vac (one side of ac service)• Red to 240 Vac (other side of ac service) 5. Antennas connected; signal level and isolation measured/adjusted. (Sec. 3.4) 6. External alarms/controls connected, if required. (Sec. 3.5)AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 3-1
Figure 3-2. EAC-2000, Front View (Door Removed)Page 3-2 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)
Figure 3-3. EAC-2000, Back View (Door Removed)AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 3-3
3.2 Mechanical InstallationThe container includes these items:• The EAC-2000 unit• EAC-2000 manual (Volumes 1, 2, and 3), power supply manual,mobile manual, and modem manualRemove the shipping material from around the cabinet. Check thecontents and take care that no hardware or manuals are misplaced.The mounting rails on the bottom of the cabinet provide clearancespace under the cabinet to allow moisture to evaporate. Four 5/8 in.(16 mm) diameter holes are provided in the rails for bolting thecabinet to the pad. The preferred mounting method is to drill holesin the pad and use expandable anchors. Alternatively, bolts can becast into the concrete. Mount the cabinet to the pad as follows:1. If using expandable anchors, determine the bolt locations (seeFigure 3-4) and drill holes in the pad. Figure 3-4. Outdoor Cabinet FootprintPage 3-4 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)
(Continued)2. Place the cabinet on the pad where it will be installed. The EAC-2000 weighs almost900 pounds (408 kg)! Use lifting equipmentto position the unit. Lifting rings on thecabinet are provided for this purpose.3. Bolt the cabinet to the pad. Later, after all installation steps have been completed (includingelectrical connections and initial system operation), secure the doorsas follows:1. Close the cabinet door. 2. Secure the door with a lock to prevent unauthorized access.3.3 Connecting the EAC-2000 to ac Power To connect the EAC-2000 to the ac mains, make the following connections:• Green wire to ground• White wire to neutral• Red and black wires to 240 Vac serviceAMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 3-5
3.4 Installing the AntennasAntennas should already have been mounted, as described in Section 2.4.2, inlocations that meet the following requirements: • Minimum signal level from any donor cell: -75 dBm or greater at the D1antenna connector. (See Section 2.4.2 for multi-hop and multi-donor unitvariations.)• Physical separation: M1 and M2 antennas separated at least 10 feet (3 m)horizontally or 3 feet (1 m) vertically (if diversity receive is desired).• Isolation between D1 and M1, and between D1 and M2:- > 75 dB• Modem antenna: Placed so as to minimize interference with the M1, M2,and D1 antennas (minimum 60 dB isolation required). The minimumsignal level required for proper operation is -105 dBm.Antenna installation involves connecting the antennas to the EAC-2000,measuring isolation and signal level, and making needed adjustments. Connect the antennas to the EAC-2000. All antenna connectors (typeN) are located on the top rear of the cabinet, arranged as shown inFigure 3-5.Figure 3-5. Antenna ConnectorsPage 3-6 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)
3.5 Connecting External Alarms/Controls (Optional)The EAC-2000 includes the following inputs and outputs, which may be usedto monitor or control non-EAC-2000 equipment:• 4 digital inputs per PA cage • 4 open collector digital outputs per PA cage• 4 analog inputs per PA cage• 1 +5 Vdc/100 mA source for powering external circuitry per PA cageThese inputs and outputs are located on the back of the PA cages on DB-25female connectors. The pin designations are shown in Figure 3-6. The signalson the pins are controlled and monitored via the local or remote link. Electricalspecifications for the pins are shown in Figure 3-7. Figure 3-6. External Alarm/Control Connector Pin Out Pin Function Pin Function1+5 Vdc/100 mA 14 Ground2Ext. Digital Output 4 15 Ground3Ext. Digital Output 3 16 Ground4Ext. Digital Output 2 17 Ground5Ext. Digital Output 1 18 Ground6Ext. Digital Input 4 19 Ground7Ext. Digital Input 3 20 Ground8Ext. Digital Input 2 21 Ground9Ext. Digital Input 1 22 Ground10 Ext. Analog Input 4 23 Ground11 Ext. Analog Input 3 24 Ground12 Ext. Analog Input 2 25 Ground13 Ext. Analog Input 1AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 3-7
3.5 Connecting External Alarms/Control (Optional) (Continued)Figure 3-7. Electrical Specifications for Inputs and OutputsPins SpecificationsDigital Inputs (pins 6,7, 8, 9):Load: > 100 kΩ Low: < 2 VdcHigh: > 4 Vdc max. +28 VdcOpen Collector Outputs (pins 2, 3, 4, 5): Max. +15 Vdc, 20 mAImpedance 733 ΩAnalog input (pins 10, 11, 12, 13):Load: 1 MΩ Range: 0–5 Vdc, 20 mV resolution+5 Vdc source (pin 1): +5 Vdc ±5%, 100 mA max.The system designer should have identified any external alarms and controls tobe connected. Make external alarm/control connections as follows: 1. Identify the input/output connection to be used for each externalalarm/control that is to be installed. Figure 3-8 shows a typical wiringdiagram for external alarm input.2. Make connections using a compatible male connector (not supplied).Page 3-8 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)
3.5 Connecting External Alarms/Control (Optional) (Continued)Figure 3-8. Typical Wiring for External Alarm InputAMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 3-9
6HFWLRQ 6HWWLQJ8SIRU,QLWLDO2SHUDWLRQ4.1 IntroductionMost of the EAC-2000 operating parameters are under software control and canbe changed from either a local terminal or a remote terminal. You will probablyhave to change some of these parameters to get the system running. Afterprogramming channels, you will also need to tune the transmitter combiner andadjust power levels.This section describes procedures for—• Powering up and powering down the EAC-2000 • Connecting the local terminal• Becoming familiar with system commands• Programming initial parameters • Tuning the transmitter combiner and setting output powerThe checklist in Figure 4-1 presents a brief overview of these procedures. Formore detailed descriptions of the procedures, refer to Sections 4.2–4.7. Fordetailed descriptions of all parameters, refer to Volume 2, Operating Procedures.Additional instructions for special EAC-2000 configurations and options areprovided in Sections 7 through 10. If you have problems during setup, refer toAppendix A, Troubleshooting Guide. AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 4-1
Figure 4-1. Setup Checklist 1. Local terminal connected: (Sec. 4.2 and 4.4) a. Terminal powered up and set to 9600 baud, even parity, 7 data bits,1 stop bit, full duplex, all capitals, send carriage return only, autoXON/XOFF and soft scroll disabled. b. EAC-2000 powered up and password entered. 2. System status (SSS) and alarm (ALA) report checked; no disabled and noalarms shown. (Sec. 4.6.1) 3. Site ID entered. (Sec. 4.6.2) 4. RF Channels programmed: a. Donor control channel programmed. (Sec. 4.6.3) b. Boosted control channel programmed. (Sec. 4.6.4) c. Donor voice channels entered in voice channel lists. (Sec. 4.6.5) d. Boosted voice channels programmed. (Sec. 4.6.6) 5. Alarms and thresholds set (if desired). (Sec. 4.6.7) 6. Modem mobile MIN, mobile power step, and passwords programmed. (Sec.4.6.8) 7. Transmitter combiner tuned and output power set: a. PAs 1–5 and 7-11 (if installed) adjusted. (Sec. 4.7.1) b. PA 6 adjusted. (Sec. 4.7.2) c. Reverse path power level adjusted. (Sec. 4.7.3) 8. Clock set. (Sec. 4.7.4) 9. Call history, call statistics, and alarm report reset to 0: (Sec. 4.7.4) a. DCH = 0 <CR> b. DCS = 0 <CR> c. ALA = 0 <CR>Page 4-2 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)
4.2 Powering Up the EAC-2000Figure 4-2 lists the locations and functions of the EAC-2000 breakers. Figure4-3 shows their locations.Figure 4-2. EAC-2000 BreakersBreaker Cabinet Location ControlsMain ac junction box ac service to entire cabinet(lower left rear)ac Breaker #1 28 Vdc power supply ac to power supply #1(lower front)ac Breaker #2 28 Vdc power supply ac to power supply #2(lower front)NOTE: Some configurations contain only one 28 Vdc powersupply.PA dc Breakers Back of PA cage dc power to each PA(one per PA)Begin with all breakers off. To power up the system, switch on the breakers inthe following order: 1. Main ac breaker2. ac breaker(s) (if both power supplies are installed, switch both onsimultaneously) The PA dc breakers are provided to prevent wiring harnessdamage in the event of catastrophic PA failure. These breakers cannot beturned off manually. Refer to Appendix A, Section A.15.4, beforeresetting a tripped PA dc breaker.4.3 Powering Down the EAC-2000To power down, switch off the breakers in the reverse order, as follows:1. ac breakers2. Main ac breaker (optional)AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 4-3
Figure 4-3. Breaker LocationsPage 4-4 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)
4.4 Connecting a Local TerminalThe EAC-2000 communicates with a conventional ASCII, RS232 terminal.Connect the terminal as follows.1. Using the cable provided in the tuck pack, connect the terminal to the 25-pin D-sub connector located on the front of the controller module.Figure 4-4. Location of Local Terminal ConnectorAMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 4-5
4.4 Connecting a Local Terminal (Continued)2. Power up the terminal and set it to the following parameters: • 9600 baud• Even parity• 7 data bits, 1 stop bit• Full duplex (no local echo)If possible, also set the terminal to— • All capitals• Send carriage return only (no line feed)• Disable AUTO XON/XOFF and soft scrollIf you are using a terminal emulation program, select TTY or VT100. Beaware that some terminal emulation programs generate extraneouscharacters that may interfere with communicating with the EAC-2000. 3. Power up the EAC-2000. (After about 2 seconds, the terminal shouldrespond CONSOLE LOCKED.) 4. Enter (carriage return or enter, depending on the keyboard). (Theterminal should respond with a welcome message and prompt you for apassword.)• If something comes up but is illegible, check the terminal setup. • If nothing comes up, power down. Recheck the power hookup, theterminal hookup, and the terminal setup.5. Enter the password, followed by . The default password is 1234.(The terminal should respond with more salutation and the > prompt.)The system is ready for you to set parameters.Page 4-6 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)
4.5 Becoming Familiar with System CommandsIf you are new to EAC-2000 installation, you should use this section to gainfamiliarity with basic rules for entering commands, as well as key commandsthat will be used in setting up the system. If you are already familiar with thesystem, turn to Section 4.6. Figure 4-5 lists definitions of symbols and abbreviations that are usedin this section of the manual.Figure 4-5. Command DefinitionsSymbol/Abbreviation Definition>Command entry level. The system uses this prompt characterto indicate it is ready to accept commands.<CR> Carriage return or enter. <CTRL> Control. The control key is used in combination with other keys.For example, <CTRL> Z means to hold down the control keywhile pressing the Z key. ESC Escape. Escape is a single key marked ESC on most keyboards. The system responds to commands that consist of threeletters followed by up to three data fields, as follows:In this syntax—• COM is the particular three-letter command. • FIELD 1 consists of up to four hex characters followed by ahyphen (-). • FIELD 2 consists of up to four hex characters followed by anequals (=) sign. • FIELD 3 consists of up to four hex characters. • Each command ends with a carriage return (<CR>).AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 4-7
(Continued) Very few commands entry of thedata fields. After the initial command has been entered, the systemusually prompts for data it needs. If a command does not depend ona certain field, any data entered in that field will be ignored. When entering commands—• Spaces may be added to separate the fields, after the first threeletters have been entered.• Leading zeros may be omitted.• Use DELETE or BACKSPACE to correct mistakes.• End the command with . Figure 4-6 lists the commands youare most likely to use. The most complex command is SET. Thiscommand is structured to enable you to enter parameters easily andaccurately. The other commands, which are much simpler, requirelittle or no subsequent data input. Their action is complete in amatter of seconds. In an operationalsystem, SET may drop calls if certain parameters are changed.RES will drop all calls currently being boosted. Otherwise, thesystem commands do not interfere with call processing. Some commands enter amode in which the program does something continuously. (Thesecommands are indicated by a dagger (†) in Figure 4-6.) To get outof this mode and return to the command entry level, hit <ESC> ortype . Entering or from the commandentry level (>) will cause the characters entered on the line tobe erased. Page 4-8 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)
Figure 4-6. System CommandsHELp Gives a list of the primary commands.SETup Invokes a menu-driven entry mode used to inspect orchange all EAC-2000 operating parameters. (To exit thiscommand, type and answer .)Show System Gives a one-page listing of current EAC-2000 parameterStatus settings and conditions of monitored input parameters.†Show Call Shows current status of each board. Updates listing ifStatus status changes (e.g., if a call is set up or taken down) andgives reason for change.†Show Scanned Shows average RSSIs of channels being scanned.RSSI†RSSI Report Gives a continuously updated reading of RSSIs on all RFboards.ALArm Report Gives a report of the number of times various alarmconditions have occurred since last system reset.Display Call Displays various call statistics per board (totals sinceStatistics last DCS=0 command).Display Call Displays hourly totals of certain call statistics fortheHistory last running week.TIMe Displays/changes current clock time and date.RESet Resets EAC-2000. Parameters in effect when command isissued will be preserved.LOCk Forces password entry before accepting subsequentcommands.†PoWeR Repeatedly lists power readings on all installed PAs. display †SAT report Repeatedly lists the SAT readings on the boards. REVision Displays hardware revisions in the EAC-2000.†Mobile ID Lists the last five access attempts by mobiles.Number† To exit this command, hit ESC or type .AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 4-9
(Continued) A session can be ended in three ways:• This command should be used if the sessioninvolves only system monitoring or minor parameter changes.It ensures security, but lets alarms and call statistics continue toaccumulate.• This command should be used if extensiveparameter changes have been made during a session. Thismethod—- Ensures that all parameter changes take effect, since allhardware is initialized after a reset.- Ensures security because the password must be reenteredto get back to the command level.- Initializes all alarm condition counters to 0.• An inactivity timer is included in theprogram with a default inactivity timeout setting of 5 minutes.If a keyboard entry is not detected within the designated period,the system terminates any currently running command (e.g.,SET) and simulates the action of LOC. This avoids leaving theEAC-2000 in an insecure state if the remote link is lost beforethe session is properly ended. If a remote terminal is linked by modem to theEAC-2000, LOC, RES or timeout will terminate the link.Page 4-10 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)
Configuring the EAC-2000 to fill in a coverage area in a specificcellular system is easy, using either the local terminal or a remoteterminal. From the command entry level (>), the SET commandinvokes the setup utility which displays a progression of menus. Themenus provide a guided path to each EAC-2000 parameter. Figure4-7 illustrates the paths to follow through the SET menus to reacheach available parameter. For descriptions of all SET menus andcommands, see Volume 2, Operating Procedures. Each command brings up a menu of items fromwhich to choose, with a character in front of each item. To select anitem, type the character and . The next menu (or theparameter to be changed) will be displayed. To move backward along a path, type, or just . (Both entries correspond to the "Donewith this menu" selection.) The previous menu will be displayed.Continue in this manner until you have the SET Main Menu. To exit SET, type at any menu level. Or,type while at the Main Menu level.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 4-11
Figure 4-7. SET Command Menu MapPage 4-12 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)
4.6 Setting Initial ParametersBefore you can operate the EAC-2000, you must check system status andprogram the following:• Site identification• Donor control channel• Boosted control channel• Directed retry channels• Donor voice channels• Boosted voice channels You should already have the list of selected channels, as described inSection 2.4. You may also program alarms and thresholds, modem mobile MIN,mobile power step, and passwords at this time.If the EAC-2000 is to be used in a , additionalparameters must also be set. See Section 7 for procedures. Check the system status, as follows, to be sure parameters werereturned to default status after factory testing. 1. At the > prompt, type . (A report will bedisplayed giving the current state of various parameters foreach RF board.)2. At the > prompt, type . (A report will bedisplayed giving the number of times various alarm conditionshave occurred since the last system reset.)No alarms should be listed. If there are any OUT OF SERVICEor memory alarms, refer to Appendix A, TroubleshootingGuide.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 4-13
1. At the > prompt, type to display the SET Main Menu.A RF BoardsB Power AmplifiersD AlarmsE Set Defaults2. Type to display the System Parameters Menu.B Control Channels . . Donor Boosted StateC Voice Channels.... Donor Donor SAT BoostedD Modem Control.... Passwords Console Time-out Auto-Dial Control Dial-up Phone Modem MobileE Thresholds ....... Hand-In Hand-Back Multi-Donor Mobile Power RSSI Averaging Hand-In DelayF Disconnect Control . Donor RSSI SAT Fade Time-outHand-Back Delay Hand-Back AttemptsG Call Processing .... RSSI > Thresh Hand-Back / Grab-Back3. Type to display the Site ID Menu (shown below withdefault values).B Multi-Hop Feature ......................DISABLED4. Type to access the Site Identification parameter.5. Enter a name (up to 20 characters) that uniquely identifies the site.6. Type to back out of the Site ID Menu.Page 4-14 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)
1. From the System Parameters Menu, type to displaythe Control Channels Menu. B Boosted Control Channel ................................ 340C RF Board To Use For Control Channel ........................ 1D Control Channel State During "All Channels Busy" . . DIRECTED RETRYE Directed Retry Channels ................................ LISTF Back-up Control Channel Option ..................... DISABLEDG Revertive Control Channel Option .................... DISABLEDH Substitute Control Channel ......................... DISABLEDI Booster Link Channel................................... 550J Booster Link Channel - Previous EAC ....................... 571 This menu represents all selections available on theControl Channels Menu. Not all selections appear at all times.Following are selections that are only available when used inconjunction with other parameters:• Appears only if selection (Control Channel State During "All Channels Busy") isset to Directed Retry.• Appears only if theBack-up Control Channel Option (selection ) or theRevertive Control Channel Option (selection ) is set toenabled. When selection is disabled and selection isenabled, board 1 will be used for the last call, but nocontrol channel will come up when board 1 is boosting acall.• Appears only if the Multi-Donor Activation Threshold (selection on Thresholdsand Power Control Menu) is enabled.• Appearsonly if the Multi-hop Feature is enabled and set to mode3 or 4.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 4-15
(Continued)4. Type to access the Donor Control Channel parameter. 5. Enter the channel number (see Section 2.4), then .6. To return to the Control Channels Menu, type .1. From the Control Channels Menu, type to access theBoosted Control Channel parameter. This parameter establishesthe boosted control channel, to which combiner port 1 is tuned. 2. Enter the channel number (see Section 2.4), then .1. From the Control Channels Menu, type to access theDirected Retry Channels parameter. 2. Enter the control channel numbers of all nearby cells, includingthe donor. The mobile will be directed to attempt calls on thesechannels when the EAC-2000 is busy.3. To return to the System Parameters Menu, type twice.Page 4-16 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)
1. From the System Parameters Menu, type to displaythe Voice Channels Menu. M Donor Voice Channels (Multiple SAT) ..............List2 Boosted Voice Channel Position 2 .................3613 Boosted Voice Channel Position 3 .................3824 Boosted Voice Channel Position 4 .................4035 Boosted Voice Channel Position 5 .................4247 Boosted Voice Channel Position 7 .................4458 Boosted Voice Channel Position 8 .................4669 Boosted Voice Channel Position 9 .................48710 Boosted Voice Channel Position 10 ................50811 Boosted Voice Channel Position 11 ................5292. Notice the SATs for the first three donor voice channel lists.Determine which list(s) to use for the donor voice channels youidentified earlier (see Section 2.4)., Donor Voice Channels (Multiple SAT), is for use insome configurations. Enter channels into thislist if the EAC-2000 is part of a Multi-hopconfiguration (as described in Section 10).3. Type , , or , followed by , to access the DonorVoice Channels Menu for the corresponding SAT. AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 4-17
(Continued)4. Enter channels in the list, as described below. A given channelmay be entered in only one list. The system will support amaximum of 105 total channels in all four lists (A, B, C, andM).a. , type [channel number] .b. , after the enter multiplechannel numbers separated by commas or spaces. If youenter a plus (+) sign before a single channel entry, 15channels will be added, spaced 21 channels apart, startingwith the channel entered. You can then delete extrachannels as necessary.c. , type [channelnumber] .d. , after the enter multiplechannel numbers separated by commas or spaces. Toremove the entire list, type .5. To return to the Voice Channels Menu, type .Page 4-18 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)
The Voice Channels menu gives you access to boosted voicechannels 2–11, to which combiner ports 2–11, respectively, are tuned.Boosted channel 1 is normally used to boost the control channel anddoes not need to be set. Program channels 2–11 (excluding 6), asfollows.1. Type the combiner port number ( to ), followed by to access the desired corresponding Boosted Voice Channelparameter.2. Enter the channel number, followed by .3. To return to the Voice Channels Menu, type .4. Repeat steps 1–3 for each boosted voice channel.1. From the SET Main Menu, type to display theAlarms Menu (shown below with default values).A M1 Antenna return loss - Low Alarm Point .........6 dBB M2 Antenna return loss - Low Alarm Point .........9 dBC PA Temp - High Alarm Point ............... 90 Deg CD PA Temp - Fan Activation Point ............. 60 Deg CE PA Temp - PA Power Cutback Point .......... 90 Deg CF Mobile Power Control causes PA Power Cutback DISABLEDG +28 Volt Supply - PA Power Cutback Point ..... 23.0 VoltsH +28 Volt Supply - Low Alarm Point .......... 23.0 VoltsI +12 Volt Supply - Low Alarm Point .......... 10.0 VoltsJ +6 Volt Supply - Low Alarm Point ............5.4 VoltsK External Analog Inputs .................. Alarm PointsL External Digital Inputs .................. Alarm StatesM External Digital Outputs ...................... StatesN Critical Alarms ................ALARMS REPORTEDO RSSI - Alarms .................... ALARM POINTSAMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 4-19
(Continued)2. Type to set the fan activation point (the internaltemperature that causes the cabinet heat exchanger to be turnedon). The 60oC default setting is adequate for most installations.Lower the threshold to 50oC if the control channel transmitteroutput is increased to its maximum (45W) output level.3. Type to access the +28 Volt Supply - Low AlarmPoint parameter.Loss of ac power will cause the EAC-2000 to run on powerfrom the battery plant (if installed). The battery voltage willdrop to the low alarm point after a period of time, causing analarm. The default value (23.0 V) will be adequate for mostinstallations. If an external battery plant is used, the low alarmpoint may be adjusted upward (e.g., to 25–26 V) if desired toprovide an immediate alarm in the event of the loss of acpower.Page 4-20 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)
(Continued)4. If external analog inputs are connected to the EAC-2000external alarm/controls ports, type to access theExternal Analog Inputs menu.PA 1–6 Cage:1 Ext. Analog Input 1 Alarm State DISABLED; Input Currently 0.0 Volts2 Ext. Analog Input 2 Alarm State DISABLED; Input Currently 0.0 Volts3 Ext. Analog Input 3 Alarm State DISABLED; Input Currently 0.0 Volts4 Ext. Analog Input 4 Alarm State DISABLED; Input Currently 0.0 VoltsPA 7–11 Cage:5 Ext. Analog Input 1 Alarm State DISABLED; Input Currently 0.0 Volts6 Ext. Analog Input 2 Alarm State DISABLED; Input Currently 0.0 Volts7 Ext. Analog Input 3 Alarm State DISABLED; Input Currently 0.0 Volts8 Ext. Analog Input 4 Alarm State DISABLED; Input Currently 0.0 VoltsChoose the number of the input(s) connected and program thealarm point. You may specify DISABLED orABOVE/BELOW a threshold, which may be between 0 and 5Volts. If PA 7–11 Cage is not included in the unit, thenthe hardware for those inputs is not installed and thealarms should be left as DISABLED.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 4-21
(Continued)5. If external digital inputs are connected to the EAC-2000external alarm/controls ports, type to access theExternal Digital Inputs menu.PA 1–6 Cage:1 Ext. Digital Input 1 Alarm State DISABLED; Input Currently Low2 Ext. Digital Input 2 Alarm State DISABLED; Input Currently Low3 Ext. Digital Input 3 Alarm State DISABLED; Input Currently Low4 Ext. Digital Input 4 Alarm State DISABLED; Input Currently LowPA 7–11 Cage:5 Ext. Digital Input 1 Alarm State DISABLED; Input Currently Low6 Ext. Digital Input 2 Alarm State DISABLED; Input Currently Low7 Ext. Digital Input 3 Alarm State DISABLED; Input Currently Low8 Ext. Digital Input 4 Alarm State DISABLED; Input Currently LowChoose the number of the input(s) connected and program thealarm state. You may specify DISABLED, HIGH or LOW.6. If external digital outputs are connected to the EAC-2000external alarm/controls ports, type to access theExternal Digital Outputs menu.PA 1–6 Cage:1 Ext. Digital Output 1 State .................... LOW2 Ext. Digital Output 2 State .................... LOW3 Ext. Digital Output 3 State .................... LOW4 Ext. Digital Output 4 State .................... LOWPA 7–11 Cage:5 Ext. Digital Output 1 State .................... LOW6 Ext. Digital Output 2 State .................... LOW7 Ext. Digital Output 3 State .................... LOW8 Ext. Digital Output 4 State .................... LOWPage 4-22 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)
(Continued)Choose the number of the output(s) connected and program thedesired state. You may specify:•Low• Low if critical alarm exists•High• High if critical alarm existsThe "low/high if critical alarm exists" options are provided toallow for connection to external alarm signaling equipment.7. Type to review the Critical Alarms Menu, shownhere with default values.A Board Out-of-Service Alarm ............... CRITICALB Board ROM Alarm...................... CRITICALC Board Calibration Memory Alarm ........... CRITICALD Serial Data Link Alarm................... CRITICALE Personality Mismatch Alarm ............... CRITICALF Synthesizer Unlocked Alarm ............... CRITICALG RVS PA Pwr Low Alarm ................. CRITICALH RSSI Alarm.......................... LOG ONLYI PA Out-of-Service Alarm ................. CRITICALJ PA Temp - High Alarm ................. LOG ONLYK PA Power - Low Alarm .................. CRITICALL PA to Antenna Loss High Alarm ............ CRITICALM Antenna Ret Loss Alarm.................. CRITICALN ROM Alarm .......................... CRITICALO RAM Alarm .......................... CRITICALP NOVRAM Alarm ....................... CRITICALQ SAT Detector Alarm .................... CRITICALR Power Supply Voltages - Low Alarm ......... CRITICALS External Analog Input Alarm .............. LOG ONLYT External Digital Input - Alarms ............ LOG ONLYZ Display More Critical Alarms This illustration represents the complete CriticalAlarms Menu. In actual application, only half of theCritical Alarms Menu can be viewed at a time due tominimal screen space. To access additional CriticalAlarms Menu selections, type .AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 4-23
(Continued) will cause the EAC-2000 to automatically dialan alarm telephone number when the Auto-Dial feature isenabled. will be counted and displayed inthe ALA screen, but will not cause the EAC-2000 to dial itsprogrammed alarm number.The default values shown above will be adequate for mostinstallations. • To change an alarm, type the letter of that alarm and.• To alternate between the two Critical Alarms Menudisplays, type .8. Type at the Alarms Menu to review the RSSIAlarms Menu.A Donor Control Channel RSSI - High Alarm Point . . . NONEB Donor Control Channel RSSI - Low Alarm Point . . -80 dBmC Donor Voice Channel RSSI - High Alarm Point .... NONE is themost critical of these alarm thresholds. This threshold shouldbe set lower (within a range of -85 to -95 dBm), to ensurecontinued operation, under the following circumstances:• If the booster is being operated at a minimum (-75 dBm)donor signal level and some fading exists on the donor-to-booster path., may be set at a level 10–15 dB higher than thenormal signal levels being received from the donor, if desired.This will allow the EAC-2000 to log alarms in the event of IFboard failures with their RSSI measuring circuits.Page 4-24 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)
The assigned mobile identification number (MIN) of the mobile andthe desired mobile power step should be loaded into the booster.This allows the booster to trap calls to and from the remote link toforce operation on the donor voice channels. By doing so, the remotelink does not tie up one of the boosted voice channels. Passwordsmay also be programmed now. 1. From the System Parameters Menu, type to display theModem Control Menu, shown here with default values. A Master Password ............................1234B Restricted Password ..........................5678C Console Time-out..................... 30 (x 10 Sec)D Auto-dial Enable ...................... DISARMEDE Dial-up Phone Number 1 ................12163498684F Dial-up Phone Number 2 .................... NONEG Auto-dial Trials Max .......................... 10H Delay Between Auto-dial Retries ............6 (x 10 sec)I Max Auto-dial Trial Period ................9 (x 10 sec)J Modem Setup ...................... PARAMETERSK Modem Mobile MIN ....................1234567890L Modem Mobile Power Step....................... 72. Type to access the Modem Mobile MIN parameter.3. Enter the 10-digit MIN, followed by .4. Type to access the Modem Mobile Power Step.5. Enter the desired power level step (7 = minimum, 0 =maximum). Enter to record the desired power step.WARNING!! Use the minimum power stepallowable to minimize the possibility of over-loading the EAC-2000’s reverse input pre-amplifier.6. If desired, use menu entries A and B to enter the passwords.(They may be left at the defaults for now if desired.)AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 4-25
4.7 Tuning Transmitter Combiner and Setting Output PowerThe transmitter combiner must be tuned, and output power levels set, wheneverboosted control and voice channels are entered or changed. This processinvolves tuning the combiner cavities of PAs 1–5 and 7-11 (if installed) andadjusting their power output levels, and adjusting the power output level for PA6.1. With the system power , connect power measuringequipment to the M1 antenna port (see Figure 3-5). Removethe cover plates from the forward combiner(s) to reveal thecombiner tuning screws. Then turn the power back on. Outputpower may be monitored using a through-line wattmeter (or awattmeter with a built-in load) to monitor output power.2. From the SET Main Menu, type to display the PowerAmplifiers Menu. A Forward PA Power Step - Voice ................... 0B Forward PA Power Step - Control .................. 0C Forward PA Power Step - Hand-off ................. 0D Forward PA Power Low Alarm Point - Voice .....+40 dBmE Forward PA Power Low Alarm Point - Control....+40 dBmF Forward PA Power Low Alarm Point - Hand-off . . . +40 dBmG Reverse PA Power Set - Voice ...............+20 dBmH Reverse PA Power Set - Control ..............+20 dBmI Reverse PA Power Low Alarm Point - Voice .....+15 dBmJ Reverse PA Power Low Alarm Point - Control ....+15 dBmK Key Forward PA ..... POWER ADJ/COMBINER TUNINGL Key Reverse PA ............POWER MEASUREMENT3. Type to key a forward PA.4. Type to key PA 1 and display the forward poweroutput as measured at the sensor.Page 4-26 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)
(Continued)5. Refer to the illustration affixed to the inside of the front door ofthe EAC-2000 cabinet to determine which combiner cavitiescoordinate with which PAs. Loosen the lock nut and adjustcombiner cavity 1 using a screwdriver.• If using a wattmeter, adjust for as indicated by the wattmeter.• Retighten the lock nut. The power reading displayed on the terminal will notvary as the combiner is tuned.Figure 4-8. Combiner CavityAMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 4-27
(Continued)6. Adjust the power output for PA 1 using a small screwdriver oradjustment tool to turn the PA power potentiometer on the frontof the PA (Figure 4-9). Use a wattmeter, if available, tomeasure the power output. Adjust to the level necessary tomeet the authorized ERP level from the antenna. The control channel output power level is set atthe factory for 10 watts at the M1 antenna connector. The power level displayed on the terminal is4 dB higher than the power level at the antenna portbecause of cable and combiner losses. The displayedpower ranges from +38 to +47 dBm (7–45 watts), whichcorresponds to a range at the M1 antenna connector of+34 to +43 dBm (3–20 watts). If the displayed powerlevel is used instead of a wattmeter, take these differencesinto consideration.Figure 4-9. Location of PA Power PotentiometerPage 4-28 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)
(Continued)7. Note that the PA power potentiometer has a 7–10 dB turn downrange. If the power out cannot be adjusted low enough, hit to return to the Power Amplifiers Menu.Select , Forward PA Power Step - Control. This allows entryof a setting between 0 and 3. Increasing the step by 1 causesthe maximum power out to be reduced by 4 dB (2→8 dB, 3→12dB). Adjust this parameter in conjunction with thepotentiometer to achieve the desired output power.8. Repeat steps 3 (selecting a new PA each time) through 7 toadjust PAs 2-5 and 7-11 (if installed).If low power out is desired, use selection , Forward PA PowerStep - Voice, for PAs 2–5 and 7–11. 9. When all PAs have been adjusted, make a second pass throughthe PAs to check tuning and power levels, and make furtheradjustments as needed. This step is needed because one of thecavities might have been close to the point to which a secondcavity was being tuned. This would cause erroneous powerreadings and adjustment during the initial pass.PA 6 output power does not pass through the combiner. (For adescription of PA 6 function, see Section 2 of Volume 3, TechnicalInformation.) To adjust its power level—1. Turn the power off, move the power measuring equipment tothe M2 antenna port, and turn the power back on.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 4-29
(Continued)2. Key PA 6 and adjust the PA 6 power level as described above.The power level should be equal to the power level of the voicechannel. Hit to unkey the PA.If low power out of PA 6 is desired, use selection , ForwardPA Power Step - Hand-off, to reduce the maximum power out.3. Remove the power measuring equipment. Type to back out of the SET menu completely. Hit at thequestion prompt (defaults NO).The output power in the reverse direction (from booster to donor cell)is +20 dBm per channel. It is set at a much lower level than in theforward direction to prevent reuse interference with other cells thatmay be in the system. If the minimum received signal requirementsare met for the forward direction, then by reciprocity +20 dBm perchannel in the reverse direction is sufficient. Adjustment of the reverse power level is seldomneeded. However, in certain installations the output level mayneed to be reduced.For example, in an installation with a very good path between thedonor cell and the booster, the +20 dBm output level may be so highthat the signal received at the cell site is above the cell site’s dynamicpower control cutback threshold. In this situation, mobiles handled through the EAC-2000 will bepowered back by the serving cell site. Because the EAC-2000reverse path attempts to level its output power at +20 dBm no matterwhat the received signal strength is, mobiles in this situation willultimately be powered back to the minimum (VMAC=7) power level,and calls will drop.Page 4-30 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)
(Continued)The +20 dBm output level can be reduced with the followingprocedure:1. From the SET Main Menu, type to display the PowerAmplifiers Menu.2. Use selections I and J , the reverse PA power for voice andcontrol channels.3. Enter the desired level from +5 to +20 dBm.Another way to remedy this situation is to install pads in incrementsof 10 dB between the donor antenna and the donor duplexer ANTconnector. This method has the added advantage of increasingeffective antenna isolation.Note that the Power Amplifiers Menu also includes the low poweralarm points. The default values are appropriate for PAs set to thefactory power levels (+46.5 dBm forward, +20 dBm reverse).If the power outs have been adjusted lower than this, reduce thealarm points as well. Normally, the alarm point should be set 5 dBlower than the power reported on the terminal while keyed.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 4-31
The EAC-2000 keeps various statistics of calls handled by the boosterand alarms that have been logged:• Running totals of the number and duration of calls handled perboard can be displayed using the DCS command. • Incremental totals of certain call statistics can be displayedusing the DCH command. • Alarms logged since the last system reset can be displayedusing the ALA command. The EAC-2000 clock is used in updating these statistics. To set theclock and reset the report values to 0, complete the following steps:1. At the > prompt, type to access the clock. Enter thecurrent date and time.2. Type to reset the Display Call History parameter.3. Type to reset the Display Call Statistics parameter.4. Type to reset the Alarm Report parameter.Page 4-32 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)
6HFWLRQ ,QVWDOOLQJWKH5HPRWH/LQN5.1 IntroductionThe AMPS EAC-2000 come equipped with—• Microcomm TravelPorte MNP-10 modem• Motorola cellular radioThe modem is compatible with many international modem standards including:• Bell 103 (300 BPS)• Bell 212A (1200 BPS)• CCITT V.21 (300 BPS)• CCITT V.22 (1200 BPS)• CCITT V.22 BIS (2400 BPS)• CCITT V.32 (4800 and 9600 BPS)• CCITT V.42 (error correction)• CCITT V.42 BIS (data compression)• MNP Class 5 (data compression)The mobile in the EAC-2000 may be dialed using a remote terminal andcompatible modem. In most cases, the Microcomm modem in the EAC-2000automatically negotiates with the originating modem to determine the highestspeed that the link (and modems) will support. Error correction and datacompression capabilities of the modems are also automatically negotiated, andif both modems support common protocols, the session will utilize them.Once the remote link is established, the interface with the system is exactly likethat on the local link, but at a different baud rate. If both links are up,characters typed on either terminal are echoed to both, along with the resultingEAC-2000 output. This makes it possible for an experienced operator toexercise the system remotely while someone watches locally, or for the two toexercise the system together. Establishing the remote link involves—• Setting up service to the mobile radio• Programming the mobile radio• Checking out the mobile radio• Testing the remote linkAMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 5-1
5.1 Introduction (Continued)The checklist in Figure 5-1 presents a brief overview of these procedures. Formore detailed descriptions of the procedures, refer to Sections 5.2–5.5.Figure 5-1. Remote Link Installation Checklist 1. Service set up with local supplier. (Sec. 5.2) 2. Mobile radio programmed: (Sec. 5.3) 3. Mobile checked out for proper operation: (Sec. 5.4) a. Powering up. b. Call originating. c. Answering. 4. Remote link tested: a. EAC-2000 Answering tested. (Sec. 5.5.1) b. EAC-2000 Originating tested. (Sec. 5.5.2)5.2 Setting Up Service 1. Set up service to the mobile by contacting the local cellular servicesupplier. Provide them with the mobile serial number.2. Obtain from the service supplier the values for the parameters that will beprogrammed into the mobile.3. Be sure the MIN of the cellular mobile has been loaded into the booster(see Section 4.6.9).Page 5-2 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)
5.3 Programming the Mobile Radio The radio is programmed using the supplied handset, which plugs into the frontof the mobile shelf. To program the radio, consult the provided manual orcontact the Extend-A-Cell Hotline. The sequence to cause the Motorola radio to enter theprogramming mode is (total of 13 zeros).Once programming and initial testing is complete, the handset should beremoved and stored in the cabinet.5.4 Checking Out the MobileAfter the mobile has been set up and programmed, check it for proper operationby completing the following steps. 1. With the handset connected, power up the EAC-2000. After a short while,the "no sequence" indication should disappear.• If the mobile does not come into service, check the antenna, theantenna connection and the mobile programming.2. Make sure the mobile can originate and answer calls in the conventionalfashion. The mobile with the handset can be used to communicate with apartner while trying to optimize the booster performance.3. Dial the mobile using another cellular phone. The mobile should ring afew times, then answer, then send about several seconds of answer-backtone (1800 Hz).AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 5-3
5.5 Testing the Remote LinkAfter the remote link has been installed and programmed, you should test itsoperation. The EAC-2000 should be able to answer calls placed from theremote link. It should also be able (if so programmed) to place calls to apredetermined number when certain alarm conditions exist.The EAC-2000 constantly monitors and answers incoming calls evenif it is being exercised via the local link. To test the booster’s abilityto answer calls from the remote link, complete the following steps.1. Ensure that the remote link has been installed as required:• Conventional ASCII terminal• Modem: Microcomm TravelPorte MNP-10 compatiblemodem • Terminal and modem set to—- Appropriate baud rate for the modem- 7 data bits, even parity, 1 stop bit- Full duplex (no local echo)2. Dial the phone number of the mobile in the EAC-2000. (Afterabout one ring, the EAC-2000 will answer and try to set upcommunication.)• If the modems fail to connect, the modems will terminatethe call after a set period of time.• If the modems are successful in establishing a link, theremote modem will indicate CONNECT. 3. Type . (The familiar EAC-2000 response shouldappear.) If there are illegible characters, check the modem/terminalparameter setup.Page 5-4 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)
The EAC-2000 constantly monitors and logs several alarm conditions.These conditions can be viewed using the ALA command. They aredescribed in Volume 2, Operating Procedures. Each type of alarm can be defined as "critical" or "log only" usingthe SET command. If an alarm defined as critical occurs more thana predetermined number of times, a is said to exist.The system indicates any critical alarms at the beginning of eachcommunication session.The system can also be set up to call a predetermined number if acritical alarm exists. (The default setup is to place a call whena critical alarm exists.) If the system has been programmed toautomatically report alarms, it will attempt to do so only if all of thefollowing conditions exist:• A critical alarm exists.• The console is locked.• The mobile is connected and in service.• The system has not successfully reported an alarm since the"Auto-Dial Enable" parameter was set to ARMED.• The system has not unsuccessfully tried to report an alarm morethan the designated number of times (the Auto-Dial Trials Maxparameter) since the Auto-Dial Enable parameter was set toARMED.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 5-5
(Continued) When an auto-dial call is made, thefollowing sequence occurs:1. As the call is auto-dialed, the local console displays DIALINGREMOTE LINK. ( from the local link at this point willabort the attempt.)2. After the number is dialed, the EAC-2000 waits up to 90seconds for a remote modem to answer and establish aconnection.3. Five seconds after connect, the EAC-2000 automatically lists thealarm report (see ALA Command in Volume 2, OperatingProcedures). The report is echoed locally.4. If the connection stays up for the duration of the report listing,the attempt is considered successful. The EAC-2000 disarmsitself after a successful call to prevent duplicate reports.5. After the report, the system waits up to 60 seconds for a <CR>.If a <CR> is received, a normal interactive session begins.Otherwise, the EAC-2000 ends the call.6. If a second dial-up phone number is programmed, the sequencewill be repeated using the second number. The system will abort the call andconsider the attempt a failure if either of the following occurs:• The modems do not connect within a set period of time (theprogrammed "Max Auto-Dial Trial Period" parameter, default90 seconds).• The modems connect but lose the connection before the entirereport is listed.After a failed attempt, the system will display the messageORIGINATION ATTEMPT FAILED on the local console. It will thenwait a specified period of time (the programmed "Delay BetweenAuto-Dial Retries" parameter). If all the conditions for making thecall are still in effect, another attempt will be made.One way to test the call origination feature is to artificially create analarm by setting the +28 Volt Supply - Low Alarm Point to +35Volts.Page 5-6 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)
6HFWLRQ 2SWLPL]LQJ3HUIRUPDQFH6.1 IntroductionAfter the EAC-2000 has been installed, the system must be checked out todetermine if adjustments to the hand-in ndk threholds eded to ensure optimumperformance.6.2 Determining Hand-in and Hand-back ThresholdsTo determine hand-in and hand-back thresholds, conduct coverage tests usingequipment whose power and antenna configuration match the predominatecustomer equipment in the coverage area. Conduct the tests as follows:1. Select the default hand-in and hand-back thresholds as a starting point forinitial system testing. These thresholds will serve adequately for manyinstallations.2. Test these thresholds throughout the coverage area from an automobilewith an outside cellular antenna. For best results, use a cellular mobilecapable of displaying received signal levels and the channel on which it isoperating. Make signal level measurements by monitoring the boostedcontrol channel. Make calls to a test number to determine whether the callis set up via the booster or whether the mobile is being handed in or outof the boosted area.Make sure the hand-back threshold is at least 5 dB below the hand-inthreshold. Setting the thresholds too low or too high can result in thefollowing types of problems:• Unnecessary boosting of mobiles thatotherwise will have good service from the donor.• Missing some mobiles that needboosting.• Excessive noise on the call beforeit is handed back to the original voice channel.• Too many hand-back attempts bythe EAC-2000.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 6-1
6.3 Setting Hand-in and Hand-back ThresholdsTo change threshold settings, complete the following steps:1. From the System Parameters Menu, type to access theThresholds and Power Control Menu.Thresholds and Power Control Menu Default ValuesA Mobile Dynamic Power Control Threshold ................. -60 dBmB Hand-in Threshold .................................. -90 dBmC Multi-Donor Activation Threshold .....................DISABLEDD Hand-back Threshold ............................... -100 dBmE Hand-in Mobile Power Step ................................ 0F Hand-back Mobile Power Step .............................. 0G RSSI Averaging Speed .............................. MEDIUMH Delay Between Hand-in Attempts ......................... 5 SecI Station Power Class Selective Boosting . BOOST ALL POWER CLASSES2. Type to access the Hand-in Threshold parameter. Thisparameter sets the signal level threshold at which a mobile on one of thedonor voice channels becomes a candidate for boosting.3. Enter the new threshold. The hand-in threshold has an allowable range of -100 dBm to -40 dBm. Entering 0 disables the threshold.4. Type to return to the Thresholds and Power Control Menu.5. Type to access the Hand-back Threshold parameter. Thisparameter sets the signal level threshold at which a mobile being boostedbecomes a candidate for returning to the original donor site voice channel.6. Enter the new threshold. The hand-back threshold has an allowable rangeof -120 dBm to -20 dBm. Entering 0 disables the threshold.The default values shown for the other parameters (menu entries A, E, F,G, H and I) are adequate for most installations. Refer to Volume 2,Operating Procedures, for explanations of these parameters if adjustmentis necessary. Refer to Volume 1, Section 8, for setting the Multi-DonorActivation Threshold (menu entry C).Page 6-2 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)
6HFWLRQ 0XOWL+RS 2SHUDWLRQ7.1 IntroductionTwo or more EAC-2000 units may be set up to operate together in a line—forexample, along a major corridor leading into a metropolitan area. This isreferred to as . EAC-2000s and Extend-A-Cell IVs mayalso be mixed in a Multi-hop configuration. An example of a Multi-hopconfiguration is shown below.DonorCell ⇔Booster#1 ⇔Booster#2 ⇔Booster#37.2 How Multi-Hop Operation WorksThe boosters are set up so that there is a two-way RF path between the donorand booster #1 and between each pair of adjacent boosters. This arrangementcan be used to handle situations in which a mobile— • Places or answers a call while in the coverage area of any of the boosters.• Drives across the coverage boundary: - Donor-to-booster- Booster-to-booster (away from donor)- Booster-to-booster (toward donor)- Booster-to-donor When a mobile places or answers acall, the first exchange of information occurs on the reverse control channel(from mobile to donor). If the call is a mobile-answered call, the exchange isa page response. If it is a mobile-originated call, the mobile does an access.There is little difference in the way EAC-2000 boosters handle these two. Sincethe mobiles self-locate, the control channel chosen for the access determines inwhich booster's coverage area (if any) the mobile is located.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 7-1
7.2 How Multi-Hop Operation Works (Continued) All boosters between the terminatingbooster and the donor cell repeat the access or page response and decode it.From the decoding they extract the mobile identification number (MIN). Next,the cellular system assigns a voice channel to that particular mobile by sending,over the forward control channel, an initial voice channel designation (IVCD)message consisting of the mobile’s MIN and a voice channel that will be usedby the donor for the call.The Multi-hop boosters are all monitoring the forward control channel datastream. The boosters that decode the access or page response on the reversecontrol channel also decode the corresponding IVCD message on the forwardchannel and change the channel to one of its boosted channels.Booster #1 substitutes its chosen boosted channel for the donor voice channelin the IVCD message and sets up a boost path between the donor-assigned voicechannel and the boosted voice channel of booster #1. Likewise, booster #2changes the channel number in the IVCD message and sets up a boost pathbetween the boosted voice channels of boosters #1 and #2.All of the boosters between the terminating EAC-2000, where the call is placed,and the donor cell will in this fashion identify that particular mobile as acandidate for repeating and will decode the associated IVCD messages.7.3 Installing the EAC-2000 in Multi-Hop Configuration When installing the EAC-2000 in Multi-hop configuration, you should givespecial attention to— • Achieving antenna isolation and signal level • Enabling the Multi-hop feature• Entering the EAC position • Selecting boosted channels for each unit• Assigning a booster link channel• Setting hand-back and hand-in thresholdsPage 7-2 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)
The antenna isolation requirements for Multi-hop operation are the same as for standard operation. For optimum performance, each booster that is adjacent to the donor requires a forward signal level from theprevious booster in the chain of at least -70 dBm (at the D1 antennaconnector).Each booster along the path must be able to communicate with theprevious and next booster only. They are not required to be able toreceive from or to transmit back to the donor cell site. 1. From the SET Main Menu, type to display theSystem Parameters Menu.2. Type to display the Site ID Menu, shown here withthe Multi-hop Feature enabled. ( The default setting forthe Multi-hop Feature is .) A Site Identification......................Not Assigned3. Type to access the Multi-hop Feature parameter.The following choices will appear:(0) Disabled(1) Enabled Mode 1–Adjacent to donor(2) Enabled Mode 2–Adjacent to EAC-2000(3) Enabled Mode 3–Adjacent to an EAC-IV (no prior EAC-2000 in chain)(4) Enabled Mode 4–Adjacent to an EAC-IV (with priorEAC-2000 in chain)AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 7-3
(Continued)4. Select the proper mode. This depends only upon the kind ofequipment that is adjacent to the EAC-2000. •Use if the EAC-2000 is the first in the chain,adjacent to the donor cell.•Use if the previous equipment is another EAC-2000.•Use if the previous equipment is an EAC-IV, andthis is the closest EAC-2000 to the donor.•Use if the previous equipment is an EAC-IV, butthere is at least one EAC-2000 between this and the donor.If Mode 3 or 4 is used, the "Booster Link Channel PreviousEAC" will appear in the Control Channels Menu. The boosterlink channel number for the EAC-IV should be entered.• The EAC-IV "position" parameter should be entered as "1" ifthe previous equipment is an EAC-2000. The EAC-2000appears to be a donor to the EAC-IV.A set of boosted channels must be chosen for each EAC-2000 in amulti-hop configuration. A particular EAC-2000 may be viewed ashaving the previous booster in the chain as a "donor." Page 7-4 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)
(Continued)Therefore, in choosing the boosted channel set for a particularbooster, ensure that the set is separated by at least three channels (90kHz) from the channel sets of both the previous booster and the nextone.Figure 7-1. Example of Valid Channel SetControl channel: 316Voice channels: 1,22,43,64,85,106,127,148,169,...295Boosted control channel: 319Donor control channel: 316Boosted voice channels: 4,25,46,67Donor voice channel list: 1,22,43,64,85,106,127,148,169,...295Boosted control channel: 322Donor control channel: 319Boosted voice channels: 7,28,49,70Donor voice channel list: 4,25,46,67Boosted control channel: 325Donor control channel: 322Boosted voice channels: 10,31,52,73Donor voice channel list: 7,28,49,70For a Multi-hop configuration, there is an additional consideration insetting the hand-back threshold (the signal level at which mobiles areconsidered "weak," causing the mobile to be handed back to theprevious EAC-2000 in the chain). An EAC-2000 has no way of detecting whether a given call is beinghandled directly or by the next booster. Therefore, If booster #1 typically experiences a reverse signallevel of -90 dBm from booster #2 when booster #2 is handlinga call, then booster #1 should have its hand-back threshold nohigher than -100 dBm. Otherwise, booster #1 might mistake acall being handled by booster #2 (or #3) as a weak mobile andtry to hand it back to the donor cell. This would probablyresult in a dropped call.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 7-5
(Continued)To determine the hand-back threshold, the following procedure isrecommended:1. Disable the hand-in and hand-back thresholds for all boosters inthe chain, as follows:a. From the System Parameters Menu, type: todisplay the Thresholds and Power Control Menu.A Mobile Dynamic Power Control Threshold ................ -60 dBmC Multi-Donor Activation Threshold .................... DISABLEDE Hand-in Mobile Power Step ................................ 0F Hand-back Mobile Power Step .............................. 0G RSSI Averaging Speed ..............................MEDIUMH Delay Between Hand-in Attempts ......................... 5 secI Station Power Class Selective Boosting . BOOST ALL POWER CLASSESb. Type to access the Hand-in Thresholdparameter.c. Type to disable the hand-in threshold.d. Type to return to the Thresholds menu.e. Type to access the Hand-back Thresholdparameter.f. Type to disable the hand-back threshold.2. After powering up all of the EAC-2000 units, verify that thereceived signal levels meet the minimum needed.3. Verify call operation with each booster, in good signal levelconditions (within 1/2 mile of the booster). Make sure that callscan stay up at least 1 minute to eliminate link fading as aproblem.Page 7-6 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)
(Continued)4. Establish a to use for the hand-back threshold: a. Set up a call on the last EAC-2000 in the chain at a goodsignal level position, sitting still.b. With the call up, monitor and record the reverse signallevels received by each booster all the way back to thedonor. To do this—• Use the SCS command (from the > prompt) toidentify which board pair is handling the call. • Type (capital or lower case). The reverse signallevel is reported for the board that is handling thecall.The hand-back threshold should be at least 10 dB below thereverse RF level received when the next booster is handling thecall. The allowable range is -120 dBm to -20 dBm. If a system of boosters were spread out so thatall were receiving -70 dBm in the forward direction, thenthe reverse signal levels from the next booster would beabout -92 dBm. In this situation, the highest hand-backthreshold recommended would be -102 dBm. If thethreshold were set higher (e.g., -95 dBm), then normalsignal level variations would cause an EAC-2000 to handback a mobile actually being handled by another booster.Set the new hand-back threshold as follows:1. From the System Parameters Menu, type to displaythe Thresholds and Power Control Menu.2. Type to access the Hand-back Threshold parameter.3. Enter the new threshold, followed by .There are no new limitations imposed upon the hand-in threshold ina Multi-hop configuration. However, it must be for that same EAC-2000. The allowable range is -120 dBm to -20 dBm.Review the hand-in threshold to be sure it meets these criteria, andadjust it if necessary.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 7-7
6HFWLRQ 2SHUDWLRQZLWK0XOWL'RQRU 8QLWV8.1 IntroductionThe basic EAC-2000 handles most cases of hand-in and hand-back to the donorcells. However, in installations where the EAC-2000 is adjacent to more thanone donor, the "hand-back to a different cell site" situation requires specialconsideration.If a mobile being boosted back to one donor cell drives towardanother donor cell, a dilemma occurs. The serving cellular systemthinks the mobile is on one voice channel, while the booster actuallyhas it translated to another channel.Under normal operation, the signal at the donor from the booster isusually below the system’s hand-off threshold. Thus, the donor willalways identify the mobile as a candidate for hand-off, and thecellular system will try to find the mobile in the cell sites adjacent tothe donor. However, because the mobile is actually on the booster’stranslated voice channel, it will not be seen in any adjacent or nearbycell site. Therefore, the system will not hand the mobile to anothercell unless special means are provided to allow that cell site tomeasure the signal level of the boosted mobile.This can be resolved by providing the adjacent cell sites withequipment with which to see the mobile on the voice channel that thecellular system thinks it is on. The cellular system can thendetermine which adjacent cell the mobile is driving into, assign avoice channel in that cell, and then send a hand-off message sendingthe mobile to that channel.This can be achieved by placing a reverse-translating Multi-DonorUnit (MDU) at each of the cell sites adjacent to the booster.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 8-1
The MDU, which is connected to the cell-site receive antennas,scans for boosted mobiles and then translates those mobiles back tothe donor’s voice channel for presentation to the cell-site locatingreceiver.The MDUs must know the relationships in effect between boostedand donor channels for calls being handled by the EAC-2000booster(s). This is accomplished by data signaling between the EAC-2000 and any adjacent MDUs on a booster link channel. The EAC-2000 looks for the boosted mobile signal level to fall belowa settable . If this happens, thebooster encodes and transmits the channel relationships to any MDUsthat may be listening. This does not mean, however, that the mobilewill necessarily be handed off. Transmission of this informationmerely allows the MDU to know (if it is able to see the mobile signalat a sufficient level) to which channel it should "untranslate" themobile. For a more complete description of MDU operation,see the Multi-Donor Extend-A-Cell® IV Technical Manual.8.2 Installing the EAC-2000 for MDU Operation When installing the EAC-2000 for operation with Multi-Donor Units, givespecial attention to— • Achieving adequate signal level at the booster and at the MDU • Assigning a booster link channel• Setting a multi-donor activation thresholdPage 8-2 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)
The following signal level requirements apply to MDUconfigurations:• If more than one donor cell site is to be used, then signal levelsfrom each site must be at least -75 dBm at the EAC-2000.• Signal levels on the reverse path (from the EAC-2000 to eachdonor cell site) must arrive at the donor cell sites atapproximately the same amplitude. (This is necessary to keepthe cellular system from erroneously trying to hand the mobilefrom one donor cell to the other.)• Reverse path signals that arrive at the donor cell sites from theEAC-2000 must be within the hand-off hysteresis window usedby the cellular system.This signal balancing (if necessary) is usually accomplished by usingmultiple directional donor antennas at the EAC-2000, with thestronger path being attenuated with pads to match the weaker path.Another alternative is to increase the hand-off hysteresis window inthe cellular system for the particular donor cell sites that are underconsideration.Signal levels should be measured using a spectrum analyzer or FMservice monitor. RF attenuators should be used on stronger signalsto bring them within ± 1 dB of weaker signals.If MDUs are installed at cell sites adjacent to the EAC-2000, the RFpath between the EAC-2000 M2 antenna and the "Booster LinkAntenna" of the MDUs must be such that the MDU units can receiveat least a -100 dBm signal when the booster transmits using PA 6(the hand-off PA).When installing antennas, ensure that this requirement is met.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 8-3
The multi-donor activation threshold defaults to DISABLED. In thiscondition, it does not allow the transmission of channel relationshipmessages to MDUs. Therefore, you will need to set the multi-donoractivation threshold in order to operate with MDUs. Usually, athreshold halfway between the hand-in threshold and the hand-backthreshold will give good performance without generating excessivetransmissions to the MDUs.To set the threshold, complete the following steps:1. From the System Parameters Menu, type to displaythe Thresholds and Power Control Menu.A Mobile Dynamic Power Control Threshold ................ -60 dBmB Hand-in Threshold ................................. -90 dBmD Hand-back Threshold ...............................-100 dBmE Hand-in Mobile Power Step ................................ 0F Hand-back Mobile Power Step .............................. 0G RSSI Averaging Speed ..............................MEDIUMH Delay Between Hand-in Attempts ......................... 5 secI Station Power Class Selective Boosting . BOOST ALL POWER CLASSES2. Type to access the Multi-Donor Activation Thresholdparameter.3. Enter the chosen threshold, followed by . For additional hints on achieving successful multi-donoroperation and on troubleshooting, refer to the Multi-Donor Unittechnical manual.Page 8-4 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)
A booster link channel must be assigned. Choose a channel thatmeets the following requirements:• May be any channel in the band (control or voice), includingthe extended band voice channels.• Must be different from any donor or boosted channel in thesame EAC-2000.• Should meet the same separation considerations as for a voicechannel.One way of meeting these requirements is to assign one of theunused voice channels in the same 23-channel separation sequence asthe link channel.To enter the booster link channel, open the Control Channels Menuafter setting the thresholds.If both Multi-hop configuration and Multi-Donor Units are used, thesingle booster link channel will be used for both types of signaling.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 8-5
6HFWLRQ 5HVHUYHGIRU)XWXUH8VHAMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 9-1
6HFWLRQ &RPELQHG2SHUDWLRQ0XOWL&DELQHW0XOWL+RS0XOWL'RQRU10.1 IntroductionEAC-2000 installations may be set up to combine Multi-cabinet operation,Multi-hop operation and multi-donor units (MDUs). Figure 10-1 shows anexample of a complex configuration of donor cell sites, EAC-2000cabinets, and MDUs. Figure 10-1. Combined Configuration ExampleAMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 10-1
10.2 Installing the EAC-2000 for Combined Operation When installing the EAC-2000 for combined operation, thefollowing requirements must be met:• A unique booster link channel must be set for eachcabinet. • Any listening MDUs must include the booster linkchannels of all cabinets in nearby EAC-2000s in their lists.• The boosted voice channels of the EAC-2000 sites mustbe at least three channels (90 kHz) away from anypossible donor channel.• The Booster Link Channel–Previous EAC parameters mustbe set to the booster link channel of the previous EAC-2000 cabinet that is boosting the control channel (forMode 3 or Mode 4 EAC-2000s).• Donor voice channels must be listed in the in the following situation:- EAC 2 is not adjacent to the primary donor cell.- A previous booster in the chain (EAC 1) has morethan one possible donor (donors 1 and 2).- EAC 1 could boost calls from either donor toEAC 2.- The donor voice channels for EAC 1 must be listedin the multiple SAT list for EAC 2.Figure 10-2 shows a set of channel assignments (given thedonor control channels) that meets these requirements for theconfiguration shown in Figure 10-1. Other valid choices arealso possible. In this figure, notice that:• In EAC 2A, the donor voice channels in the multiple SATlist include all of the boosted voice channels from EAC1A (4,25,46,67) and EAC 1B (109,130,151,172,193).• Minimum separation of three channels is maintainedbetween donor and boosted channels.Page 10-2 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95)
Figure 10-2. Channel Assignment ExampleCell/Unit Channel Type ChannelsDonor 1 Control channel ................ 316 (SAT 5970)Voice channels ................. 1,22,43,64,85,106,127,148,169 ...295Donor 2 Control channel ................ 325 (SAT 6000)Voice channels ................. 10,31,52,73,94,115,136,157,178 ... 304MDU 1 Booster link channel list .......... 88,214MDU 2 Booster link channel list .......... 88,214EAC 1A Boosted control channel ........... 319Donor control channel ............ 316Boosted voice channels ........... 4,25,46,67Donor voice channels (SAT = 5970) . . 1,22,43,64,85,106,127,148...295Booster link channel ............. 88Booster link channel—previous EAC . (Not used)EAC 1B Boosted control channel ........... (Not used)Donor control channel ............ (Not used)Boosted voice channels ........... 109,130,151,172,193Donor voice channels (SAT = 6000) . . 10,31,52,73,94,115,136,157...304Booster link channel ............. 214Booster link channel—previous EAC . (Not used)EAC 2A Boosted control channel ........... 322Donor control channel ............ 319Boosted voice channels ........... 7,28,49,70Donor voice channels (SAT = Multiple) 4,25,46,67,109,130,151,172,193Booster link channel ............. 91Booster link channel—previous EAC . (Not used)EAC 2B Boosted control channel ........... (Not used)Donor control channel ............ (Not used)Boosted voice channels ........... 112,133,154,175,196Donor voice channels ............ (empty)Booster link channel ............. 217Booster link channel—previous EAC . (Not used)AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 1, Installation Procedures (27-7655-2, 12/95) Page 10-3
9ROXPH2SHUDWLQJ3URFHGXUHV27-7656-2Issue 12/95© Copyright 1995 Allen Telecom SystemsAll Rights Reserved
Field SupportIf you need technical assistance with the EAC-2000™, contact at one of the following telephone numbers:Extend-A-Cell : (800) 800-EAC4 (3224)or (216) 349-8413Systems Engineering Department: (216) 349-8413
&RQWHQWV............................................. vi.......................................... 1-11.1 About This Volume ................................ 1-11.2 Overview of EAC-2000 Operation ....................... 1-21.2.1 Establishing the Local Link ....................... 1-21.2.2 Establishing the Remote Link ...................... 1-41.3 Entering Commands ................................ 1-61.3.1 Syntax ...................................... 1-61.3.2 Command Entry ............................... 1-71.3.3 Moving Through SET Menus ...................... 1-71.3.4 Escaping from Continuous Cycles ................... 1-81.3.5 Ending a Session............................... 1-81.4 Overview of Commands.............................. 1-9....................................... 2-12.1 Introduction ...................................... 2-12.1.1 SET Menu Map ............................... 2-12.1.2 Parameter Summaries ........................... 2-12.2 Main Menu...................................... 2-122.3 RF Boards Menu .................................. 2-122.3.1 RF Board Position Menus ....................... 2-13• Status ................................... 2-13• Diversity ................................. 2-142.4 Power Amplifiers Menu ............................. 2-14• Forward PA Power Step - Voice................. 2-15• Forward PA Power Step - Control ............... 2-15• Forward PA Power Step - Hand-off .............. 2-15• Forward PA Power Low Alarm Point - Voice ....... 2-16• Forward PA Power Low Alarm Point - Control ...... 2-16• Forward PA Power Low Alarm Point - Hand-off ..... 2-17• Reverse PA Power Set - Voice.................. 2-18• Reverse PA Power Set - Control................. 2-18• Key Forward PA ........................... 2-18• Key Reverse PA............................ 2-19AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page iii
Contents (Continued)2.5 System Parameters Menu ............................ 2-192.5.1 Site ID Menu ................................ 2-20• Site Identification ........................... 2-20• Multi-Hop Feature .......................... 2-202.5.2 Control Channels Menu ......................... 2-21• Donor Control Channel ....................... 2-21• Boosted Control Channel ...................... 2-22• RF Board to Use for Control Channel ............. 2-22• Control Channel State During "All Channels Busy" . . . 2-23• Directed Retry Channels ...................... 2-24• Back-up Control Channel Option ................ 2-24• Revertive Control Channel Option................ 2-25• Substitute Control Channel ..................... 2-25• Booster Link Channel ........................ 2-26• Booster Link Channel—Previous EAC ............ 2-262.5.3 Voice Channels Menu .......................... 2-27• Donor Voice Channel Lists (5970–6030 Hz SAT) .... 2-28• Donor Voice Channels List (Multiple SAT) ......... 2-29• Boosted Voice Channel Positions 2–5 and 7-11 ...... 2-292.5.4 Modem Control Menu .......................... 2-30• Master Password............................ 2-30• Restricted Password ......................... 2-31• Console Time-out ........................... 2-31• Auto-Dial Enable ........................... 2-31• Dial-up Phone Numbers (1 and 2) ............... 2-32• Auto-Dial Trials Max ........................ 2-33• Delay Between Auto-Dial Retries ................ 2-34• Max Auto-Dial Trial Period .................... 2-34• Modem Setup.............................. 2-35• Init String ................................ 2-35• Dial Prefix String ........................... 2-37• Hang Up String ............................ 2-37• Local Port Baud Rate ........................ 2-38• Local Port Comm Params ..................... 2-28• Remote Port Baud Rate ....................... 2-39• Remote Port Comm Params .................... 2-40• Remote Port Handshake....................... 2-40• Modem Mobile MIN ......................... 2-41• Modem Mobile Power Step .................... 2-41Page iv AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)
Contents (Continued)2.5.5 Thresholds and Power Control Menu................ 2-42• Mobile Dynamic Power Control Threshold ......... 2-42• Hand-in Threshold .......................... 2-43• Multi-Donor Activation Threshold ............... 2-44• Hand-back Threshold ........................ 2-45• Hand-in Mobile Power Step .................... 2-45• Hand-back Mobile Power Step .................. 2-45• RSSI Averaging Speed ....................... 2-46• Delay Between Hand-in Attempts ................ 2-47• Station Power Class Selective Boosting ............ 2-472.5.6 Disconnect Control Menu ........................ 2-48• Donor RSSI ............................... 2-48• SAT Fade Time-out ......................... 2-49• Max Num of Hand-back Attempts Per Call ......... 2-49• Minimum Delay between Hand-back Attempts ....... 2-502.5.7 Call Processing Parameters Menu .................. 2-50• Mobile RSSI>Threshold Parameters .............. 2-51• Hand-back/Grab-back Control................... 2-512.6 Alarms Menu .................................... 2-522.6.1 Antenna Return Loss - Low Alarm Point ............. 2-512.6.2 PA to Antenna Loss - High Alarm Point ............. 2-532.6.3 PA Temperature - High Alarm Point ................ 2-522.6.4 PA Temperature - Fan Activation Point .............. 2-532.6.5 PA Temp - PA Power Cutback Point................ 2-542.6.6 Mobile Power Control Causes PA Power Cutback ....... 2-552.6.7 +28 Volt Supply - PA Power Cutback Point ........... 2-552.6.8 +28 Volt Supply - Low Alarm Point ................ 2-562.6.9 +12 Volt Supply - Low Alarm Point ................ 2-562.6.10 +6 Volt Supply - Low Alarm Point ................ 2-562.6.11 External Analog Inputs Menu .................... 2-572.6.12 External Digital Inputs Menu ..................... 2-582.6.13 External Digital Outputs Menu ................... 2-592.6.14 Critical Alarms Menu .......................... 2-602.6.15 RSSI - Alarm Points Menu ...................... 2-61• Donor Control Channel RSSI - High Alarm Point ..... 2-61• Donor Control Channel RSSI - Low Alarm Point ..... 2-61• Donor Voice Channel RSSI - High Alarm Point ...... 2-622.7 Set Defaults Feature ................................ 2-62AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page v
Contents............................ 3-13.1 Introduction ...................................... 3-13.2 SSS (Show System Status) Command .................... 3-33.3 SCS (Show Call Status) Command ...................... 3-53.4 RSS (RSSI Report) Command.......................... 3-93.5 SSR (Scanned RSSI Report) Command .................. 3-103.6 PWR (PA Power Display) Command.................... 3-123.7 SAT (SAT Report) Command......................... 3-133.8 ALA (Alarm Report) Command ....................... 3-143.9 DCS (Display Call Statistics) Command .................. 3-203.10 DCH (Display Call History) Command .................. 3-273.11 TIM (Time Display and Change) Command ............... 3-293.12 MIN (Mobile ID Number) Command .................... 3-303.13 REV (Show Hardware Revisions) Command .............. 3-32..................................... 4-14.1 Introduction ...................................... 4-14.2 Commands ....................................... 4-11-1. Commonly Used Commands ............................. 1-92-1. SET Command Menu Map............................... 2-22-2. RF Board Parameters ................................... 2-32-3. Power Amplifier Parameters .............................. 2-32-4. System Parameters .................................... 2-42-5. Alarm Parameters .................................... 2-103-1. Sample SSS Report .................................... 3-23-2. Sample SCS Report.................................... 3-53-3. Sample List of RSSI Readings ............................ 3-93-4. Sample List of Power Readings .......................... 3-123-5. Sample List of SAT Readings............................ 3-133-6. Sample ALA Report .................................. 3-153-7. Sample DCS Report .................................. 3-213-8. Sample DCH Report .................................. 3-223-9. Sample TIM Screen................................... 3-283-10. Sample MIN Screen .................................. 3-30Page vi AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)
6HFWLRQ ,QWURGXFWLRQ1.1 About This Volume This is the second of three volumes pertaining to the AMPS EAC-2000™booster. Extensive monitor software is included with the EAC-2000 system,which allows the installer or service provider to control and monitor the system’sperformance. This manual is intended to assist the installer or service providerin using the provided software to ensure optimum performance of the EAC-2000.This volume describes the terminal interface to the EAC-2000, which is used toset parameters, monitor call activity and call statistics, and report and diagnoseproblems. It includes procedures for entering commands and setting parametersand provides information on interpreting the results. The volume is divided intofour sections:• Provides an overview of EAC-2000 operationvia local and remote serial link, guidelines for command entry, and anoverview of the commands that may be entered.• Describes all of the submenus that can beaccessed through the SET command and provides guidelines for settingparameters.• Describes commands thatcan be used to obtain information on EAC-2000 operations, and guidelinesfor interpreting the results.• Describes various higher levelcommands used to verify hardware.For instructions on installing the EAC-2000, setting initial parameters, andmaking adjustments to achieve optimum performance, refer to Volume 1,Installation Procedures. For a more detailed description of the EAC-2000 andhow it works, refer to Volume 3, Technical Information. AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 1-1
1.2 Overview of EAC-2000 Operation Virtually all of the operating parameters of the EAC-2000 are under softwarecontrol. These parameters can be changed and monitored locally, through aserial link attached to a standard RS232, ASCII terminal or personal computer.The same control can be exercised remotely via a telephone line, modem, andthe same kind of terminal.The EAC-2000 communicates with a conventional ASCII, RS232terminal connected to the 25-pin D-sub connector on the controllerboard. To bring up the local link:1. Connect and power up the terminal.2. Set the terminal for 9600 baud, even parity, 7 data bits, 1 stopbit, full duplex (no local echo). If possible, set the terminal toall capitals, disable auto XON/XOFF and soft scroll, and"carriage return only" (not carriage return plus line feed).3. Power up the EAC-2000 (see Volume 1, Section 4). Afterseveral seconds, the terminal should respond CONSOLELOCKED. 4. Press (carriage return or enter). A welcome messageand prompt for password should appear. If the password is notprompted for, the "password bypass" switch is activated.If the response is illegible, check the terminal setup. If nothingcomes up, power down and recheck the power hookup, theterminal hookup, and terminal setup. If you are not sure of theEAC-2000 terminal setup or password, see note following step#5.5. Enter a master password (the default master password is 1234)or restricted password. A master password gives access to allsystem setup and monitor commands. A restricted passwordgives access to only certain system monitor commands.An accepted password should result in a salutation followed bythe command entry level prompt (>).Page 1-2 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)
(Continued)If you forget the password or terminal setup. . .The password and the terminal setup may be changed by the user during asession. If the settings were forgotten, it would not normally be possible tobring up the local link. A mechanism is provided to recover from thissituation.PA interface board 1 is located on PA cage 1, behind a panel. On this boardis a 4-position dip switch. Switch 1 is "password bypass enable."If you have forgotten the password, but know the terminal setup (i.e., acarriage return causes the welcome message to appear, but your password isnot accepted), perform the following procedure:1. Set the password bypass switch to "on."2. Hit <CR> at the terminal. The password is not required now.3. Type SET <CR> and examine/change the password.4. Set the password bypass switch to "off."If you have forgotten the terminal setup, perform the following procedure:1. Set the password bypass switch "on."2. Cycle power on the EAC-2000. The local port will operate at 9600,7 even, 1 stop (regardless of how it was set).3. Change the terminal to 9600, 7 even, 1 stop and hit <CR>. Thewelcome message should appear and the password will be bypassed.4. Type SET <CR> and examine/change the modem setup and thepassword. Exit SET.5. Set the password bypass switch to "off."6. Type LOC <CR>. The local port will operate as SET.7. Change the terminal setup to match the setup entered with SET.8. Hit <CR> to open up the local port at the new setup. Record thesetup.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 1-3
The EAC-2000 utilizes an MNP-10 compatible modem and Motorolacellular mobile.This equipment makes it possible to dial up and communicate withthe EAC-2000 using a remote terminal and modem of either typelisted. The EAC-2000 modem automatically determines the type ofmodem calling it and adapts to its baud rate. The EAC-2000 can alsobe set up to automatically dial a predetermined telephone number ifa major fault occurs.Once the remote link is established, the interface with the system isexactly like that on the local link, but at a different baud rate. If bothlinks are up, characters typed on either terminal are echoed to both,along with the resulting EAC-2000 output. This makes it possible foran experienced operator to exercise the system remotely whilesomeone watches locally, or for the two to exercise the systemtogether.For instructions on setting up and testing the cellular mobile and foranswering calls originated by an EAC-2000, refer to Volume 1,Section 5. Page 1-4 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)
(Continued)To communicate with the EAC-2000 from a remote location:1. Hook up a conventional ASCII terminal through a compatiblemodem.2. Set the terminal and modem to 4800, 2400 or 1200, 7 data bits,even parity, 1 stop bit, full duplex (no local echo). If possible,set the terminal to all capitals.3. Dial the phone number of the mobile in the EAC-2000. Afterabout one ring, the EAC-2000 will answer and try to set upcommunications by providing a continuous answer-back tone.If the modems fail to connect, the EAC-2000 will terminate thecall. If they are successful in establishing a link, the remotemodem will indicate CONNECT. If you dial the EAC-2000 with a high-speed(above 1200) modem, the modems may take up to aminute to negotiate the link.4. Press and look for the welcome message. From thispoint on, communicating over the remote link is similar tocommunicating over the local link. When both links are established, the baud rate on the locallink will slow to match the remote link rate. The remote link is more prone to transmission errorsbecause of the noisier link. These errors, while anuisance, do not cause major problems because the systemalways asks for confirmation of serious changes.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 1-5
1.3 Entering CommandsThe system responds to commands that consist of three lettersfollowed by up to three data fields, as follows:In this syntax—• COM is the particular three-letter command. • FIELD 1 consists of up to four hex characters followed by ahyphen (-). • FIELD 2 consists of up to four hex characters followed by anequals (=) sign. • FIELD 3 consists of up to four hex characters. • Each command ends with a carriage return (<CR>).After the COMmand has been entered, the system usually promptsfor data it needs. If a certain field is not required, any data enteredin that field will be ignored.Page 1-6 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)
When entering commands—• Spaces may be added to separate the fields, after the first threeletters have been entered.• Leading zeros may be omitted.• Use DELETE or BACKSPACE to correct mistakes.• End the command with .Command Entry Symbols>Command entry level prompt. Indicates that thesystem is ready to accept commands.<CR> Carriage return or enter. <CTRL> Control. The control key is used in combinationwith other keys. For example, <CTRL> Z meansto hold down the control key while pressing theZ key.ESC Escape. A single key marked ESC on mostkeyboards. The SET command gives access to a progression of menus used toset EAC-2000 parameters (see Section 2). Use the keystrokesdescribed below to move forward and backward through these menus.• Moving Forward. Each command brings up a menu of itemsfrom which to choose, with a character in front of each item.To select an item, type the character and . The nextmenu (or the parameter to be changed) will be displayed.• To move backward along a path, type , or just . The previous menu will be displayed.Repeat until you are back at the SET Main Menu.• Type at any menu level. Or, type while at the Main Menu level.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 1-7
Some commands cause a continuous process to begin. To escape thismode and return to the > prompt, hit or type . Entering or from the > prompt willcause the characters entered on the line to be erased.A session can be ended using LOC, RES, or the inactivity timeout. • Should be used if the session involves onlysystem monitoring or minor parameter changes. Ensuressecurity but lets alarms and call statistics continue toaccumulate. Will terminate remote link.• Should be used if extensive parameterchanges have been made during a session. Ensures that allparameter changes take effect, since all hardware is initializedafter a reset. Ensures security because the password must be re-entered to get back to the command level. Initializes all alarmcondition counters to 0. Will terminate remote link.• Inactivity timer (default 5 minutes) willterminate any currently running command, and simulates LOC,if a keyboard entry is not detected within the designated period.Avoid leaving the EAC-2000 in an insecure state if the remotelink is lost before the session is properly ended. This willterminate the remote link. Page 1-8 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)
1.4 Overview of CommandsFigure 1-1 presents a summary of the most commonly used commands. Figure 1-1. Commonly Used CommandsHELp Lists syntax and function for system commands. (If sessionwas begun with restricted password, gives abbreviated list.)SETup Invokes a menu-driven entry mode used to inspect or change allEAC-2000 operating parameters. (To exit this command, type and answer .)Show System Lists current EAC-2000 parameter settings and conditions ofStatus monitored input parameters.† Show Call Shows current status of each board pair. Updates listing ifStatus status changes (e.g., if a call is set up or taken down) and givesreason for the change. † RSSI Report Gives continuously updated reading of the received signalstrength on all RF boards. †Show Scanned Shows average RSSIs of 18 channels being scanned. RSSI†PoWeR Repeatedly lists power readings on the 7 PAs. display †SAT report Repeatedly lists SAT readings on all boards. ALArm report Reports number of times various alarm conditions occurredsince last system reset. ( zeroes alarm counts.)Display Call Displays various call statistics per board pair. (Statistics zeroes statistics.) Display Call Displays hourly totals of certain call statistics for theHistory last running week. ( zeroes some of these.) TIMe Displays/changes current clock time.RESet Resets EAC-2000, preserves parameters in effect whencommand is issued. LOCk Forces password entry before accepting other commands.†Mobile ID Nbr. Lists the last five access attempts by mobiles.REVision Displays hardware revisions within the EAC-2000.† To exit this command, hit or .AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 1-9
6HFWLRQ 6(7&RPPDQG2.1 IntroductionFrom the command entry level prompt (>), the SET command invokes the setuputility which displays a progression of menus. The menus provide a guided pathto each EAC-2000 parameter. Figure 2-1 illustrates the paths to follow through the SET menus to reacheach available parameter. Figures 2-2 through 2-5 summarize the RF board, power amplifier,system, and alarm parameters that can be programmed using the SETcommand. Following the parameter summaries, each SET menu and itsassociated parameters are described in detail.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 2-1
Figure 2-1. SET Command Menu MapPage 2-2 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)
Figure 2-2. RF Board ParametersSTATUS DisabledEnabledNoneEnabled Defines how the board is to beactivated.DIVERSITY Diversity ONAntenna M1 selectedAntenna M2 selectedVaries according toboardDefines antenna to use for reversereceiver.Figure 2-3. Power Amplifier ParametersFORWARD PA POWER STEP -VOICE0–3 0 Sets the output power electronically to one offour levels. Each step is about -4 dB.FORWARD PA POWER STEP -CONTROLFORWARD PA POWER STEP -HAND-OFFFORWARD PA POWER LOWALARM POINT - VOICE0, 30–50 +40 dBm Sets low power alarm threshold for forward PAs. Should be 5 to 6 dB below power read using"key forward."FORWARD PA POWER LOWALARM POINT - CONTROLFORWARD PA POWER LOWALARM POINT - HAND-OFFREVERSE PA POWER SETVOICE5–20 dBm +20 dBm Sets reverse output power level (referenced at D1antenna).REVERSE PA POWER SETCONTROLREVERSE PA POWER LOWALARM POINT - VOICE0, 1–23 +15 dBm Sets low power alarm threshold for reverse PAs. Should be 5 dB below power read using "keyreverse."REVERSE PA POWER LOWALARM POINT - CONTROLKEY FORWARD PA PAs 1–11 Keys PAs for power adjust and combiner tuning.KEY REVERSE PA Keys reverse PA for reverse power monitoring.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 2-3
Figure 2-4. System ParametersSITE ID Up to 20 characters Not assigned Identifies the site for remote modeoperation.MULTI-HOPFEATURE(0) Disabled(1) Enabled - Mode 1(2) Enabled - Mode 2(3) Enabled - Mode 3(4) Enabled - Mode 4Disabled Turns Multi-hop operation on or off.DONOR CONTROLCHANNEL1–799, 991–1023 337 Channel used as the input forfrequency translation. Should be setto donor site control channel.BOOSTED CONTROLCHANNEL 1–799, 991–1023 340 Channel to which donor controlchannel is translated. Should beseparated from donor control channeland any possible donor voice channelby at least three channels (90 kHz).RF BOARD TO USEFOR CONTROLCHANNEL01–5 and 7–111Sets equipment to be used to boostthe control channel.CONTROLCHANNEL STATEDURING "ALLCHANNELS BUSY"(0) Off(1) Deny accesses(2) Deny accesses, but count(3) Boost accesses(4) Directed retryDirected retry State of boosted control channel whenall boosted voice channels areoccupied. (For description of eachoption, see section 2.5.2.)DIRECTED RETRYCHANNELSDisabledAny valid channelAll disabled Control channels of nearby cell sites.BACK-UP CONTROLCHANNEL OPTIONEnabledDisabledDisabled Board 6 may be used to boost thecontrol channel if board 1 is disabled.REVERTIVECONTROLCHANNEL OPTIONEnabledDisabledDisabled Controls using board 1 to boost thelast call.SUBSTITUTECONTROLCHANNELDisabled1–799, 991–1023 Disabled Keeps mobiles not in a call fromroaming when control channel boardsare being used to boost a voice call.BOOSTER LINKCHANNEL1–799, 991–1023 550 If Multi-Donor feature is enabled,assigns channel used to transmit callsetup information.Continued . . .Page 2-4 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)
Figure 2-4. System Parameters (Continued)BOOSTER LINKCHANNEL -PREVIOUS EAC1–799, 991–1023 571 If Multi-hop feature is enabled,assigns channel used to receive callsetup information from previous EACin a Multi-hop configuration.DONOR VOICECHANNEL LISTAny valid channel andSAT, up to 105 totalNone assigned Voice channels to be scanned formobile candidates to be boosted. Alist of channels may be entered foreach of the three SAT frequencies.BOOSTED VOICECHANNELS1–799, 991–1023 See chartbelow*Channels to which the donor voicechannels are translated when a mobileis being boosted. Should beconsistent with the frequency plan ofthe cellular system.MASTERPASSWORDUp to 12 alphanumericcharacters1234 Used to gain access to systemmonitoring and setup commands.RESTRICTEDPASSWORDUp to 12 alphanumericcharacters5678 Used to gain access to systemmonitor commands.CONSOLE TIME-OUT10-2500 seconds 300 seconds Maximum time console will waitbefore locking during periods of nokeyboard activity.AUTO-DIALENABLE ArmedDisarmed Disarmed Used to arm/disarm modem's abilityto automatically dial a designatedphone number when critical alarmsexist.340 361 382 403 424 445 466 487 508 529Continued . . .AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 2-5
Figure 2-4. System Parameters (Continued)DIAL-UP PHONENUMBER 1 0 (none)Up to 48characters12163498684 Assigns the number to be dialed by theEAC-2000 when a critical alarm exists.DIAL-UP PHONENUMBER 20 (none)Up to 48charactersNone A second number to be dialed when acritical alarm exists. AUTO-DIAL TRIALSMAX0-10 10 Maximum number of auto-dial trials themodem will conduct if there are criticalalarms to be reported and a connectioncannot be made.DELAY BETWEENAUTO-DIAL RETRIES0-2500 seconds 60 seconds Period the modem will wait after anunsuccessful auto-dial trial before tryingagain.MAX AUTO-DIALTRIAL PERIOD 0-2500 seconds 90 seconds Maximum time modem will wait beforeterminating an auto-dial trial ifconnection cannot be made.MODEM MOBILE MIN 10 digits 1234567890 Mobile Identification Number of cellularmobile booster. Used to identify calls toand from the remote link; these calls arenot boosted and therefore, do not occupya boosted voice channel.MODEM MOBILEPOWER STEP 0–7 7 Mobile attenuation code (VMAC) forcellular mobile used to establish remotelink. Power step 0 = full power (3watts); each additional step = a 4 dBdecrease in power (i.e., step 7 = 28 dBbelow full power).INIT STRING 48 characters AT!~AT!~AT&FX0E0\D2S0=1S10=20)M1:E0*H1!String of characters sent to modem onpower up and LOC.DIAL COMMAND 16 characters ATDT String of characters sent to modem priorto dialing out phone number.HANGUP STRING 16 characters ~~~+++~~~ATH0!Continued . . .Page 2-6 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)
Figure 2-4. System Parameters (Continued) (Continued)LOCAL PORT BAUDRATE1) 1502) 300 3) 600 4) 12005) 24006) 48007) 96008) 192009600 Defines characteristics of ASCII link tolocal port.LOCAL PORT COMMPARAMETERSSee chart below*7 data, EVEN txparity, IGNORE rxparity, 1 stopREMOTE PORT BAUDRATE See list forLOCAL PORTBAUD RATE9600 (Microcommmodem)2400 (Millidynemodem)Defines characteristics of ASCII link tomodem in EAC-2000. If using aMicrocomm modem, you may accessremote link at any defined speed lessthan the setting.REMOTE PORT COMMPARAMETERS See chart below*7 data, EVEN txparity, CHECK rxparity, 1 stopREMOTE PORTHANDSHAKE1) None orXON/XOFF2) CTS/RTS CTS/RTS*Possible Selections for Local and Remote Port Comm ParametersABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR7 data, EVEN tx parity, CHECK rx parity, 1 stop7 data, ODD tx parity, CHECK rx parity, 1 stop7 data, SPACE tx parity, CHECK rx parity, 1 stop7 data, MARK tx parity, CHECK rx parity, 1 stop7 data, EVEN tx parity, IGNORE rx parity, 1 stop7 data, ODD tx parity, IGNORE rx parity, 1 stop7 data, SPACE tx parity, IGNORE rx parity, 1 stop7 data, MARK tx parity, IGNORE rx parity, 1 stop8 data, NO parity, 1 stop7 data, EVEN tx parity, CHECK rx parity, 2 stop7 data, ODD tx parity, CHECK rx parity, 2 stop7 data, SPACE tx parity, CHECK rx parity, 2 stop7 data, MARK tx parity, CHECK rx parity, 2 stop7 data, EVEN tx parity, IGNORE rx parity, 2 stop7 data, ODD tx parity, IGNORE rx parity, 2 stop7 data, SPACE tx parity, IGNORE rx parity, 2 stop7 data, MARK tx parity, IGNORE rx parity, 2 stop8 data, NO parity, 2 stopContinued . . .AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 2-7
Figure 2-4. System Parameters (Continued)MOBILE DYNAMICPOWER CONTROLTHRESHOLD(0) Disabled-120 to -20 dBm-60 dBm Threshold above which the EAC-2000 willreduce the power of the mobile.HAND-IN THRESHOLD (0) Disabled-120 to -20 dBm -90 dBm Signal level threshold at which a mobile onone of the donor voice channels becomes acandidate for boosting.MULTI-DONORACTIVATION THRESHOLD(0) Disabled-120 to -20 dBm(A) AlwaysDisabled Signal level threshold at which a mobile beingboosted becomes a candidate for hand-off toan alternate donor cell. (Applicable only ifalternate donor cell has MDU installed.)HAND-BACK THRESHOLD (0) Disabled-120 to -20 dBm-100 dBm Signal level threshold at which a mobile beingboosted becomes a candidate for returning tooriginal donor voice channel.HAND-IN MOBILE POWERSTEP0–7 0 Mobile attenuation code (VMAC) sent to amobile being boosted to establish maximummobile power level used in boosted coverageare. Power step 0 = full power (3 watts);each additional step = 4 dB decrease in power(i.e., step 7 = 28 dB below full power).HAND-BACK MOBILEPOWER STEP 0–7 0 Mobile attenuation code (VMAC) sent to amobile during a hand-back attempt. Thisestablishes the power level of the mobiles inthe donor coverage area that have driven fromthe booster area with calls in progress. (Samepower step equivalents as above.)RSSI AVERAGING SPEED SlowMedium FastMedium Averaging speed for determining whenmobiles become candidates for hand-in orhand-back.DELAY BETWEEN HAND-IN ATTEMPTS0–250 seconds 5 seconds Amount of time between hand-in attempts ona mobile identified as a candidate for boosting(signal exceeds hand-in threshold).STATION POWER CLASSSELECTIVE BOOSTING Boost allBoost I–IIIBoost I, IIBoost IBoost all Allows the EAC-2000 to be configured toboost only lower-power subscriber units (i.e.,portables).Continued . . .Page 2-8 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)
Figure 2-4. System Parameters (Continued)DONOR RSSI (0) Disabled-100 to -20 dBm-80 dBm Threshold below which the EAC-2000 willdisconnect a call.SAT FADE TIME-OUT 0–250 seconds 5 seconds Time period the system will wait beforeterminating an established call when the properSAT is not detected from a mobile. (Does notapply if the mobile sends a release or themobile's signal strength falls below the hand-back threshold.)MAX NUMBER OFHAND-BACKATTEMPTS PER CALL0–250 10 Maximum number of hand-back attempts madeon mobiles identified as candidates for hand-back (signal below hand-back threshold). Ifhand-back is not successful before this numberis reached, the booster assumes the mobile isdriving away from the donor cell site andmaintains the call as long as possible.MINIMUM DELAYBETWEEN HAND-BACKATTEMPTS0–250 seconds 15 seconds Time between attempts to return the mobile tothe donor channel when it is below the hand-back threshold.MOBILE RSSI >THRESHOLDPARAMETERSC1 C1 Conditions for handling mobiles that are abovethe hand-in threshold.HAND-BACK/GRAB-BACK CONTROLD1D2D1 Conditions under which mobile hand-backconfirmation is treated.RECOMMENDATIONS On-line recommendations.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 2-9
Figure 2-5. Alarm ParametersANTENNA RETURN LOSS - LOWALARM POINT 0 (Disabled)1–20 6 dB Define antenna return loss alarmthreshold.PA TO ANTENNA LOSS - HIGH ALARM POINT9 dB Define PA to antenna lossthreshold.PA TEMP - HIGH ALARM POINT 0 (Disabled)1–100 C 90 C Defines PA temperature alarmcondition.PA TEMP - FAN ACTIVATIONPOINT60 C Defines PA temperature thatturns heat exchanger fan on.PA TEMP - PA POWER CUTBACKPOINT 90 C Define parameters for forwarddynamic power control.MOBILE POWER CONTROLCAUSES PA POWER CUTBACKEnabledDisabledDisabled+28 VOLT SUPPLY - PA POWERCUTBACK POINT 0 (Disabled).1–50.9 Volts 23.0 Volts+28 VOLT SUPPLY - LOW ALARMPOINTAlarm thresholds for powersupply voltages+12 VOLT SUPPLY - LOW ALARMPOINT 0 (Disabled).1–14.9 Volts 10.0 Volts+6 VOLT SUPPLY - LOW ALARMPOINT0 (Dsiabled).1–9.9 Volts5.4 VoltsEXTERNAL DIGITAL INPUTALARM STATE (For each of 8 inputs) (0) Disabled(1) High(2) LowDisabled Defines alarm conditions on theeight general purpose inputs.EXTERNAL DIGITAL OUTPUTCURRENT STATE (For 8 inputs)(1) High(2) Low(3) High if alarm. . .(4) Low if alarm. . .Low Defines state of the eight generalpurpose outputs.EXTERNAL ANALOG INPUTS -ALARM THRESHOLD0-5 volts 0.0 Vdc Defines alarm condition on theeight analog inputs.EXTERNAL ANALOG INPUT -ALARM STATE(0) Disabled(1) Above threshold(2) Below thresholdDisabled Defines alarm conditions on theeight analog inputs.Continued. . .Page 2-10 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)
Figure 2-5. Alarm Parameters (Continued)CRITICAL ALARMS: Board Out-of-Service Alarm Board ROM Alarm Board Calibration Memory Alarm Serial Data Link Alarm Personality Mismatch Alarm Synthesizer Unlocked Alarm Reverse PA Power Low Alarm RSSI Alarm PA Out-of-Service Alarm PA Temp - High Alarm PA Temp - Low Alarm PA to Antenna High Loss Alarm Antenna Return Loss Alarm ROM Alarm RAM Alarm NOVRAM Alarm SAT Detector Alarm Power Supply Voltages - Low Alarm External Analog Input Alarm External Digital Input - Alarms Log only orCritical CriticalCriticalCriticalCriticalCriticalCriticalCriticalLog OnlyCriticalLog onlyCriticalCriticalCriticalCriticalCriticalCriticalCriticalCriticalLog OnlyLog Only"Log only" alarm occurrenceswill be logged; total number ofoccurrences can be viewed usingthe ALA command."Critical" alarms will not only belogged, but also cause the auto-dial sequence to begin (ifenabled). This sequenceautomatically dials a designatednumber to report the alarm.RSSI ALARMS: Donor Ctrl Chan RSSI Hi Alarm Pt. Donor Ctrl Chan RSSI Low Alarm Pt. Donor Voice Chan RSSI Hi Alarm Pt.(0) Disabled-100 to -20 dBm Disabled-80 dBmDisabledEstablishes alarm levels for thesesignals.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 2-11
2.2 Main MenuEntry: At the > prompt, type SET.ARF BoardsB Power AmplifiersC System ParametersDAlarmsE Set DefaultsMenu:Purpose: Gives access to setup menus. 2.3 RF Boards MenuEntry: Main Menu ⇒Menu:1 Position 1 ............................ ENABLED2 Position 2 ............................ ENABLED3 Position 3 ............................ ENABLED4 Position 4 ............................ ENABLED5 Position 5 ............................ ENABLED6 Position 6 ............................ ENABLED7 Position 7 ............................ ENABLED8 Position 8 ............................ ENABLED9 Position 9 ............................ ENABLED10 Position 10 ........................... ENABLED11 Position 11 ........................... ENABLEDPurpose: Shows configuration (type and status) of the 11 RF board positions. From thismenu each board can be selected to access the parameters for that board. Page 2-12 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)
2.3 RF Boards Menu (Continued) Entry:Main Menu ⇒RF BoardsMenu ⇒Menu:A Status ............................... ENABLEDB Diversity ...........OFF - ANTENNA "M1" SELECTEDPurpose: Gives access to status and diversity parameters.STATUSEntry:Main Menu ⇒RF BoardsMenu ⇒RF BoardPosition ⇒Purpose: To set up the selected RF board. Options:• 0 DISABLED: Board ignored by system; not used for boosting; alarms notlogged.• 1 ENABLED: Reactivates board if it has been taken out of service due toan alarm. If alarm condition persists, board will go out of service againwhen SET is exited. (Default setting)• 2 NONE: Same as DISABLED. Used to keep track of slots with noboards installed.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 2-13
(Continued)DIVERSITYEntry:Main Menu ⇒RF BoardsMenu ⇒RF BoardPosition ⇒Purpose: To turn diversity function on or off for reverse paths. Diversity enablesthe board to select the best signal between two receive antenna ports, to improvevoice channel performance.Options:• 1 DIVERSITY ON: Default for boards 2-5 and 7–11. Not allowed forboard 6.• 2 OFF—ANTENNA M1 ONLY SELECTED: Positions 1 and 6 default.• 3 OFF—ANTENNA M2 ONLY SELECTED2.4 Power Amplifiers MenuMain Menu ⇒Menu:A Forward PA Power Step - Voice ................... 0B Forward PA Power Step - Control .................. 0C Forward PA Power Step - Hand-off ................. 0D Forward PA Power Low Alarm Point - Voice .....+40 dBmE Forward PA Power Low Alarm Point - Control....+40 dBmF Forward PA Power Low Alarm Point - Hand-off . . . +40 dBmG Reverse PA Power Set - Voice ...............+20 dBmH Reverse PA Power Set - Control ..............+20 dBmI Reverse PA Power Low Alarm Point - Voice .....+15 dBmJ Reverse PA Power Low Alarm Point - Control ....+15 dBmK Key Forward PA .... POWER ADJ/COMBINER TUNINGL Key Reverse PA ............POWER MEASUREMENTPurpose: Shows configuration of the PAs.Page 2-14 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)
2.4 Power Amplifiers Menu (Continued)FORWARD PA POWER STEP - VOICEFORWARD PA POWER STEP - CONTROLFORWARD PA POWER STEP - HAND-OFFEntry:Main Menu ⇒Power AmplifiersMenu ⇒, , or Purpose: These three parameters are used to select the power step for:• Voice channel PAs • Control channel PA• Hand-off PAOptions:• Steps: 0–3–0 is full power (45 watts); each step is a 4 dB decrease in power.• Default: 0FORWARD PA POWER LOW ALARM POINT - VOICEFORWARD PA POWER LOW ALARM POINT - CONTROLFORWARD PA POWER LOW ALARM POINT - HAND-OFFEntry:Main Menu ⇒Power AmplifiersMenu ⇒, , or Purpose: These three parameters are used to set low power alarm threshold for forwardvoice PAs. Should be 5 to 6 dB below power read using "key forward." Voice PA alarmscause the PA to be taken out of service and hand-off PA alarms to be logged, but the PAremains in service. If the Backup Control Channel option (see Sec. 2.5.2) is enabled, a lowPA power on the control channel will cause out-of-service for that PA.Options:• Range: 0, 30–50• Default: +40 dBmREVERSE PA POWER SET - VOICEREVERSE PA POWER SET - CONTROLMain Menu ⇒Power AmplifiersMenu ⇒ or Purpose: These two parameters are used to select power level for reverse PAs.Options:• Range: +5 to +20 dBm• Default: +20 dBmAMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 2-15
2.4 Power Amplifiers Menu (Continued)REVERSE PA POWER LOW ALARM POINT - VOICEREVERSE PA POWER LOW ALARM POINT - CONTROLEntry:Main Menu ⇒Power AmplifiersMenu ⇒ or Purpose: These two parameters are used to set low power alarm threshold for reverse PAs.Should be 5 dB below power read using "key reverse."Options:• Range: 0, 1–23• Default: +15 dBmKEY FORWARD PAMain Menu ⇒Power AmplifiersMenu ⇒Purpose: To key forward PA.Options:• PAs 1–11; position of PA to key. Keys PA on boosted channel at step as entered in A,B and C. Displays position channel number and continuously updated PA power readingat PA output.KEY REVERSE PAMain Menu ⇒Power AmplifiersMenu ⇒Purpose: Keys reverse PA for reverse power monitoring. Output channel is 10 channelsbelow boosted channel. Ouput level is as defined in J and K.Note: Board 6 uses the "CNTL" setting.Page 2-16 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)
2.5 System Parameters MenuMain Menu ⇒Menu:A Site ID.........Identification Multi-HopB Control Channels . Donor Boosted StateC Voice Channels . . . Donor Donor SAT BoostedD Modem Control . . . Passwords Console Time-outAuto-dial ControlDial-up Phone Modem MobileE Thresholds ......Hand-in Hand-back Multi-DonorMobile Power RSSI Averaging Hand-in DelayF Disconnect Control Donor RSSI SAT Fade Time-outHand-back Delay Hand-back AttemptsG Call Processing . . . Mobile Orig Mobile AnswerRSSI > Thresh Hand-back / Grab-backPurpose: Displays parameters associated with overall system.Entry:Main Menu ⇒SystemParameters Menu ⇒Menu:A Site Identification......................Not AssignedB Multi-hop Feature ......................DISABLEDPurpose: Gives access to parameters associated with site ID.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 2-17
(Continued)SITE IDENTIFICATIONEntry:Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par. Menu ⇒Site ID Menu ⇒Purpose: To assign/modify a name that uniquely identifies the site. Name appearson console when the remote/local link is established to identify the site with whichthe user is communicating.Options:• Allowable entries: Any string of up to 20 characters• Default: Not assignedMULTI-HOP FEATUREEntry:Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par. Menu ⇒Site ID Menu ⇒Purpose: To turn the Multi-hop feature on or off.Options:• 0= DISABLED: Default setting; causes conventional stand-alone operation.• 1= ENABLED - MODE 1 - ADJACENT TO DONOR• 2= ENABLED - MODE 2 - ADJACENT TO AN EAC-2000• 3= ENABLED - MODE 3 - ADJACENT TO AN EAC-IV (NO PRIOREAC-2000 IN CHAIN)• 4= ENABLED - MODE 4 - ADJACENT TO AN EAC-IV (WITH PRIOREAC-2000 IN CHAIN) NOTE: The EAC-2000 may be used in a Multi-hop configuration with otherEAC-2000s and/or Extend-A-Cell® IVs. The type of units between the EAC-2000 and the donor will determine how this option should be set.Page 2-18 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)
Entry:Main Menu ⇒SystemParameters Menu ⇒Menu:A Donor Control Channel ............................... 337B Boosted Control Channel ............................. 340C RF Board to Use for Control Channel ...................... 1D Control Channel State During "All Channels Busy DIRECTED RETRYE Directed Retry Channels ............................. LISTF Back-up Control Channel Option ...................DISABLEDG Revertive Control Channel Option ..................DISABLEDH Substitute Control Channel .......................DISABLEDI Booster Link Channel................................ 550J Booster Link Channel - Previous EAC .................... 571 Selection H appears only if Selection F or G is set to ENABLED.Selection I appears only if the Multi-Donor Threshold is not DISABLED.Selection J appears only if the Multi-hop Feature is set to Mode 3 or Mode 4.Purpose: Gives access to donor and boosted control channels, for enteringchannel numbers.DONOR CONTROL CHANNELEntry:Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par. Menu ⇒ControlChannels Menu ⇒Purpose: To establish the donor control channel number. Options:• Allowable range: 1–799, 991–1023• Default: 337EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7926-2, 12/95) Page 2-19
(Continued)BOOSTED CONTROL CHANNELEntry:Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par. Menu ⇒ControlChannels Menu ⇒Purpose: To establish the boosted control channel number. This is the channelto which combiner port 1 is tuned. Any changes to this parameter willnecessitate retuning the combiner.Options:• Allowable range: 1–799, 991–1023• Default: 340RF BOARD TO USE FOR CONTROL CHANNELEntry:Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par. Menu ⇒ControlChannels Menu ⇒Purpose: To assign one of the RF boards to boost the control channel. Options:• 0 VOICE CHANNELS ONLY: All channels will operate as voicechannels only. Appropriate only in a multi-cabinet configurationof EAC-2000s for the units not boosting the control channel.(Presumably, another EAC-2000 would be set up to boost thecontrol channel.)• 1–11 CORRESPONDING RF BOARD POSITION: Allows assignmentof one of the RF boards (except board 6) to boost the controlchannel. The associated combiner port should be tuned to theBoosted Control Channel.• Default: 1Page 2-20 EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7926-2, 12/95)
(Continued)CONTROL CHANNEL STATE DURING "ALL CHANNELS BUSY"Entry:Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par. Menu ⇒ControlChannels Menu ⇒Purpose: To establish the state of the boosted control channel when all boostedvoice channels are occupied. Options: • OFF: The best option for installations where there is no competingservice. Boosted control channel will be taken down during periods whenno voice channels are available for processing new calls. When the EAC-2000 becomes busy, mobiles that are in the boosted coverage area (butnot on a call) will rescan and lock onto another control channel (possiblya competitor's).• BOOST ACCESSES: Use only if there is good coverage from the donorcell in the booster coverage area. The boosted control channel will stayup when all boosted voice channels are busy. Mobiles in the coveragearea will remain locked to the boosted control channel. If a call isattempted while the EAC-2000 is busy, the call setup transmissions on thecontrol channel will be boosted. However, the EAC-2000 will not boostthe call on the voice channel, and the mobile will be left on the original-donor-assigned voice channel. Thus the call will be set up but, if themobile is unable to communicate with the donor directly, the call willdrop.• DENY ACCESSES: Forward boosted control channel will stay up, butthe reverse control boost path will be disabled. Therefore mobiles in thebooster coverage area will remain locked to the boosted control channel,but if they try to place or answer a call they will be unable to signal backto the donor on the reverse control channel. Mobiles' attempted call willresult in "fast busy" (reorder) at the mobile within about 1 second. Callsto a mobile in a busy EAC-2000 coverage area will result in a "mobilenot in service area" message to the calling party.• DENY ACCESSES, BUT COUNT: This is similar to "Deny Access";the mobile is allowed to access the EAC-2000, but the access is notrepeated. This allows the call attempt to be logged. Mobile calls willresult in fast busy after about 5 seconds.• DIRECTED RETRY: Default setting. Probably the best option forinstallations where a competitive system exists. When the EAC-2000 isbusy, the boosted channel stays on the air. If more accesses or pageresponses come in, the EAC-2000 sends the mobile a special "directedretry" message. This message gives the mobile a list of up to six othercontrol channels on which to attempt the access. These directed retrychannels can be set by the user.EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7926-2, 12/95) Page 2-21
(Continued)DIRECTED RETRY CHANNELSEntry:Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par. Menu ⇒ControlChannels Menu ⇒Purpose: If the control channel state is set to this mode, this list of sixchannels will be sent to the mobile in the directed retry message. The mobilewill scan this set of channels and will try its access on the strongest of the sixchannels. The donor control channel and the control channel of cells adjacentto the boosted coverage should be entered. NOTE: The boosted control channel must not be in this list.Options:• Any valid channel• Default: All disabledBACK-UP CONTROL CHANNEL OPTIONEntry:Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par. Menu ⇒ControlChannels Menu ⇒Purpose: If enabled, board 6 will be used to boost the control channel if thenormal control channel board is disabled, either by the user or by an alarm.Boosted channel will be the "Substitute Control Channel."Options:• Enabled• Disabled (default)Page 2-22 EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7926-2, 12/95)
(Continued)REVERTIVE CONTROL CHANNEL OPTIONEntry:Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par. Menu ⇒ControlChannels Menu ⇒Purpose: If enabled, board 1, or whichever board is assigned to boost thecontrol channel, will be used to boost the last call.Options:• Enabled• Disabled (default)SUBSTITUTE CONTROL CHANNELEntry:Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par. Menu ⇒ControlChannels Menu ⇒Purpose: To assign a control channel for use by board 6 when the controlchannel equipment is disabled or is being used to boost the last voice callOptions:• DISABLED: Default setting. • Allowable range: 1–799, 991–1023Use board 6 to boost the control channel onto the channel chosen in thefollowing situations:• if the revertive control channel feature is enabled and the control channelequipment is used to boost the last call; or• if the backup control channel feature is enabled and the control channelequipment is disabled (i.e., due to low PA power).The substitute control channel number must be from the set of dedicated controlchannels. The substitute control channel must be separated from the donorcontrol channel by at least three channels (90 kHz). If the revertive controlchannel option is enabled, the substitute control channel must also be separatedfrom the boosted control channel by at least three channels (90 kHz).If the revertive control channel option is disabled and the back-up controlchannel option is enabled, the substitute control channel may be the same as theboosted control channel. Since board 6 is used to transmit the substitute controlchannel and since its output is not combined, the combiner tuning is not affectedby this channel choice.EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7926-2, 12/95) Page 2-23
(Continued)NOTE: Interaction of Revertive Control Channel Option, Substitute ControlChannel, and Boosted Control Channel State When All Channels Busy:If the Revertive Control Channel Option is enabled, then "All Channels Busy"occurs when the control channel board is boosting the last call. Therefore, the"Boosted Cntl Channel State When All Channels Busy" actually applies to board6 when it is acting as the substitute cntl channel.For example, if "State" is set to Disabled, then board 6 will not be brought up asa substitute cntl channel even though it might otherwise be enabled. If "State" isset to Directed Retry, board 6 will be used to send those messages.BOOSTER LINK CHANNELEntry:Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par. Menu ⇒ControlChannels Menu ⇒Purpose: To identify the dedicated link channel used to signal between anEAC-2000 and any listening EAC-2000s or EAC-IVs in a Multi-hopconfiguration. Options:• Must be selected if:- Multi-hop Feature is enabled.• Allowable range: 1–799, 991–1023BOOSTER LINK CHANNEL—PREVIOUS EACEntry:Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par. Menu ⇒ControlChannels Menu ⇒Purpose: Identifies the dedicated link channel used to receive call setupinformation from the previous EAC-IV in a Multi-hop configuration (onlyappears if Multi-hop feature is set to Mode 3 or 4).Options:• Allowable range: 1–799, 991–1023• Set parameter to channel assigned as booster link channel in the previousEAC-IV in a Multi-hop chain.Page 2-24 EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7926-2, 12/95)
Main Menu ⇒System Parameters Menu ⇒Menu:A Donor Voice Channels (5970 Hz SAT) .............ListB Donor Voice Channels (6000 Hz SAT) .............ListC Donor Voice Channels (6030 Hz SAT) .............ListM Donor Voice Channels (Multiple SAT) ..............List2 Boosted Voice Channel Position 2 .................3613 Boosted Voice Channel Position 3 .................3824 Boosted Voice Channel Position 4 .................4035 Boosted Voice Channel Position 5 .................4247 Boosted Voice Channel Position 7 .................4458 Boosted Voice Channel Position 8 .................4669 Boosted Voice Channel Position 9 .................48710 Boosted Voice Channel Position 10 ................50811 Boosted Voice Channel Position 11 ................529 Selection 1, Boosted Voice Channel 1, is displayed onlyif the "Voice Channels Only" state is selected for "RF Board to Usefor Control Channel" on Control Channel Menu..Purpose: Gives access to donor voice channel lists and boosted voice channels.EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7926-2, 12/95) Page 2-25
(Continued)DONOR VOICE CHANNEL LISTS (5970–6030 Hz SAT)Entry:Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par. Menu ⇒Voice ChannelsMenu ⇒, , or Purpose: To display/change the list of donor voice channels, for thecorresponding SAT, which are scanned for mobile candidates to boost. Whenscanned, a candidate is verified as having the correct SAT before being boosted.Once the call is set up, the appropriate SAT is monitored.Allowable Range: • 1–799, 991–1023Making Entries:• Enter a given channel in only one list.• Entering channels in lists:- To add a channel: enter A [channel number] <CR>.- To add 15 channels spaced 48 channels apart, precede channelnumber with +. Remove unwanted channels. - To remove a channel, enter R [channel number] <CR>.- To add/remove multiple channels: enter A (add) or R (remove)[multiple channel numbers separated by commas or spaces] <CR>.• To change the SAT of a given channel, remove the channel from the oldSAT list, then add the channel to the new SAT list.Page 2-26 EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7926-2, 12/95)
(Continued)DONOR VOICE CHANNELS LIST (Multiple SAT)Entry:Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par. Menu ⇒Voice ChannelsMenu ⇒Purpose: To display and/or change the list of donor voice channels for use ina Multi-hop. This parameter is needed when a call may be boosted on variousboosted channels (with different SATs) of the previous EAC-2000, dependingon which donor originally set up the call.Enter channels in this list ONLY when—• The EAC-2000 is one of the Multi-hop units (not adjacent to primarydonor cell).• One of the previous EAC-2000s in the chain has multiple possible donors.BOOSTED VOICE CHANNEL POSITIONS 2–5, 7–11Entry:Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par.Menu ⇒Voice ChannelsMenu ⇒, Purpose: To assign boosted voice channels.Options:• Allowable range: 1–799, 991–1023NOTE:• "Boosted voice channel 1" appears if RF board to use for control channelis set to 0.• When boosted voice channels 2–5 and 7–11 are entered, the associatedcombiners must be retuned.EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7926-2, 12/95) Page 2-27
Main Menu ⇒System ParametersMenu ⇒Menu:A Master Password ............................1234B Restricted Password ..........................5678C Console Time-out..................... 30 (x 10 Sec)D Auto-dial Enable ...................... DISARMEDE Dial-up Phone Number 1 ................12163498684F Dial-up Phone Number 2 .................... NONEG Auto-dial Trials Max .......................... 10H Delay Between Auto-dial Retries ........... 6 (x 10 Sec)I Max Auto-dial Trial Period ............... 9 (x 10 Sec)J Modem Setup ...................... PARAMETERSK Modem Mobile MIN ....................1234567890L Modem Mobile Power Step....................... 7Purpose: Gives access to parameters associated with EAC-2000’s remote linkmodem.MASTER PASSWORDEntry:Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par.Menu ⇒Modem ControlMenu ⇒Purpose: To assign a master password unique to the site. When entered inresponse to a password prompt, it unlocks the console unconditionally andallows access to all system setup and monitor commands.Options:• Allowable entries: Any string of up to 12 characters• Default: 1234Page 2-28 EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7926-2, 12/95)
(Continued)RESTRICTED PASSWORDEntry:Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par.Menu ⇒Modem ControlMenu ⇒Purpose: To assign a unique restricted password for the site. When enteredin response to a password prompt, it unlocks the console but only allows theuser access to the following system monitoring commands: ALA, HEL, LOC,RSS, SSS, DCH, DCS, SSR, and SCS.Options:• Allowable entries: Any string of up to 12 characters• Default: 5678CONSOLE TIME-OUTEntry:Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par.Menu ⇒Modem ControlMenu ⇒Purpose: To set the maximum time the console will wait before locking duringperiods of no keyboard activity.Options:• Displayed in multiples of 10 seconds• Allowable range: 1–250 (10–2500 seconds) • Default: 30 (300 seconds, or 5 minutes)AUTO-DIAL ENABLEEntry:Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par.Menu ⇒Modem ControlMenu ⇒Purpose: To arm/disarm the modem's ability to automatically dial a designatedtelephone number when critical alarms exist.Options:•ARMED• DISARMED (default)NOTE: This function automatically disarms after a successful auto-dial (toprevent duplicate alarm reporting) or after the designated maximum number ofauto-dial trials have been made without a successful connection.EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7926-2, 12/95) Page 2-29
(Continued)DIAL-UP PHONE NUMBERS (1 AND 2)Entry:Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par.Menu ⇒Modem ControlMenu ⇒Purpose: To assign numbers to be dialed by the EAC-2000 when a criticalalarm condition occurs. The second dial-up phone number is typically used toalert a different location. NOTE: If both numbers are entered, the EAC-2000 will alternately dialboth until a successful connection is made and a report is transmitted.The EAC-2000 will continue dialing until a successful connection is madeand a report is transmitted to both numbers. Options:• Allowable entries: Any string of up to 48 characters. The followingspecial entries allow user to specify non-displayable characters and EACdelays in string:~!^@-^_^1-^9^~^!^^causes EAC to delay .5 secondscauses EAC to send an ASCII 0D hex (carriage return) causes EAC to send non-displayable control characterscauses EAC to delay 1–9 secondscauses EAC to send an ASCII 7E hex ("~" character)causes EAC to send an ASCII 21 hex ("!" character)causes EAC to send an ASCII 5E hex ("^" character) NOTE: This allows any ASCII character 1–7E to be specified.• Default:–Dial-Up Phone #1: 12163498684 (Allen Telecom Systems, SystemsEngineering Department)–Dial-Up Phone #2: NonePage 2-30 EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7926-2, 12/95)
(Continued)DIAL-UP PHONE NUMBERS (1 AND 2) (Continued)EAC delays (specified by ~ and ^1 – ^9) cause the EAC to delay the specifiedtime before sending more characters (no characters are sent to the modemduring the delay time). This is not to be confused with "modem" delaycharacters, which are actually sent to the modem, where the delay occurs.Hayes compatible uses "," to specify a "pause" delay, which defaults to 2seconds.For example—• Use ~ to give the modem time to process a command string; i.e., the ~ in"~~~+++~~~ATH0!", the default hang-up string, specifies the 1.5 second delaybefore and after the "+++" needed to guarantee a modem will enter"command" mode.• Use "," to specify dialing delays; i.e., in a dial string, "5493857,,,,1234"specifies that the modem should dial 5493857, delay 8 seconds, then dial1234. This might be used to dial a number, wait for an answer, thenoverdial more digits (for example, a paging service).AUTO-DIAL TRIALS MAXEntry:Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par.Menu ⇒Modem ControlMenu ⇒Purpose: To set the maximum number of auto-dial trials the modem willattempt if there are critical alarms to be reported and a connection cannot bemade.Options:• Allowable range: 0–10 attempts• Default: 10 attemptsEAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7926-2, 12/95) Page 2-31
(Continued)DELAY BETWEEN AUTO-DIAL RETRIESEntry:Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par.Menu ⇒Modem ControlMenu ⇒Purpose: To set the length of time the modem will wait after an unansweredauto-dial call (critical alarm report) before trying again.Options:• Displayed in multiples of 10 seconds• Allowable range: 0–250 (0–2500 seconds)• Default: 6 (60 seconds)MAX AUTO-DIAL TRIAL PERIODEntry:Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par.Menu ⇒Modem ControlMenu ⇒Purpose: To set the maximum length of time the modem will wait beforedisconnecting an unanswered auto-dial call.Options:• Displayed in multiples of 10 seconds• Allowable range: 0–250 (0–2500 seconds)• Default: 6 (60 seconds)Page 2-32 EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7926-2, 12/95)
(Continued)MODEM SETUPEntry:Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par.Menu ⇒Modem ControlMenu ⇒Menu:A Init String ............. AT!~AT!~AT&FX0E0\D2S0=1S10=20)M1:E0*H1!B Dial Prefix String........................................ ATDTC Hangup String ..................................~~~+++~~~ATH0!D Local Port Baud Rate ...................................... 9600E Local Port Comm Params . . . 7 data, EVEN tx parity, IGNORE rx parity, 1 stopF Remote Port Baud Rate .................................... 9600G Remote Port Comm Params . . 7 data, EVEN tx parity, CHECK rx parity, 1 stopH Remote Port Handshake ................................. CTS/RTSPurpose: Gives access to parameters associated with setting up the modem.INIT STRINGEntry:MainMenu ⇒Sys. Par.Menu ⇒ModemControl Menu ⇒ModemSetup Menu ⇒Purpose: To specify the string used to initialize the modem. This string is sentat power-up and after LOC or console timeout; changes will be effective for thenext session.Options:• Allowable entries: Any string of up to 48 characters. • The following special entries allow the user to specify nondisplayablecharacters and EAC delays in a string:~!^@ to ^_^1 to ^9^~^!^^causes EAC to delay .5 secondscauses EAC to send and ASCII 0D hex (carriage return)causes EAC to send non-displayable control characterscauses EAC to delay 1–9 secondscauses EAC to send an ASCII 7E hex ("~" character)causes EAC to send an ASCII 21 hex ("!" character)causes EAC to send an ASCII 5E hex ("^" character)EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7926-2, 12/95) Page 2-33
(Continued)INIT STRING (Continued)• Default string: AT!~AT!~AT&FX0E0\D2S0=1S10=20)M1:E0*H1!Descriptions of default string elements: AT!~AT!~ Sends "AT" carriage return, delays .5 seconds, thensends it again. This allows modem two chances toauto baud. AT&F Causes modem to set factory defaults. X0E0 Causes modem to use standard result codes, no echoin command mode, both required by EAC-2000interface software. \D2 Causes modem CTS to be inactive when no carrier isdetected; CTS is used as handshake during connection. S0=1 Causes modem to auto-answer after one ring. S10=20 Causes modem carrier timeout to be 2 seconds.Default timeout of 6 seconds falses with modemmobile supplied dial tone. )M1:E0*H1! This is the setup string recommended by Microcommfor modems connected to cellular mobile, with theseexceptions:- /N3 not specified (so still can dial with an oldermodem)- @M18 not specified (because modem mobileworks better at default level) DIAL PREFIX STRINGMainMenu ⇒Sys. Par.Menu ⇒ModemControl Menu ⇒ModemSetup Menu ⇒Purpose: To specify the string sent to the modem before the dial strings.Allows modem to be set up differently for answer than for originate.Options:• Allowable entries: Any string of up to 16 characters. • Special entries to specify EAC delays and nondisplayable characters arethe same as listed under INIT STRING.• Default: ATDTPage 2-34 EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7926-2, 12/95)
(Continued)HANG UP STRINGEntry:MainMenu ⇒Sys. Par.Menu ⇒ModemControl Menu ⇒ModemSetup Menu ⇒C<CR>Purpose: To specify the string sent to the modem after LOC or consoletimeout to cause the connection to end.Options:• Allowable entries: Any string of up to 16 characters.• Special entries to specify EAC delays and nondisplayable characters arethe same as listed under INIT STRING.• Default: ~~~+++~~~ATHO!(Hayes compatible modems enter command mode if they receive +++without receiving any other characters 1.5 seconds before or after theplusses. ATHO! causes the modem to hang up.)LOCAL PORT BAUD RATEEntry:MainMenu ⇒Sys. Par.Menu ⇒ModemControl Menu ⇒ModemSetup Menu ⇒Purpose: To specify the baud rate used for the local port. This rate should bekept higher than or equal to the remote baud rate. The EAC-2000 softwaremaximum transmit rate is about 1 character per millisecond, so effectivethroughput does not increase beyond 9600. Changes for this parameter will takeeffect after a LOC or reset (i.e., during the next session).Options:• Allowable entries: 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200• Default: 9600NOTE:• If the password bypass switch (see Volume 2, Section 1.2.1) is enabledwhen the EAC-2000 is LOCed or reset, the local port operates at thedefault baud rate.• For some older revision controller boards, 2400 is the maximum baud ratesupported. If this is the case, the displayed options list will not include4800, 9600, or 19200, and the default will be 2400. (The softwareautomatically determines the controller board revision.) EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7926-2, 12/95) Page 2-35
(Continued)LOCAL PORT COMM PARAMSEntry:MainMenu ⇒Sys. Par.Menu ⇒ModemControl Menu ⇒ModemSetup Menu ⇒Purpose: To specify parameters for the local communications port, includingnumber of data bits, parity, and number of stop bits. The two most commonlyused combinations are 7 even 1 stop and 8 no 1 stop. Changes for thisparameter will take effect after a LOC or reset (i.e., during the next session).Options:• Allowable entries:- Data bits: 7 or 8 - Parity: Even, odd, mark, space, no transmit; check or ignore receive parity- Stop bits: 1 or 2• Default: 7 data, EVEN tx parity, IGNORE rx parity, 1 stopNOTE: If the password bypass switch (see Volume 2, Section 1.2.1) is enabledwhen the EAC-2000 is LOCed or reset, the local port operates with the defaultcomm parameters.REMOTE PORT BAUD RATEEntry:MainMenu ⇒Sys. Par.Menu ⇒ModemControl Menu ⇒ModemSetup Menu ⇒Purpose: To specify the baud rate used for the connection to the modem.Changes for this parameter will take effect after a LOC or reset (i.e., during thenext session).This rate represents a maximum for the actual modem-to-modem link rate. Forexample, with the remote port baud rate set to 9600, the Microcom modem canconnect at any standard rate less than or equal to 9600. The actual connectionrate is automatically determined by the modems according to capabilities ofeach and the quality of the connection.This parameter provides an easy way to force the modem to use a lower baudrate (e.g., 2400 or 4800). If the EAC-2000 is dialed up with another high speedmodem, the modems tend to be optimistic in their initial determination of rateand, if possible, connect at 7200 or even 9600. However, the cellular link maynot support these speeds very well, and the modems spend most of their timeretransmitting messages due to link errors.Page 2-36 EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7926-2, 12/95)
(Continued)In these cases, higher throughput may be achieved if the remote port baud rateis set to 4800 or 2400. Another way to limit the connection rate is to dial (oranswer) the modem with ah high speed modem whose serial rate is set to 4800or 2400.Options:• Allowable entries: 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200• Default: 9600NOTE: For some older revision controller boards, the maximum baud ratesupported is 2400. If this is the case, the displayed options list will not include4800, 9600, or 19200, and the default will be 2400. (The softwareautomatically determines the controller board revision.)REMOTE PORT COMM PARAMSEntry:MainMenu ⇒Sys. Par.Menu ⇒ModemControl Menu ⇒ModemSetup Menu ⇒Purpose: To specify parameters for the local communications port, includingnumber of data bits, parity, and number of stop bits. The two most commonlyused combinations are 7 even 1 stop and 8 no 1 stop. Changes for thisparameter will take effect after a LOC or reset (i.e., during the next session).Options:• Allowable entries:- Data bits: 7 or 8 - Parity: Even, odd, mark, space, no transmit; check or ignore receive parity- Stop bits: 1 or 2• Default: 7 data, EVEN tx parity, CHECK rx parity, 1 stopEAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7926-2, 12/95) Page 2-37
(Continued)REMOTE PORT HANDSHAKEEntry:MainMenu ⇒Sys. Par.Menu ⇒ModemControl Menu ⇒ModemSetup Menu ⇒Purpose: To specify the mechanism for handshaking on the remote port.Handshaking (i.e., the mechanism the modem uses to stop and start characterflow from the EAC-2000) is required in two situations:(1) For "reliable" connections, the modem may have to stop character flowwhen link errors occur. For reliable links, the modem automatically retransmitscharacter blocks until the receiving modem indicates the data was received withno error.(2) Often the connection rate is lower than the modem port rate. In fact, it isdesirable to set the modem port rate as high as the highest desired connectionrate, so that the modem port is not the limiting link.Changes to this parameter will take effect after a loc or reset (i.e., during thenext session).Options:• Allowable entries: None, Xon/Xoff, CTS/RTS• Default: CTS/RTSNOTE: The default init strings for the modems include commands that causethem to operate with CTS/RTS handshaking.MODEM MOBILE MINEntry:Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par.Menu ⇒Modem ControlMenu ⇒Purpose: To enter the Mobile Identification Number (MIN) of the cellularmobile used to establish the remote control link in the booster. The boosteruses the MIN to trap calls to and from the modem mobile and forces them tostay on the donor voice channel and not occupy a boosted voice channel.Options:• Allowable entries: String of any 10 digits• Default: 1234567890Page 2-38 EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7926-2, 12/95)
(Continued)MODEM MOBILE POWER STEPEntry:Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par.Menu ⇒Modem ControlMenu ⇒Purpose: To set the mobile attenuation code (VMAC) for the mobile used toestablish the remote link. Modem mobile power should be kept as low aspossible to minimize front-end overload in the booster receivers.Options:• Allowable range: 0–7- 0 = full power (3 watts)- Each step corresponds to a 4 dB decrease in power (7 = 28 dBbelow full power)• Default: 7EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7926-2, 12/95) Page 2-39
Main Menu ⇒System Parameters Menu ⇒Menu:A Mobile Dynamic Power Control Threshold .................. -60 dBmB Hand-in Threshold ................................... -90 dBmC Multi-Donor Activation Threshold ......................DISABLEDD Hand-back Threshold ................................ -100 dBmE Hand-in Mobile Power Step ................................. 0F Hand-back Mobile Power Step ............................... 0G RSSI Averaging Speed ............................... MEDIUMH Delay Between Hand-in Attempts .......................... 5 SecI Station Power Class Selective Boosting . . BOOST ALL POWER CLASSESPurpose: Gives access to the parameters associated with the hand-off algorithmused by the EAC-2000. NOTE: The thresholds chosen for Selections A–D should be indescending order (i.e., A should always be higher than B, etc.), asillustrated above.MOBILE DYNAMIC POWER CONTROL THRESHOLDEntry:Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par.Menu ⇒Thresholds and PowerControl Menu ⇒Purpose: To set the signal level threshold at which the EAC-2000 will reducethe power of the mobile.Options:• Allowable range: -120 dBm to -20 dBm• Default: -60 dBm• To disable: 0NOTE: The EAC-2000 receivers have state-of-the-art intermod performance.Nevertheless, signal strengths above -60 dBm (which may occur if mobilesdrive close to the booster location) may cause intermodulation interference toweak mobiles on the other booster channels. To handle this possibility, theEAC-2000 monitors the RSSIs on the reverse voice channels (i.e., from theboosted mobiles). If the RSSI exceeds the Mobile Dynamic Power ControlThreshold, a power control message is sent to the mobile, causing it to lowerits power output by 3 VMAC steps (12 dBm) from the current setting. This istriggered each time the threshold is exceeded. Page 2-40 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)
(Continued)MOBILE DYNAMIC POWER CONTROL THRESHOLD (Continued)For example, if a mobile running full power (VMAC = 0) comes close to thebooster, the power will be cut back to VMAC = 3. If the mobile still exceedsthe threshold, the power will be lowered to VMAC = 6, then finally to VMAC= 7 (the minimum power setting). If the RSSI from the mobile with VMAC =7 exceeds the threshold, a Reverse Channel High RSSI Alarm will be logged.Mobiles that have been powered down by the EAC-2000 will be powered upwhen the mobile RSSI decreases to -90 dBm unless the hand-back threshold is>-90 dBm In this case, the power up message will be sent when the mobileRSSI reaches the hand-back threshold.HAND-IN THRESHOLDEntry: Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par.Menu ⇒Thresholds and PowerControl Menu ⇒Purpose: To set the signal level threshold at which a mobile on one of thedonor voice channels becomes a candidate for boosting.Options:• Allowable range: -120 dBm to -20 dBm• Default: -90 dBm• To disable: 0AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 2-41
(Continued)MULTI-DONOR ACTIVATION THRESHOLDEntry: Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par.Menu ⇒Thresholds and PowerControl Menu ⇒Purpose: To set the signal level threshold at which a mobile being boosted willtrigger transmission of a boosted/donor channel relationship message to anylistening Multi-Donor Units (MDUs). (To enable operation with MDUs, thisthreshold must be set at a level that will trigger data transmission—and thesubsequent untranslate action at the MDU—before the mobile gets too weak tohandle at the EAC-2000. Once sent, the relationship stays in effect at the MDUfor an ample time period. The strength of the mobile at the adjacent cell sitewill determine when translation occurs, if at all.)Options:• -120 to -20 dBm• 0 DISABLED: Default (appropriate if no MDUs are installed inadjacent cell sites)• A ALWAYS (sent whenever call setup does not depend on signallevel)Setting the Level:• If set too high, unnecessary transmissions to the MDUs will occur.• If set higher than the hand-in threshold, a mobile may be handed from theboosting EAC-2000 back to one cell site, then to another cell site, andthen picked up again by the EAC-2000.• Reasonable setting: Half-way between hand-in threshold and hand-backthreshold.NOTE: This parameter does not affect EAC-2000 hand-ins (controlled bydonor voice channel lists and hand-in threshold) or EAC-2000 hand-backs(controlled by hand-back threshold). It only controls boosted/donor channelrelationship message transmission, which in turn affects cellular system-generated hand-offs aided by the MDUs.Page 2-42 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)
(Continued)HAND-BACK THRESHOLDEntry: Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par.Menu ⇒Thresholds and PowerControl Menu ⇒Purpose: To set the signal level threshold at which a mobile being boostedbecomes a candidate for returning to the original donor site voice channel.Options:• Allowable range: -120 dBm to -20 dBm• Default: -100 dBm• To disable: 0HAND-IN MOBILE POWER STEPEntry: Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par.Menu ⇒Thresholds and PowerControl Menu ⇒Purpose: To set the mobile attenuation code (VMAC) sent to mobiles beingboosted to establish the power step. Options:• Allowable range: 0–7- 0 = full power (3 watts)- Each step corresponds to a 4 dB decrease in power (7 = 28 dBbelow full power)• Default: 0HAND-BACK MOBILE POWER STEPEntry: Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par.Menu ⇒Thresholds and PowerControl Menu ⇒Purpose: To set the mobile attenuation code (VMAC) sent to mobiles duringhand-back attempts, which establishes the power level of mobiles handed backto donor cell.Options:• Allowable range: 0–7- 0 = full power (3 watts)- Each step corresponds to a 4 dB decrease in power (7 = 28 dBbelow full power)• Default: 0AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 2-43
(Continued)RSSI AVERAGING SPEEDEntry:Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par.Menu ⇒Thresholds and PowerControl Menu ⇒Purpose: To select the algorithm used to average the RSSI readings taken onthe channels in the Donor Voice Channel Lists.Mobiles operating on these channels are operating directly with the donor. Thechannels are continuously scanned, and the readings are averaged and comparedto the hand-in threshold in order to identify mobiles that need boosting as theydrive into the boosted coverage area with a call already in progress.Options:• 1 SLOW: - Causes the average RSSI to reflect the last 10–20 readings. - Provides for an average that is extremely immune tofluctuations in the signals but will require 10–20 seconds toidentify a hand-in candidate. - Appropriate for reducing unsuccessful hand-in attempts forinstallations that have relatively few (< 20) donor voicechannels and in which the terrain is relatively flat, such thatthe EAC-2000 can "see" the mobiles for a long time beforethey reach the hand-in threshold.• 2 MEDIUM: - Causes the average RSSI to reflect the last 4–8 readings. - Provides for a compromise between immunity to signalfluctuations and fast identification of hand-in candidates.- DEFAULT setting.• 3 FAST: - Causes the average RSSI to reflect the last 2–5 readings. - Provides for the least immunity to fluctuations but the fastestpossible identification of hand-in candidates. - Appropriate for installations with a large number (> 60) ofdonor voice channels or for installations with rugged terrainwhere mobiles may suddenly "appear" to the EAC-2000 andneed boosting quickly.Page 2-44 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)
(Continued)DELAY BETWEEN HAND-IN ATTEMPTSEntry:Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par.Menu ⇒Thresholds and PowerControl Menu ⇒Purpose: To set the amount of time between hand-in attempts on a mobileidentified as a candidate for boosting (i.e., when signal exceeds hand-inthreshold).When a hand-in candidate is identified, a hand-in is attempted. The attempt willbe unsuccessful if the signal at the mobile is stronger from the donor than fromthe EAC-2000. After an unsuccessful attempt, the EAC-2000 waits the periodset in the "Delay Between Hand-in Attempts" parameter before it resumesscanning of that channel. This prevents repeated back-to-back hand-in attemptson the candidate.Options:• Allowable range: 0–250 seconds• Default: 5 secondsNOTE: The total delay between repeated hand-in attempts on the same channelwill be equal to the SAT Fade Time-out (the time it takes to perform anunsuccessful attempt), plus the Delay Between Hand-in Attempts, plus the timeit takes for the RSSI averaging to come back up (2–4 seconds for the MEDIUMsetting).STATION POWER CLASS SELECTIVE BOOSTINGEntry:Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par.Menu ⇒Thresholds and PowerControl Menu ⇒Purpose: Allows EAC-2000 to be configured to boost only lower-power units.This would be useful in situations where the EAC-2000 is deployed primarilyto enhance portable coverage, but where it might also capture mobiles that donot need boosting (i.e., a convention center or mall close to a major highway).Options:• BOOST ALL CLASSES• BOOST I-III ONLY• BOOST I-II ONLY• BOOST I ONLYAMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 2-45
Main Menu ⇒System ParametersMenu ⇒Menu:A Donor RSSI ............................ -80 dBmB SAT Fade Time-out ......................... 5 SecC Max Num of Hand-Back Attempts per Call .......... 10D Minimum Delay Between Hand-back Attempts ..... 15 SecPurpose: Gives access to parameters associated with the call disconnectfunction.DONOR RSSIEntry:Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par.Menu ⇒DisconnectControl Menu ⇒Purpose: To establish a minimum RF signal level the booster should expectfrom the donor cell during a call. If the signal on the Donor Voice Channel inuse falls below this level, the booster will end the call.Options:• Allowable range: -100 dBm to -20 dBm• Default: -80 dBm• To disable: 0Page 2-46 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)
(Continued)SAT FADE TIME-OUTEntry:Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par.Menu ⇒DisconnectControl Menu ⇒Purpose: To set the time period the system will wait before terminating anestablished call when proper SAT is not detected from a mobile.Options:• Allowable range: 0–250 seconds• Default: 5 secondsSetting the Time Period:• A setting of > 15 seconds may cause calls to continue to be boosted whenno mobile is on the channel. • A setting of > 5 seconds will affect the distribution of reasons for callterminations reported by the DCS command.•Do not set to > minimum delay between hand-back attempts (except forsystem testing). Hand-back attempts are performed at that interval, andafter a hand-back attempt, the mobile gets a fresh SAT fade timeoutinterval.MAX NUM OF HAND-BACK ATTEMPTS PER CALLEntry:Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par.Menu ⇒DisconnectControl Menu ⇒Purpose: To set the maximum number of hand-back attempts made on mobilesidentified as candidates for hand-back (i.e., signal below hand-back threshold).If the hand-back is not successful before this maximum number is reached, thebooster assumes that the mobile is driving away from donor cell site andmaintains the call as long as possible.Options:• Allowable range: 0–250 attempts• Default: 10AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 2-47
(Continued)MINIMUM DELAY BETWEEN HAND-BACK ATTEMPTSEntry:Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par.Menu ⇒DisconnectControl Menu ⇒Purpose: To set the time delay between hand-back attempts. This time delay,along with the Hand-back Threshold and the Max Num of Hand-back Attemptsper Call, controls the hand-off of calls being boosted back to the donor cell.The signal level from mobiles being boosted is constantly monitored. If it fallsbelow the Hand-back Threshold, a hand-back attempt is performed. If the callis not successfully handed back to the donor (i.e., if the EAC-2000 still providesa better signal than the donor), the EAC-2000 waits the time period set in theMinimum Delay Between Hand-back Attempts parameter before againmonitoring the mobile signal. This spaces out hand-back attempts on a mobilethat has fallen below the hand-back threshold but cannot yet be handed back.(This is important because the hand-back attempt causes a minimal audiointerruption.)Options:• Allowable range: 0–250 seconds• Default: 15 seconds NOTE: Do not set lower than SAT fade timeout (see note under SATfade timeout).Main Menu ⇒System ParametersMenu ⇒Menu:C Mobile RSSI > THRESHOLD Parameters ........... C1D Hand-back/Grab-back Control .................... D1E Recommendations Purpose: To provide a mechanism for tailoring EAC-2000 operation forspecific switch manufacturers. The specific timings and algorithms beingcontrolled are too detailed to describe, and virtually impossible to set,independently. Instead, combinations that have proven successful or desirableare grouped together and referred to as "Options." In the future, as other usefulcombinations are identified, more options will be added.Page 2-48 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)
(Continued)MOBILE RSSI > THRESHOLD PARAMETERSEntry:Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par.Menu ⇒Call ProcessingParameters Menu ⇒Options:• (1) Option C1 - Standard Call ProcessingHAND-BACK/GRAB-BACK CONTROLEntry:Main Menu ⇒Sys. Par.Menu ⇒Call ProcessingParameters Menu ⇒Purpose:Options:• (1) Option D1 - Standard Call Processing• (2) Option D2 - Dont Mute Reverse CarrierAMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 2-49
2.6 Alarms MenuMain Menu ⇒Menu:A Antenna Return Loss - Low Alarm Point ...........6 dBB PA to Antenna High Loss Alarm Point.............9 dBC PA Temp - High Alarm Point ............... 90 Deg CD PA Temp - Fan Activation Point ............. 60 Deg CE PA Temp - PA Power Cutback Point ......... 90 Deg CF Mobile Power Control Causes PA Power Cutback DISABLEDG +28 Volt Supply - PA Power Cutback Point ..... 23.0 VoltsH +28 Volt Supply - Low Alarm Point .......... 23.0 VoltsI +12 Volt Supply - Low Alarm Point .......... 10.0 VoltsJ +6 Volt Supply - Low Alarm Point ............5.4 VoltsK External Analog Inputs .............. ALARM POINTSL External Digital Inputs .............. ALARM STATESM External Digital Outputs .................... STATESN Critical Alarms ................ALARMS REPORTEDO RSSI - Alarms .................... ALARM POINTSPurpose: Gives access to parameters associated with generating alarm conditions (conditions, such as temperature extremes or low battery voltage, that cause EAC-2000 toregister an alarm). Each condition may be designated "log only" (the EAC-2000 willmaintain a log of the alarms that occur) or "critical" (the EAC-2000 will automatically diala telephone number to report the alarm).Entry:Main Menu ⇒Alarms Menu ⇒ Purpose: To specify the alarm threshold for the return loss on the M1 antennaport. When sufficient power is transmitted, the M1 antenna forward powerreading is compared to the reverse power reading. If forward minus reversepower is equal or less than the Antenna Return Loss - Low Alarm Pointparameter, an alarm is generated. This is useful for detecting faulty antenna orcable conditions.With laboratory quality 50 ohm loads attached, the sensor will indicate 16 to 18dB return loss. The default setting of 6 dB corresponds to a VSWR of 2. Thatis, with the alarm point set to 6 dB, an alarm will be generated if the VSWRis higher than 2.Options:• Allowable range: 0 (DISABLED), 1 to 20 dB• Default: 6 dBPage 2-50 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)
Entry:Main Menu ⇒Alarms Menu ⇒ Purpose: To specify the threshold for the PA to antenna high loss alarm. Atpower-on, and once per hour during operation, a test is conducted. Because thetest requires that one PA at a time be keyed, the test is conducted only when nocalls are up. (If a new call is detecting during the test, the test is aborted.)Each nondisabled board/PA is individually keyed, and the PA power reading iscompared to the M2 (for board 6) or M1 (for all other boards) forward powerreading.If the PA power minus the antenna power is equal to or greater than thethreshold, an alarm is generated. This indicates problems with the combiner,duplexer, or cabling. A mistuned combiner will cause these alarms to occur.Options:• Allowable range: 0 (DISABLED—TEST IS NOT CONDUCTED), 1 to20 dB• Default: 9 dBEntry:Main Menu ⇒Alarms Menu ⇒ Purpose: To define the upper PA temperature limit. Temperatures above thislimit cause an alarm to be logged.Options:• Allowable range: 0–100°C• Default: 90°CEntry:Main Menu ⇒Alarms Menu ⇒ Purpose: To identify the temperature that will cause the heat exchanger fan tobe activated. The temperature must drop at least 8oC below the fan activationpoint before the fan will turn off.Options:• Allowable range: 0–100°C• Default: 60°CAMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 2-51
DYNAMIC FORWARD POWER CONTROL ALGORITHM:The next three parameters control the dynamic forward power control algorithm. This algorithm dynamically adjusts the forward PA output power step according to:• PA temperature• Mobile VMAC power level• +28 volt supply voltageEach of the three controlling parameters can be individually disabled and adjusted. The algorithm is not cumulative—for example, if the PA temperature is too high,and the +28 volt supply is too low, the PAs will be reduced by only one step, nottwo. Also, the PA low power alarm threshold is effectively reduced when thealgorithm has caused PA step reduction. That is, a FORWARD PA POWER LOWALARM WILL not be caused by this algorithm (unless the power measured at aparticular step is lower than it should be at that step).Entry:Main Menu ⇒Alarms Menu ⇒ Purpose: To specify one of the three parameters that control the DynamicForward Power Control algorithm. If the temperature on a forward PA reaches the PA temp - PA Power CutbackPoint, that PA's power step will be lowered one step below the user-specifiedForward PA Power Step. Normally, this will result in significant cooling.When that PA's temperature drops 8oC below the cutback temperature, thenormal operating power step will be restored (unless one of the othermechanisms has imposed a power cutback).Options:• Allowable range: 0 (DISABLED), 1–100oC• Default: 90oCPage 2-52 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)
Entry:Main Menu ⇒Alarms Menu ⇒Purpose: To specify the second of the three parameters that control theDynamic Forward Power Control algorithm. If enabled, this causes the forwardPA power step to be reduced in conjunction with the mobile power reduction(which, in turn, is controlled by the Mobile Dynamic Power Control Threshold).If enabled, for each two-step reduction in mobile power, the forward PA poweris reduced one step. This mechanism is commonly employed to reduce the totalamount of RF power in the system to the minimum, which statistically lowersthe carrier to interference ratio.Options:• ENABLED• DISABLED (Default)Entry:Main Menu ⇒Alarms Menu ⇒Purpose: To specify the third of the three parameters that control the DynamicForward Power Control algorithm.If the +28 volt supply voltage as measured at the controller board is equal to orlower than the +28 Volt Supply - PA Power Cutback Point parameter, allforward PA power steps will be lowered one step below the user specifiedForward PA Power Step parameter. This will result in significantly less currentdrain. When the voltage goes back up by 1 volt, the normal operating powerstep will be restored (unless one of the other mechanisms has imposed a powercutback).Options:• Allowable range: 0 (DISABLED), .1 TO 50.9 VOLTS• Default: 23.0 VOLTSAMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 2-53
Entry:Main Menu ⇒Alarms Menu ⇒Purpose: To specify the +28 volt supply voltage alarm threshold. An alarmis generated if the +28 volt reading is equal to or lower than this voltage. The+28 volt is maintained by the system power supply and, optionally, by backupbatteries. The EAC-2000 will continue to function down to about 19 volts.Normally, this alarm is used to signal loss of ac power. If set close to +28volts, an alarm will be generated very quickly after the ac is lost. The voltagemay be lowered to cause alarms to generate after some amount of batterydischarge.Options:• Allowable range: 0 (DISABLED), .1 TO 50.9 VOLTS• Default: 23.0 VOLTSEntry:Main Menu ⇒Alarms Menu ⇒Purpose: To specify the +12 volt supply voltage alarm threshold. An alarmis generated if the +12 volt reading is equal or lower than this voltage. Thisalarm indicates a problem with the +28 to +12 volt dc-dc converter, harnesswiring, or connectors.Options:• Allowable range: 0 (DISABLED), .1 TO 14.9 VOLTS• Default: 10.0 VOLTSEntry:Main Menu ⇒Alarms Menu ⇒Purpose: To specify the +6 volt supply voltage alarm threshold. An alarm isgenerated if the +6 volt reading is equal to or lower than this voltage. Thisalarm indicates a problem with the +28 to +6 volt dc-dc converter, harnesswiring, or connectors.Options:• Allowable range: 0 (disabled), .1 to 9.9 volts• Default: 5.4 voltsPage 2-54 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)
Entry:Main Menu ⇒Alarms Menu ⇒Menu:PA 1–6 Cage:1 Ext. Analog Input 1 Alarm State . . DISABLED; Input Currently 0.0 V2 Ext. Analog Input 2 Alarm State . . DISABLED; Input Currently 0.0 V3 Ext. Analog Input 3 Alarm State . . DISABLED; Input Currently 0.0 V4 Ext. Analog Input 4 Alarm State . . DISABLED; Input Currently 0.0 VPA 7–11 Cage:5 Ext. Analog Input 1 Alarm State . . DISABLED; Input Currently 0.0 V6 Ext. Analog Input 2 Alarm State . . DISABLED; Input Currently 0.0 V7 Ext. Analog Input 3 Alarm State . . DISABLED; Input Currently 0.0 V8 Ext. Analog Input 4 Alarm State . . DISABLED; Input Currently 0.0 VPurpose: Allows setting of the alarm conditions for the external analog inputsavailable on a connector at the back of each PA cage. Up to four analog inputsper PA cage may be connected.Options:• Allowable entries:(0) DISABLED(1) ABOVE(2) BELOW• The input alarm points are individually controllable; if above or below isselected, a threshold between .1 and 5.0 volts may be specified.• Default: (0) DisabledAMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 2-55
Entry: Main Menu ⇒Alarms Menu ⇒Menu:PA 1–6 Cage:1 Ext. Digital Input 1 - Alarm State . DISABLED; Input Currently LOW2 Ext. Digital Input 2 Alarm State . . DISABLED; Input Currently LOW3 Ext. Digital Input 3 Alarm State . . DISABLED; Input Currently LOW4 Ext. Digital Input 4 Alarm State . . DISABLED; Input Currently LOWPA 7–11 Cage:5 Ext. Digital Input 1 Alarm State . . DISABLED; Input Currently LOW6 Ext. Digital Input 2 Alarm State . . DISABLED; Input Currently LOW7 Ext. Digital Input 3 Alarm State . . DISABLED; Input Currently LOW8 Ext. Digital Input 4 Alarm State . . DISABLED; Input Currently LOWPurpose: Allows setting of the alarm conditions for the external digital inputsavailable on a connector at the back of each PA cage. Up to four digital inputsper PA cage may be connected.Options:• Allowable entries: (0) DISABLED(1) HIGH(2) LOW• Default: (0) DISABLEDPage 2-56 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)
Entry: Main Menu ⇒Alarms Menu ⇒Menu:PA 1–6 Cage:1 Ext. Digital Output 1 State ............. LOW2 Ext. Digital Output 2 State ............. LOW3 Ext. Digital Output 3 State ............. LOW4 Ext. Digital Output 4 State ............. LOWPA 7–11 Cage:5 Ext. Digital Output 1 State ............. LOW6 Ext. Digital Output 2 State ............. LOW7 Ext. Digital Output 3 State ............. LOW8 Ext. Digital Output 4 State ............. LOWPurpose: Allows setting of the state for the external digital outputs availableon a connector at the back of each PA cage. Up to four digital outputs per PAcage may be connected. The outputs may be used to control external equipmentvia the EAC-2000 remote link. Also, options (1) and (2) support using externalmonitoring equipment to be connected to the EAC-2000.Options:• Allowable entries:(0) LOW(1) LOW IF CRITICAL ALARM EXISTS(2) HIGH IF CRITICAL ALARM EXISTS(3) HIGH• Default: (0) LOWAMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 2-57
Entry:Main Menu ⇒Alarms Menu ⇒Menu:A BOARD OUT-OF-SERVICE ALARM ........ CRITICALB Board ROM Alarm...................... CRITICALC Board Calibration Memory Alarm ........... CRITICALD Serial Data Link Alarm................... CRITICALE Personality Mismatch Alarm ............... CRITICALF Synthesizer Unlocked Alarm ............... CRITICALG RVS PA Pwr Low Alarm ................. CRITICALH RSSI Alarm.......................... LOG ONLYI PA Out-of-Service Alarm ................. CRITICALJ PA Temp - High Alarm ................. LOG ONLYK PA Power - Low Alarm .................. CRITICALL PA to Antenna High Loss Alarm ............ CRITICALM Antenna Ret Loss Alarm.................. CRITICALN ROM Alarm .......................... CRITICALO RAM Alarm .......................... CRITICALP NOVRAM Alarm ....................... CRITICALQ SAT Detector Alarm .................... CRITICALR Power Supply Voltages - Low Alarm ......... CRITICALS External Analog Input Alarm .............. LOG ONLYT External Digital Input - Alarms ............ LOG ONLYPurpose: Displays the alarms of which the EAC-2000 maintains a log. Anyof the alarms can be set to "Log Only" (the EAC-2000 enters the alarm in itslog) or "Critical" (the EAC-2000 logs the alarm and also automatically dials adesignated telephone number to report the alarm). To set an alarm, select theletter in front of the alarm and select the state. (See Volume 2, Section 3.8 foralarm descriptions.) Page 2-58 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)
Entry:Main Menu ⇒Alarms Menu ⇒Menu:A Donor Control Channel RSSI - High Alarm Point DISABLEDB Donor Control Channel RSSI - Low Alarm Point . . -80 dBmC Donor Voice Channel RSSI - High Alarm Point . DISABLEDPurpose: Displays the RSSI signal levels that generate alarms.DONOR CONTROL CHANNEL RSSI - HIGH ALARM POINTEntry:Main Menu ⇒AlarmsMenu ⇒RSSI AlarmsMenu ⇒Purpose: To set the upper level for RSSI reading on the forward controlchannel. If the signal exceeds this level, an alarm is logged.Options:• Allowable range: -100 to -20 dBm• Default: DisabledDONOR CONTROL CHANNEL RSSI - LOW ALARM POINTEntry:Main Menu ⇒AlarmsMenu ⇒RSSI AlarmsMenu ⇒Purpose: To set the lower level for RSSI reading on the forward controlchannel. If the signal falls below this level, an alarm is logged.Options:• Allowable range: -100 to -20 dBm• Default: -80 dBmAMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 2-59
(Continued)DONOR VOICE CHANNEL RSSI - HIGH ALARM POINTEntry:Main Menu ⇒AlarmsMenu ⇒RSSI AlarmsMenu ⇒Purpose: To set the upper level for RSSI reading on the forward voicechannel. If the signal exceeds this level, an alarm is logged.Options:• Allowable range: -100 to -20 dBm• Default: Disabled2.7 Set DefaultsMain Menu ⇒Purpose: To return all parameters to default settings.CAUTION! Using selection E, Set Defaults, will default allparameters, including channels. Be sure to record ALL data beforeinvoking this selection so that parameters may be reentered.Page 2-60 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)
6HFWLRQ 6\VWHP0RQLWRULQJ&RPPDQGV3.1 IntroductionThe EAC-2000 software allows the operator to obtain information on the status andperformance of the system through a variety of simple commands. Each command isentered from the command entry level prompt (>). The following commands are describedin this section of the manual:• SSS (Show System Status) Command • SCS (Show Call Status) Command• RSS (RSSI Report) Command• SSR (Scanned RSSI Report) Command• PWR (PA Power Display) Command• SAT (SAT Report) Command• ALA (Alarm Report) Command• DCS (Display Call Statistics) Command• DCH (Display Call History) Command• TIM (Time Display and Change) Command• MIN (Mobile ID Number) Command• REV (Show Hardware Revisions) Command3.2 SSS (Show System Status) CommandEntry: At the > prompt, enter SSS <CR>.Purpose: Lists a one-page report of selected EAC-2000 operating parameters, along withthe conditions of inputs that are monitored, then returns to the command entry level. Figure3-1 shows a sample SSS report. Items listed in the report are described on the followingpages. AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 3-1
3.2 SSS (Show System Status) Command (Continued)Figure 3-1. Sample SSS Report>SSSBOARD/PA 12345678 91011BD MODE CNTL VOICE STBY STBY STBY SCAN STBY STBY DSABL DSABL DSABLBD TYPE AMPS AMPS AMPS AMPS AMPS AMPS AMPS AMPS NONE NONE NONEDON. CHAN 333 84 63 105 84 329 105 84BOOST CHAN 319 112 133 154 175 105 196 217DON. RSSI -64 -650 <-100 <-100 <-100 <-100 <-100 <-100MOB. RSSI <-120 -87 <-120 <-120 <-120 <-120 <-120 <-120MOB.VMAC 00000000 000ANT. SEL M1 M1/2 M1/2 M1/2 M1/2 M1 M1/2 M1/2 M1/2 M1/2 M1/2RVS PA SET +20 +20 +20 +20 +20 +20 +20 +20 +20 +20 +20RVS PA PWR <0 +21 <0 <0 <0 <0 <0 <0FWD PA MODE KEYED KEYED OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFFFWD PA STEP 0 0 0 0 0000 000FWD PA PWR +46 +46 +0 +0 +0 +0 +0 +0 +0 +0 +0FWD PA TEMP 46 42 40 34 34 34 36 38 0 0 0M1 ANT PWR FWD: +44 REFL: +0Press RETURN when ready for more. . .SUPPLY VOLTAGES +28V +12V +6VAT PA1-6 CAGE: 27.1 12.0 6.0AT PA7-11 CAGE: 27.1 12.0 6.0AT CNTLR BOARD: 12.1 6.0EXT.ANALOG VOLTAGES: XAD1 XAD2 XAD3 XAD4AT PA1-6 CAGE: 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0AT PA7-11 CAGE: 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0EXT. DIGITAL INPUTS: XIN1 XIN2 XIN3 XIN4AT PA1-6 CAGE: LOW LOW LOW LOWAT PA7-11 CAGE: LOW LOW LOW LOWEXT. DIGITAL OUTPUTS XOUT1 XOUT2 XOUT3 XOUT4AT PA1-6 CAGE: LOW LOW LOW LOWAT PA7-11 CAGE: LOW LOW LOW LOWEAC SERIAL NUMBER: SOFTWARE VERSION 20.03Page 3-2 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)
3.2 SSS (Show System Status) Command (Continued)Reported Items:• BD MODE: Operating mode of each IF board (Standby, Control, Voice, Scan, orDisabled).Status IndicatesCNTLVOICESTBYSCAN DSABL Control VoiceStandbyScan (Scanning donor voice channels)Disabled (Board disabled by user, or alarmhas occurred on board)( If a board or PA is disabled, the matching element willnot be used by the system. If a forward PA is out of service dueto an alarm, the associated forward board will be Standby.)• BD TYPE: RF board type as read from the actual hardware. The installed RF boardshave a built-in personality identifier which is read and reported.– Possible board types: JTACS, AMPS or ETACS– NONE=No board is detected, or there is a hardware communication problembetween the RF board and the controller. (The channel display for that boardwill be blank.) • DONOR CHAN: Forward transmit / reverse receive.• BOOST CHAN: Forward transmit / reverse receive (blank if no board is installed).• DONOR RSSI: Current RSSI from donor.• MOBILE RSSI: Current RSSI from mobile.• MOBILE VMAC: Current power level of mobile. 0 = Max power, 1 = 4 dB down,etc.• ANTENNA SEL: Antenna selected via the SET command.• RVS PA SET: Power level setting of the reverse PA.• RVS PA PWR: Power reading of the reverse PA.• FWD PA MODE: "KEYED," "OFF," or "DSABL."AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 3-3
3.2 SSS (Show System Status) Command (Continued)• FWD PA STEP: Power level step (0=maximum power; 1=down 4 dB, etc.).• FWD PA PWR: Power output reading of the forward PA output (ahead of combiner).• FWD PA TEMP: Temperature reading of the PA associated with the board. Ahyphen (-) indicates the PA has no temperature sensor.• M1 ANT PWR: Forward and reflected power readings at the M1 antenna sensor.Represents PA 1–5, 7–11 forward powers after combiner and duplexer loss.• SUPPLY VOLTAGES: +28, +12, and +6 volt supply voltage readings at variousmonitoring points.• EXT. ANALOG VOLTAGES: Voltages at the external alarm/control connector oneach PA cage. Range 0 to 5 volts.• EXT. DIGITAL INPUTS: The state (LOW or HIGH) of the digital inputs on theexternal alarm/control connector. LOW = nothing connected, or less than 2 volts.• EXT. DIGITAL OUTPUTS: State of the digital outputs on the external alarm/controlconnector. LOW = pulled to ground; HIGH = open collector off.Page 3-4 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)
3.3 SCS (Show Call Status) CommandEntry: At the > prompt, enter SCS <CR>.Purpose: Displays a short report of the current status of the RF boards. The system thenpauses but continues to monitor the status. If the status of a board pair changes, a newreport will be displayed. This command is especially useful in monitoring call activity inthe boosted coverage area. Figure 3-2 shows a sample SCS report.Figure 3-2. Sample SCS Report>scsBD STATUS DONOR BOOST MOBILE REASONCHAN CHAN VMAC1 CONTROL 333 319 - VOICE CHANNEL AVAILABLE2 VOICE 84 112 0 MOBILE ORIGINATED CALL MIN=12312312343 STANDBY - - - MOBILE RELEASE DETECTED4 STANDBY - - - MOBILE RSSI < THRESHOLD5 STANDBY - - - MOBILE SAT FADED6 SCAN - - - SYSTEM SETUP7 STANDBY - - - UNSUCCESSFUL SETUP8 STANDBY - - - SYSTEM SETUP9 DISABLED - - - SYSTEM SETUP10 DISABLED - - - SYSTEM SETUP11 DISABLED - - - SYSTEM SETUPCommands to Use During SCS:Command ActionR or rDisplay the board RSSIs.P or pDisplay PA power readings.S or sDisplay board SAT readings.H or hHold screen update (to be used if heavy call activity iscausing information to go by too quickly). Use anykeystroke to resume normal screen updating.T or tTurn time stamp on or off.A or aLists number of handback attempts that have occurredsince call began or, if board is STANDBY, the totalnumber for the least call on that board.Space or <CR> Update screen (even if no status change has occurred).<ESC> or<CTRL> Z Exit the SCS command and return to the > prompt.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 3-5
3.3 SCS (Show Call Status) Command (Continued)Items Listed for Each Board Pair:• STATUS: Current usage of the board: Standby, Control, Voice, or Disabled.- Board 1 is normally used to boost the control channel.- Boards 2-5 and 7-11 are used to boost the voice channels (onstandby when no call is up).- Board 6 is used to scan (sometimes as CNTL).-Disabled means the board or the associated forward PA has beendisabled by the user or because of an alarm.-Pre-voice occurs briefly at the beginning of mobile-originated ormobile-answered calls. This status occurs after the initial mobileaccess or page response on the reverse control channel and lastsuntil the voice channel assignment on the forward control channel.• MOBILE VMAC: Current mobile power setting. Dynamic power controlactions can be monitored by watching this column.- 0 = Maximum power - 7 = Minimum power (-28 dB)• DONOR CHAN: Donor channel: control or voice. This is the input channelof the forward board and the output channel of the reverse board.• BOOST CHAN: Boosted channel: control or voice. This is the outputchannel of the forward board and the input channel of the reverse board.• REASON: Reason for the Status shown. Possible reasons are explained inthe following chart.Page 3-6 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)
3.3 SCS (Show Call Status) Command (Continued)Reason Given For ... Indicates . . .SYSTEM SETUP Status Board status was set at power up, after restore-to-service, or asresult of SET command.MOBILE ORIGINATEDCALLVoice System detected a mobile-originated call.MOBILE ANSWEREDCALLVoice System detected a land-originated call.MOBILE RSSI >THRESHOLDVoice Mobile RSSI exceeded the hand-in threshold.MOBILE RELEASEDETECTEDStandby (whenformerly Voice)Mobile release (1.8 seconds of signaling tone) was detected. MOBILE SAT FADED Standby (whenformerly Voice)Mobile SAT was invalid for the SAT Fade Timeout period. MOBILE RSSI <THRESHOLDStandby (whenformerly Voice)Mobile RSSI receiver fell below the hand-back threshold.DONOR RSSI <THRESHOLDStandby (whenformerly Voice)Signal received from donor by forward receiver fell below donorRSSI threshold.UNSUCCESSFUL SETUP(for RSSI candidates)Standby (whenformerly Voice) EAC-2000 unable to send mobile to boosted voice channel. (Aftera call setup is attempted, a boost path is set up and SAT from themobile is monitored. If SAT does not verify within SAT FadeTimeout, call is ended. This means the mobile did not take hand-offmessage from booster, but remained on donor voice channel. Thisindicates that even though the mobile was identified as a candidatefor boosting, the mobile was still in good contact with its donor cellsite.)SETUP ABORTED Standby (whenformerly Voice)Setup attempt aborted before any hand-off messages were sent tothe mobile. (Occurs occasionally on RSSI > Threshold calls if amobile-originated or -answered call candidate is detected duringsetup process. In this case, the EAC-2000 will abort the RSSI callto handle the mobile-originated or -answered call, which is higherpriority. Normally the RSSI candidate will be reidentified andhandled shortly after the other call is completed.)ALARM DETECTED Disabled Either a board or the associated PA is disabled because of analarm. (More information about a disabled board can be obtainedfrom the ALA command.)VOICE CHANNELSLOADED; VOICECHANNEL AVAILABLEStandby; Control For the CNTL board only, indicates if EAC-2000 channelsavailable. (The cntl board switches to Standby when all voicechannels are loaded only if the Control Channel State During AllChannels Busy parameter is set to OFF. For all other settings ofthe Control Channel State parameter, the CNTL board remainsactive when all voice channels are loaded.)Continued . . .AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 3-7
3.3 SCS (Show Call Status) Command (Continued)Reason Given For ... Indicates . . .NO SERVICE ONDONOR CONTROLCHANNELStandby; Control System data receiver listening to the forward control channel datastream from the donor cell site cannot obtain or maintain wordsynchronization. (The CNTL board switches to Standby when thereis No Service on Donor Control Channel only if the Control ChannelState During All Channels Busy parameter is set to OFF. For allother settings of the Control Channel State parameter, the CNTLboard remains active even if no donor control channel is received.)DEDICATED CONTROLBACKUP Standby (CNTLboard only) Sometimes listed for a short duration after reset, automatic restore-to-service attempt, or switchover from board 6 boosting the controlchannel.CALL TRANSFERRED Standby (CNTLboard only)Voice call being boosted by the CNTL board was transferred to avoice board. (The EAC-2000 CNTL channel always goes throughthis state on a call transfer, but SCS may not show it every timebecause the board switches to CNTL very quickly.)PAGE RESPONSEDETECTEDPre-Voice Mobile-answered call was detected (by monitoring the reversecontrol channel data stream).MOBILE ACCESSDETECTEDPre-Voice Mobile-originated call was detected (by monitoring the reversecontrol channel data stream).FALSE PRELIMINARYSETUPStandby (whenjust previouslyPre-Voice)Although a mobile access or page response was detected, the systemdid not assign a voice channel within 5 seconds. (Could be causedby a busy system. Some false accesses will also be decoded fromnoise. Occasional False Preliminary Setups are no cause forconcern. For more information about why the false preliminarysetup occurred, escape out of SCS and type MIN; the exact reasonwill be given here.)UNSUCCESSFULPRELIMINARY SETUP(Multi-Hop systems only)Standby (whenjust previouslyPre-Voice)EAC-2000 unable to identify boosted channel chosen by theprevious EAC-2000 in the chain. (Could be caused by incorrectchannels entered for the Booster Link Channels on this or theprevious EAC-2000, by interference on the booster link channel, orby the previous EAC-2000 having no voice channels available at thetime of the call or incorrect Multi-Hop Mode parameter setting.)Page 3-8 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)
3.4 RSS (RSSI Report) CommandEntry: At the > prompt, enter RSS. Purpose: Repeatedly lists the mobile RSSI readings on the installed boards (a headerfollowed by a continuously updated display of the RSSI readings). To stop the display andreturn to the > prompt, hit ESC or <CTRL> Z. Figure 3-3 shows a sample list of RSSIreadings. To display the donor RSSI readings, enter RSS D at the > prompt.Figure 3-3. Sample List of RSSI Readings>rssBOARD/PA 1 2 3 4567891011MOBILE RSSI <-120 -87 <-120 <-120 <-120 <-120 <-120 <-120<ESCAPE>>rss dBOARD/PA 1 2 3 4567891011DONOR RSSI -64 -65 <-100 <-100 <-100 <-100 <-100 <-100<ESCAPE>Mobile RSSI reflects the signal strength being received from the mobile at the M1 or M2antenna connector; report range is -120 to -20 dBm. • Mobile RSSI for the board boosting the control channel (defaults to board 1) will mostoften indicate <-120, since mobile transmissions on the reverse control channel arevery brief (about 100 milliseconds). • Mobile RSSI for boards involved in a call will vary according to the subscriberlocation. • Mobile RSSI for board 6 will vary as the board is used to scan channels. • Mobile RSSI for standby or disabled boards will indicate <-120. • Mobile RSSI for positions with no board installed will be blank.Donor RSSI reflects the signal strength being received from the donor as measured at theD1 antenna connector; report range is -100 to -20 dBm. • Donor RSSI for the board boosting the control channel (defaults to board 1) shouldbe steady and greater than -75 dBm (minimum signal level required from the donor).• Donor RSSI for boards involved in a call should be steady and within a few dB of thedonor RSSI on the control channel. Sometime during the last 5 seconds of a call, thesignal level will drop to <-100. Donor RSSI for board should show <-100, unlessboard 6 is boosting the control channel. • Donor RSSI for standby or disabled boards will indicate <-100. • Donor RSSI for positions with no board installed will be blank.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 3-9
3.5 SSR (Show Scanned Report) CommandEntry: At the > prompt, enter SSR <CR>, or SSR followed by a channel number.Purpose: Repeatedly lists the averaged reverse RSSI readings on the donor voice channelsas measured at the M1 or M2 antenna using board 6. Readings for 15 channels are shown;if no channel number is entered with the SSR command, then the 15 lowest channels in thelist are displayed. If a channel is specified with SSR, then the 15 channels in the list equalto or greater than that are displayed. (It is not required that a channel in the list be enteredto cause display of higher channels.)Most often, the RSSI displayed is from mobiles in the donor area. Strong signals indicatemobiles that are approaching the EAC-2000.In certain cases, the RSSI on a channel may be strong, but the EAC-2000 does not attemptto hand the candidate in. SSR precedes the RSSI with * or L to indicate channels that arenot currently being considered for hand-in:•A * that shows steady for 10 seconds, then disappears briefly, then is steady foranother 10 seconds, and so on, indicates that the signal on the channel has RSSI abovethe Hand-in Threshold, but incorrect SAT.• A steady * indicates the channel is one of the donor channels being boosted. In thiscase, SSR continues to display the RSSI being received on the channel, but the signalis coming from the EAC-2000 board boosting the call, not the mobile. (The mobilehas been switched to the boosted voice channel.)• If a channel has good RSSI and good SAT, but the mobile does not take the hand-inmessage (i.e., the EAC-2000 does repeated unsuccessful setups on the channel), thenthe SSR display will show no * briefly. When the * appears, it is because hand-in hasbeen attempted. Typically, the RSSI will increase also, since there will be a boardactively trying to boost the channel. After SAT Fade Timeout, the board will drop theboost, and the SSR displayed RSSI for the channel will drop, but the * will continueto display for the Delay Between Hand-in Attempts duration, after which the wholecycle will repeat.• If SSR displays the RSSI with L preceding it, the channel is currently occupied by themodem mobile. In this case, the displayed RSSI is from the modem mobile astransmitted at the mobile antenna and received at the M1 or M2 antenna. Since themobile transmit power is known, the isolation can be computed. Example: Suppose the Modem Mobile Power Step is set to 4, and SSR shows -35 dBm onthe designated channel. Then, the mobile to M1 or M2 antenna isolationwould be +34 (max Power) - 16 (step 4 => 16 dB down) + 35 = 53 dB.Page 3-10 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)
3.5 SSR (Show Scanned Report) Command (Continued) VERY IMPORTANT: The SSR reported for a channel that is currently beingboosted by the EAC-2000 can be used to compute the isolation from the donorantenna to the antenna being used for board 6 (M1 or M2 as chosen in SET) in themobile transmit band. Example:(1) The Reverse PA Power Set is +20 dBm (the default).(2) The Diversity parameter for board 6 is set to M1 (the default).(3) SCS shows a call up with donor channel 300.(4) SSR indicates -55 for channel 300.In this case, the EAC-2000 would be transmitting channel 300 with +20 dBmon the D1 antenna. Board 6 would continue to scan the channel and receive -55 dBm at the M1 antenna.The isolation on channel 300 would simply be the difference between +20 dBmand -55 dBm, or 75 db. Not that this shows the isolation on a single channelin the mobile transmit band only. A adequate reading is no guarantee that theisolation meets the specified minimum across the band and in the mobile receiveband. Use the following chart as a guide to see the strongest RSSI reading that should bedisplayed by SSR for channels being boosted. If stronger (i.e., lower) RSSIs occur,then the isolation is less than 75 db.Reverse PAPower Set Max SSR Displayed RSSI During Callfor Isolation > 75 dB+20 dBm+15 dBm+10 dBm +5 dBm-55-60-65-70AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 3-11
3.6 PWR (PA Power Display) CommandEntry: At the > prompt, enter PWR <CR>, or PWR X <CR> where X is 1–6 indicatingthe display option desired.Purpose: Mainly, PWR allows the user to continuously monitor the forward PA power.Also, PWR allows continuous monitoring of other PA parameters by choosing options 2–6.Each of the PWR options causes a selected SSS display line to be displayed on acontinuously updated basis. The information has the same meaning as with SSS. Figure 3-4shows a sample list of power readings.Figure 3-4. Sample List of Power Readings>pwrOPTIONS: 1-FWD PA PWR; 2-FWD TEMP; 3-FWD MODE; 4-FWD STEP5-RVS PA PWR; 6-MOBILE VMAC... ENTER CHOICE: (1-6): 1BOARD/PA 1 234567891011FWD PA PWR +46 +46 +0 +0 +0 +0 +0 +0 +0 +0 +0<ESCAPE>NOTE: PWR can be used to see the forward dynamic power control algorithm in action.The controlled parameter (FWD PA STEP), and two of the three controlling inputs (FWDPA TEMP and MOBILE VMAC) can be viewed. The third controlling input is the +28 VoltSupply Voltage reading.Page 3-12 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)
3.7 SAT (SAT Report) CommandEntry: At the > prompt, enter SAT <CR>.Purpose: Repeatedly lists the SAT readings on the boards (displays a header followed bya continuously updated display of the SAT readings for all boards). Figure 3-5 shows asample list of SAT readings.Figure 3-5. Sample List of SAT Readings>satBOARD/PA 1234567891011DONOR SAT XXXX 6000 XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXXMOBILE SAT XXXX 6000 XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX<ESCAPE>• Displayed values: - 5970, 6000, or 6030 = Valid SAT tone detected.- XXXX = Valid SAT tone not detected. (May indicate the board is being usedfor control channel boost or that a call is not currently up on the board. • To stop the display and return to the > prompt, hit ESC or <CTRL> Z.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 3-13
3.8 ALA (Alarm Report) CommandEntry: At the > prompt, enter ALA <CR>.Purpose: Displays a one-page report of the number of times various alarm conditions haveoccurred since the last system reset, then returns to the > prompt. Figure 3-6 shows asample ALA report. Reported alarms are described on the following pages.• Counts stop at 255.• All counts are zeroed after a power reset or a RES command. Counts may be zeroedby entering ALA =0.•Alarm log rate: Some alarms are checked as often as five times a second. toprevent a single alarm condition from running up the count, a given alarm is loggedat most one time in 10 minutes. The alarm counts may be interpreted as the numberof 10-minute intervals in which the alarm occurred.There are two exceptions to this: the board and PA Out of Service alarms, which arereally not logs at all, but reflect the current condition of the board or PA.•Automatic Restore to Service: If an alarm condition causes a board or PA to betaken out of service, the system will continue to process calls using available boardsand PAs until no calls are up. At that time, the controller will attempt to restore out-of-service boards to service by resetting the boards.After the boards reset, the controller power-on diagnostics are run on all boards andPAs. These diagnostics check for all alarms that may cause a board or PA to be outof service, and if an alarm of that type occurs, the board or PA remains out of service.If a board or PA fails to come back in service, the controller repeatedly tries to restoreboards or PAs to service (during times when no calls are up) up to 10 times, the last7 of which are spaced apart at least 1 hour. Note that regardless of whether the boardor PA comes back in service, the original alarm that caused the problem is stillmaintained in the log. Except for the Out of Service alarms, the only way alarms willbe zeroed is with ALA=0 or a system reset.Page 3-14 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)
Figure 3-6. Sample ALA Report>alaRF BOARD ALARMS RECORDED. . .BOARD #: 1234567891011BOARD OUT-OF-SERVICE ALARM 00000000000BOARD ROM ALARM 00000000000BOARD CALIBRATION MEMORY ALARM 00000000000SERIAL DATA LINK ALARM 00000000000PERSONALITY MISMATCH ALARM 00000000000SYNTHESIZER UNLOCK ALARM 00000000000RVS PA PWR LOW ALARM 00000000000DONOR RSSI HIGH ALARM - CNTL CHAN 0DONOR RSSI LOW ALARM - CNTL CHAN 0DONOR RSSI HIGH ALARM - VOICE CHAN 00000000000MOBILE RSSI HIGH ALARM - VOICE CHAN 00000000000PA ALARMS RECORDED. . .PA #: 1234567891011PA OUT-OF-SERVICE ALARM 00000000000PA TEMP HIGH ALARM 00000000000PA POWER LOW ALARM 00000000000PA TO ANTENNA HIGH LOSS ALARM 00000000000Press RETURN when ready for more...M1 ANTENNA RET LOSS ALARM ................0CNTLR BOARD ALARMS RECORDED...ROM ALARM.................................0RAM ALARM.................................0NOVRAM ALARM..............................0SAT DETECTOR #1 ALARM.....................0SAT DETECTOR #2 ALARM.....................0SUPPLY VOLTAGE ALARMS: +28V +12V +6VAT PA1–6 CAGE: 0 0 0AT PA7–11 CAGE: 0 0 0AT CNTLR BOARD: 0 0EXT. ANALOG ALARMS: XAD1 XAD2 XAD3 XAD4AT PA1–6 CAGE: 0 0 0 0AT PA7–11 CAGE: 0 0 0 0EXT. DIGITAL ALARMS: XIN1 XIN2 XIN3 XIN4AT PA1–6 CAGE: 0 0 0 0AT PA7–11 CAGE: 0 0 0 0Alarms Reported for Each Board: • BOARD OUT-OF-SERVICE ALARM: Board currently out of service due to a BoardROM alarm, Board Calibration Memory alarm, Synthesizer Unlock alarm, or RVS PAPwr Low alarm. A call being boosted with that board will be dropped; however, othercalls will continue. The system will continue to set up and boost calls using availableboards until no calls are up, at which time the controller will attempt to restore theout-of-service board by resetting all boards. Boards that have been returned to servicewill not show a Board Out-of-Service alarm.• BOARD ROM ALARM: Problem in the RF board read only memory. Checked forat power-up or restore-to-service by the RF board controller by computing a checksumand comparing to a store checksum. Causes board to be taken out of service.• BOARD CALIBRATION MEMORY ALARM: Problem with the RF boardnonvolatile memory, which is used to store calibration data for RSSI reporting, reversePA power level set and reporting, etc. Checking is performed by the RF boardcontroller by computing a checksum and comparing to stored checksum. Checked forat power-up or restore-to-service attempts. Causes board to be taken out of service.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 3-15
3.8 ALA (Alarm Report) Command (Continued)• SERIAL DATA LINK ALARM: Problem in serial link between controller board andRF board(s). This alarm is checked on each message received from the RF boards.If all installed boards have pegged counts, a problem on the controller board or theback plane is likely. If only one board has alarms, that board alone is suspect. If thisalarm occurs, the board is taken out of service.• PERSONALITY MISMATCH ALARM: Wrong type of board installed in a slot (e.g.,a JTACS board in an AMPS EAC-2000). Checked for at power-up and restore-to-service attempts. Causes board to be taken out of service.• SYNTHESIZER UNLOCKED ALARM: Unlocked synthesizer. Synthesizer lock ismonitored continuously. Causes board to be taken out of service.• RVS PWR LOW ALARM: The RVS PA Power reading reached or fell below theReverse PA Power Low Alarm Point (- Voice or - Control, as appropriate).- For voice boards, checked at power-up, restore-to-service attempts, and once perminute when a call is up. Mobile RSSI must be at least -100 dBm and thealarm condition must persist for at least 1 second for this alarm to log on avoice board. Always causes voice board to be taken out of service.- For the cntl board (and also for board 6 when it is active as cntl), checked atpower-up, restore-to-service attempts, and once every 10 minutes duringoperation during the next reverse control channel transmission.Causes the cntl board to be taken out of service if the Backup Control Channeloption is enabled; otherwise, the cntl board is left active and the alarm is justlogged.• DONOR RSSI HIGH ALARM - CNTL CHAN: RSSI on CNTL board above theDonor Cntl Chan RSSI High Alarm Point parameter.• DONOR RSSI LOW ALARM CNTL CHAN: RSSI on CNTL board below the DonorCntl Chan RSSI Low Alarm Point parameter.• DONOR RSSI HIGH ALARM - VOICE CHANNEL: Donor RSSI on board abovethe Donor Voice Channel RSSI - High Alarm Point during a call. The alarmcondition must persist for 1 second before an alarm is logged.• MOBILE RSSI HIGH ALARM - VOICE CHANNEL: RSSI from mobile above theMobile Dynamic Power Control Threshold even after mobile has been powered backto step 7 (i.e., minimum power). Indicates mobiles were operating very close to EAC-2000. The alarm condition must persist for 1 second before an alarm is logged.Page 3-16 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)
3.8 ALA (Alarm Report) Command (Continued)Alarms Reported for Each Power Amplifier:• PA OUT-OF-SERVICE ALARM: PA currently out of service due to PA Power Lowalarm. • PA TEMP HIGH ALARM: PA temperature above the PA Temperature High AlarmPoint parameter. The alarm condition must persist for 5 seconds before an alarm islogged.• PA POWER LOW ALARM: PA output power equal to or below the PA Power LowAlarm Point parameter. - For CNTL PA and for PA 6 when it is active as CNTL, checked at power-up,restore-to-service attempts, and once per minute thereafter. The alarm conditionmust persist for at least 3 seconds before an alarm is logged. Causes the CNTLPA to be taken out of service if the Backup Control Channel option is enabled;otherwise, the CNTL PA is left active and the alarm is just logged.- For Voice PAs, the alarm is checked continuously during a call but will onlylog if the signal being received from the donor exceeds -80 dBm. The lowpower condition must persist for 3 seconds for an alarm to be logged. A loggedalarm will cause the PA to be taken out of service.- For PA 6, the alarm is checked during the brief interval the PA is used to setup a call.A PA POWER LOW ALARM may be accompanied by or caused by a tripped PA dcbreaker. Refer to Appendix A, Section A.15.4, before resetting a tripped PA dcbreaker.• PA TO ANTENNA HIGH LOSS ALARM: Loss from forward PA to M2 (for PA6) or M1 (for all others) was measured to be equal or greater than the PA to AntennaHigh Loss Alarm Point.This indicates a problem with the combiner, duplexer, or cabling. A mistunedcombiner cavity will cause these alarms. Note: Check the connectors in the PA cage;sometimes, if not properly aligned, plugging in PAs will push the RF connector outof the housing.This alarm is checked for at power-on, restore-to-service attempts, and once per hourduring operation. The alarm condition must persist for 2 seconds before an alarm islogged. Because the test requires that one PA at a time be keyed, the test is onlyconducted when no calls are up. If a new call is detected, the test is aborted. Eachnondisabled board/PA is individually keyed, and the PA power reading is comparedto the M2 (for board 6) or M1 (for all others) forward power reading.If the PA power minus the antenna power is equal or greater than the threshold, analarm is logged. This alarm does not cause out-of-service on board or PA.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 3-17
3.8 ALA (Alarm Report) Command (Continued)System Alarm Conditions Reported:• ROM ALARM: Problem in Read Only Memory. (Checked at power-up bycomputing a ROM checksum and comparing it with a stored checksum.)• RAM ALARM: Problem in Random Access Memory. (Checked at power-up bywriting distinguishable patterns to the entire external RAM and then checking forthem. The ability to write all bits (both high and low) and non-shorted address linesis checked.)• NOVRAM ALARM: Problem in Nonvolatile Memory. (Checked at power-up bylooking for several "signature bytes" which indicate if data have ever been written andif gross memory loss has occurred. If a signature cannot be found, the system triesto write the defaults and the signature to the NOVRAM.) Alarm readings:0 = No problems.1 = Signature not found, but system was able to write it successfully. (Alloperating parameters will revert to their default values.) Softwareupgrades usually result in this reading, since different versions employdifferent signatures. Repeated occurrence indicates an intermittentNOVRAM. 2 = Signature not found; system could not write the signature. Indicatesfaulty NOVRAM circuitry. • SAT DETECTOR #1 AND #2 ALARMS: Problem with the SAT detection circuitryon the controller board, specifically, that the SAT PLL free running frequency cannotbe adjusted to the desired point. SAT detector #1 is used for boards 1–6; #2 is usedfor boards 7–11. Most likely, this will cause calls on the associated boards to bedropped due to SAT Fade or Unsuccessful Setup. The direct symptoms can betemporarily bypassed by setting the SAT Fade Time-out to 250 seconds, which wouldallow a call to be boosted at least that long.• SUPPLY VOLTAGE ALARMS: The +28, +12, or +6 Volt supply went below theassociated Low Alarm Point. The voltages are monitored at the controller board, atPA 1–6 cage, and at PA 7–11 cage (if installed). A monitored supply voltage pointmust be in the alarm condition for at least 5 seconds before an alarm is logged.Shorter duration dips below the alarm points are ignored.- The +12 and +6 Volt alarms indicate problems with the associated dc-dcconverter in the regulator module (which plugs into the back of the card cage)if they occur at all monitoring points, and/or problem with the powerdistribution wires or connectors if they occur at a single monitoring point.Page 3-18 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)
3.8 ALA (Alarm Report) Command (Continued)- The +28 Volt alarm may indicate several things, depending upon how the +28Volt Supply - Low Alarm Point is set. The +28 volts is supplied by the largeswitching power supplies in the bottom of the cabinet. If external batteries areconnected, they are parallel with the outputs of the switching supplies. If acpower is lost, the reading indicates the battery voltage, which drops accordingto battery capacity and EAC-2000 call activity.The +28V alarm point may be set close to +28 volts; in this case, a +28 voltalarm will be logged very quickly after c power is lost. The alarm point maybe set lower, depending upon the particular battery voltage to remainingcapacity relationship. In this case, the alarm will not be logged for shortduration ac power outages, but will be logged when battery discharge isimminent. If the +28 Volt alarm point is set equal to the +28 Volt Supply - PAPower Cutback Point, the +28 Volt alarm will also indicate that the PAs werepowered back due to low supply voltage.• EXT. ANALOG ALARMS: Indicates the number of times the voltage on the generalpurpose analog input has gone above or below the threshold specified in the Ext.Analog Input Alarm State parameter. An external analog input alarm condition mustpersist for at least 1 second before an alarm is logged. Shorter durations are ignored.• EXT. DIGITAL ALARMS: Indicates the number of times the input has been differentfrom the Ext. Digital Input Alarm State parameter if enabled. An external digitalinput alarm condition must persist for at least 1 second before an alarm is logged.Shorter durations are ignored.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 3-19
3.9 DCS (Display Call Statistics) CommandEntry: At the > prompt, enter DCS <CR>.Purpose: Lists the total number and duration of calls handled per board. • Separate totals are given according to reasons for call setup or termination.• Statistics continue to accumulate indefinitely unless zeroed. (Statistics may be zeroedby entering DCS=0. Figure 3-7 shows a sample DCS report. Listed statistics are described below. Statistics Listed:• NUMBER OF CALLS HANDLED - MOBILE ORIGINATED: Number of callshandled by the EAC-2000 that were set up because a mobile in the boosted coveragearea placed a call. (These calls are processed through the boosted control channel; thebooster identifies the mobile as a candidate for boosting by monitoring the datastreams.)• NUMBER OF CALLS HANDLED - MOBILE ANSWERED: Number of callshandled by the EAC-2000 that were set up because a mobile in the boosted coveragearea answered a call. (These calls are processed through the boosted control channel;the booster identifies the mobile as a candidate for boosting by monitoring datastreams.)• NUMBER OF CALLS INITIATED - MOBILE RSSI > THRESH: Number of callshandled by the EAC-2000 that were set up because a mobile with a call up directlywith the donor drove into the boosted coverage area. (The EAC-2000 identifies themobile as a candidate for boosting because the RSSI on one of the channels in thedonor voice channels lists goes above the hand-in threshold.)• CALL TIME - MOBILE ORIGINATED: Total duration of all calls handled that wereoriginated by a mobile in the booster coverage area. (In minutes, accurate to 1minute.)• CALL TIME - MOBILE ANSWERED: Total duration of all calls handled that wereanswered by a mobile in the booster coverage area. (In minutes, accurate to 1minute.) • CALL TIME - MOBILE RSSI > THRESH: Total duration of all calls handled thatwere answered by a mobile in the booster coverage area. (In minutes, accurate to 1minute.)Page 3-20 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)
Figure 3-7. Sample DCS Report>dcsEXTEND-A-CELL CALL STATISTICS - SINCE *** 00-00-00 00:00:00 SCREEN 1 NUMBER OF CALLS HANDLED MOBILE MOBILE MOBILE TOTAL ORIG ANSWER RSSI>THRESHBD 1 0 0 0 0BD 2 3 5 1 9BD 3 0 0 0 0BD 4 0 0 0 0BD 5 0 0 0 0BD 7 0 0 0 0BD 8 0 0 0 0BD 9 0 0 0 0BD 10 0 0 0 0BD 11 0 0 0 0TOTAL 3 5 1 9Press RETURN when ready for more. .EXTEND-A-CELL CALL STATISTICS - SINCE *** 00-00-00 00:00:00 SCREEN 2 CALL TIME (MINUTES) MOBILE MOBILE MOBILE TOTAL AVERAGE ORIG ANSWER RSSI>THRESHBD 1 0 0 0 0 0.0BD 2 2 3 4 10 1.1BD 3 0 0 0 0 0.0BD 4 0 0 0 0 0.0BD 5 0 0 0 0 0.0BD 7 0 0 0 0 0.0BD 8 0 0 0 0 0.0BD 9 0 0 0 0 0.0BD 10 0 0 0 0 0.0BD 11 0 0 0 0 0.0TOTAL 2 3 4 10 1.1AVERAGE 0.9 0.6 4.3 1.1Press RETURN when ready for more . .EXTEND-A-CELL CALL STATISTICS - SINCE *** 00-00-00 00:00:00 SCREEN 3 NUMBER OF CALL TERMINATED MOBILE MOBILE MOBILE DONOR TOTAL RELEASE SAT FADE RSSI<THRESH RSSI<THRESHBD 1 0 0 0 0 0BD 2 6 0 2 1 9BD 3 0 0 0 0 0BD 4 0 0 0 0 0BD 5 0 0 0 0 0BD 7 0 0 0 0 0BD 8 0 0 0 0 0BD 9 0 0 0 0 0BD 10 0 0 0 0 0BD 11 0 0 0 0 0TOTAL 6 0 2 1 9Press RETURN when ready for more . .AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 3-21
Figure 3-7. Sample DCS Report (Continued)EXTEND-A-CELL CALL STATISTICS - SINCE *** 00-00-00 00:00:00 SCREEN 4 NUMBER OF CALLS -- UNSUCCESSFUL SETUP -- SHORT ORIG+ANSW RSSI>THRESH DURATIONBD 1 1 0 0BD 2 2 2 0BD 3 0 0 0BD 4 0 0 0BD 5 0 0 0BD 7 0 0 0BD 8 0 0 0BD 9 0 0 0BD 10 0 0 0BD 11 0 0 0TOTAL 3 2 0Press RETURN when ready for more . .EXTEND-A-CELL CALL STATISTICS - SINCE *** 00-00-00 00:00:00 SCREEN 5 NUMBER OF UNSUCCESSFUL ACCESS ATTEMPTS:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 EAC MULTI-HOP SIGNALING FAILED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 DONOR DENIED ACCESS TO CONTROL CHANNEL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 DONOR ISSUED NO RESPONSE MESSAGE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 DONOR ISSUED DIRECTED RETRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 DONOR ISSUED REORDER OR INTERCEPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 DONOR ISSUED RELEASE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0NUMBER OF CALL ATTEMPTS WHILE BUSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0NUMBER OF TIMES ALL EAC CHANNELS BUSY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5TIME ALL EAC CHANNELS BUSY (MINUTES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37NUMBER OF CALLS TRANSFERRED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0NUMBER OF HANDBACK GRABBACK ATTEMPTS THAT CONTINUED ON EAC . . . . . . . .19NUMBER OF DYNAMIC POWER CONTROL ACTIONS (POWER DECREASES) . . . . . . . .12NUMBER OF DYNAMIC POWER CONTROL ACTIONS (POWER INCREASES). . . . . . . . . 1LAST EAC RESET THU 10-28-93 16:53:33• NUMBER OF CALLS TERMINATED - MOBILE RELEASE DETECTED: Numberof calls terminated because mobile release was detected by the EAC-2000. Mobilerelease occurs if the mobile or land user hangs up. (Most calls should end becauseof mobile release, but some releases will be missed, especially in weak signalconditions. If release is missed or ignored, one of the other termination mechanismsshould end the call.)• NUMBER OF CALLS TERMINATED - MOBILE SAT FADED: Number of callsterminated because the SAT received by the EAC-2000 from the mobile was incorrectfor the SAT Fade Timeout period. (Usually indicates that the mobile drove out ofrange of the booster and could not be handed back to the donor cell. Excessiveterminations of this type will occur if mobile release is consistently missed.) • NUMBER OF CALLS TERMINATED - MOBILE RSSI < THRESH: Number ofcalls terminated because the RSSI from the mobile fell below the hand-back threshold,and the EAC-2000 was able to hand the mobile back to the donor. Page 3-22 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)
3.9 DCS (Display Call Statistics) Command (Continued)• NUMBER OF CALLS TERMINATED - DONOR RSSI < THRESH: Number ofcalls terminated because the signal being received from the donor fell below the donorRSSI threshold for 2 seconds. • NUMBER OF UNSUCCESSFUL SETUPS - ORIG+ANSW: Indicates that themobile never arrives on the assigned voice channel. High numbers of these, alongwith high numbers of SAT fades, indicate a problem with the mobile-to-booster pathor the board.• NUMBER OF UNSUCCESSFUL SETUPS - RSSI>THRESH: Number of times theEAC-2000 tried to set up a mobile that was detected as having strong RSSI, but themobile did not take the hand-off message. (This does not mean that the call ended,but merely that the donor cell continued to handle the call.)• Too many of this type for all boards may indicate one of the following: - Hand-in threshold too low.- Antennas facing the boosted coverage area also cover a significant portionof the donor cell coverage area. (This will cause the booster to falselyidentify mobiles as candidates for boosting when they are in good contactwith the donor cell.)- Intermod signal (with correct SAT) of sufficient strength on one of thechannels in the donor voice channel list.• Too many for one board, and not others, indicates a problem with that board. • NUMBER OF CALLS OF SHORT DURATION: Number of calls that lasted lessthan 10 seconds. A large number for all boards may indicate a coverage area overlap.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 3-23
3.9 DCS (Display Call Statistics) Command (Continued)• NUMBER OF UNSUCCESSFUL ACCESS ATTEMPTS: Number of call setups thatwere unsuccessful because the donor cell site did not assign a voice channel to thecandidate.– EAC MULTI-HOP SIGNALING FAILED: Only applies when Modes 3 and4 are selected in Multi-Hop Feature.– DONOR DENIED ACCESS TO CONTROL CHANNEL: Donor does notproperly manipulate B/I bit.– DONOR ISSUED NO RESPONSE MESSAGE: Access was successful, butdonor ignored.– DONOR ISSUED DIRECTED RETRY: Usually indicates that the donor isbusy.– DONOR ISSUED REORDER OR INTERCEPT: Usually indicates that thedonor is busy.– DONOR ISSUED RELEASE: Possible indication that the mobile is deniedservice due to authentication failure, but varies from system to system.• NUMBER OF CALL ATTEMPTS WHILE BUSY: The number of accesses that wereattempted in the EAC-2000 coverage area while all channels were busy. This statisticcan only be logged if the Control Channel State During All Channels Busy parameteris set to BOOST ACCESSES, DENY ACCESSES BUT COUNT, or DIRECTEDRETRY. If set to OFF or DENY ACCESSES, accesses will not occur during all busy(so they cannot be counted).• NUMBER OF TIMES ALL EAC CHANNELS BUSY: Number of times that the lastavailable board was used to set up a call, causing the EAC-2000 to be fully loaded.(See note on next page.) • TIME ALL CHANNELS BUSY (MINUTES): Total time that all available boardswere being used to boost calls. (See note on next page.) • NUMBER OF CALLS TRANSFERRED (Revertive Control Channel Option only):Number of calls initially handled by the control channel equipment and subsequentlytransferred to voice channel equipment.Page 3-24 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)
3.9 DCS (Display Call Statistics) Command (Continued) If this option is enabled, some calls will be handled by the controlchannel equipment initially. Calls that are transferred to (normal) voicechannel boards will be logged completely on that board (i.e., thestatistics will log as if the call were initially handled on the voice pair).If a call is handled initially on the control channel and ends withoutbeing transferred, the statistics are logged on the control channel board.If the Revertive Control Channel Option is enabled—• NUMBER OF TIMES ALL CHANNELS BUSY: Number ofcalls initially handled by the control channel equipment. ("Allbusy" in this case is defined as "all available voice channels busy"+ "control channel boosting a voice call.")• TIME ALL CHANNELS BUSY: Time the control channelequipment was being used to boost a voice call.• NUMBER OF CALLS HANDLED by the control channel board,the NUMBER OF CALLS TRANSFERRED, and the NUMBEROF TIMES ALL CHANNELS BUSY will not add up as might beexpected because some calls handled on the control channelequipment may be detected as UNSUCCESSFUL SETUPS.• NUMBER OF HANDBACK GRABBACK ATTEMPTS THAT CONTINUED ONEAC: During a call, if a mobile's RSSI falls below the Handback Threshold, ahandback/grabback will be performed. The mobile is handed back to the donor voicechannel, then another handback message is sent in competition with the signal fromthe donor. This second handback message is referred to as the grabback. If the donorsignal is stronger, the mobile will remain on the donor channel; the call will end onthe EAC-2000 and be logged in the MOBILE RSSI < THRESHOLD call terminatecategory. Of the EAC-2000 signal is stronger, the mobile will take the grabback; thecall will continue on the EAC-2000 and a statistic will be logged here. A single callmay result in several occurrences of this statistic.High numbers of this statistic (i.e., 2 to 3 times the total number of calls) indicatesthat the EAC-2000 is doing more handback/grabbacks than is needed. This can bereduced by decreasing the Handback Threshold, decreasing the Maximum Number ofHandback Attempts Per Call, or increasing the Minimum Delay Between HandbackAttempts.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 3-25
3.9 DCS (Display Call Statistics) Command (Continued)• NUMBER OF DYNAMIC POWER CONTROL ACTIONS (POWER DECREASES):Number of times a mobile's power level was decreased because it was too close to thebooster. (Too many decreases could indicate that the Mobile Dynamic Power Controlparameter is set too low.)• NUMBER OF DYNAMIC POWER CONTROL ACTIONS (POWER INCREASES):Number of times a mobile's power level was increased after previously having beendecreased. (Too many power increases and decreases may indicate that there is notenough difference between the Mobile Dynamic Power Control Threshold and thethreshold that triggers power increase (hand-back threshold).• LAST EAC RESET: Date and time of last reset. (If ALA=0 has not been entered,this indicates how long the alarm counts reported in ALA have been accumulating.)NOTE: A new EAC-2000 will show some amount of call activity in the DCS andDCH reports. This represents the results of factory burn-in testing. Enter DCS=0/ and DCH=0/ to clear these out.Page 3-26 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)
3.10 DCH (Display Call History) CommandEntry: At the > prompt, enter DCH <CR>.Purpose: To display incremental totals of certain call statistics. Figure 3-8 shows a sampleDCH report.• Totals are computed each hour and maintained in a week-long record. For the callhistory to be correct, the time must be accurate. NUMBER OF CALLS HANDLED listed for MON 5 is the totalnumber of calls initiated for one hour on Monday, between 5:00 a.m. and 5:59a.m. The entry for MON 22-4 includes calls between Monday 10:00 p.m. andTuesday 4:59 a.m.• DCH statistics are maintained in nonvolatile memory (i.e., a temporary power outageor a RES command will not destroy the week's history).• To zero the statistics (all except the totals, which accumulate indefinitely), enterDCH=0.NOTE: A new EAC-2000 will show some amount of call activity in the DCS andDCH reports. This represents the results of factory burn-in testing. Enter DCS=0/ and DCH=0/ to clear these out.Statistics Displayed:• TOTAL SYSTEM RUN TIME (HOURS): Number of hours the system (or at leastthe controller board) has been running. After being zeroed at the factory, this statisticaccumulates indefinitely.• TOTAL NUMBER OF CALLS HANDLED BY SYSTEM: Number of calls handledby the system (accumulates indefinitely).• TOTAL CALL TIME HANDLED BY THE SYSTEM (MINUTES): Number of callminutes boosted by the system (accumulates indefinitely).• NUMBER OF CALLS HANDLED: Number of calls initiated during the hour for allboard pairs for all reasons. • CALL TIME: Number of call minutes handled by the booster during the hour. (Ifnine boards are available for boosting, the total available call minutes during an houris 9 x 60 = 540.)AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 3-27
Figure 3-8. Sample DCH Report>dchTOTAL EAC RUN TIME (HOURS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5TOTAL NUMBER OF CALLS HANDLED BY EAC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9TOTAL CALL TIME HANDLED BY EAC (MINUTES). . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Press RETURN when ready for more . .EXTEND-A-CELL HOURLY CALL HISTORY NUMBER OF CALLS HANDLED BY EAC5678910111213141516171819202122-4MON000000000000000000TUE000000000000000000WED000000000000000000THU000000000000000000FRI000000000000000000SAT000000000000000000SUN000000000000000000CALL TIME HANDLED BY EAC (MINUTES)5678910111213141516171819202122-4MON000000000000000000TUE000000000000000000WED000000000000000000THU000000000000000000FRI000000000000000000SAT000000000000000000SUN000000000000000000Press RETURN when ready for more . .NUMBER OF CALL ATTEMPTS WHILE ALL CHANNELS BUSY5678910111213141516171819202122-4MON000000000000000000TUE000000000000000000WED000000000000000000THU000000000000000000FRI000000000000000000SAT000000000000000000SUN000000000000000000TIME ALL EAC CHANNELS BUSY (MINUTES)5678910111213141516171819202122-4MON000000000000000000TUE000000000000000000WED000000000000000000THU000000000000000000FRI000000000000000000SAT000000000000000000SUN000000000000000000• NUMBER OF CALL ATTEMPTS WHILE BUSY: The number of accesses that weredetected in the EAC-2000 coverage area while all channels were busy. The hourlyrecord is shown for this if the Control Channel State During All Channels Busyparameter is set to BOOST ACCESSES, DENY ACCESSES BUT COUNT, orDIRECTED RETRY.• NUMBER OF TIMES ALL CHANNELS BUSY: (Displayed if the Control ChannelState During All Channels Busy is set to OFF or DENY ACCESS, because for thosesettings, accesses do not occur.) Indicates the number of times that the last availableboard was used to set up a call during the hour, causing the EAC-2000 to be fullyloaded.• TIME ALL CHANNELS BUSY: Total time (in minutes) that all available boards werebeing used to boost a call during the hour.Page 3-28 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)
3.11 TIM (Time Display and Change) CommandEntry: From the > prompt, enter TIM <CR>.Purpose: To display and change the time and date on the EAC-2000 clock. The EAC-2000uses this clock to determine (1) when to update the incremental statistics kept for the DCHcommand and (2) which records to update. The clock circuitry is located on the controller board. The clock has lithium battery backupwith 10 years minimum battery life. Accuracy is ±1 minute at 25oC. The unit properlymaintains the date, even during leap years.Figure 3-9 shows a sample TIM screen.Figure 3-9. Sample TIM Screen>timCurrently WED 08-02-94 10:13:04Enter new time (HH:MM) : 10:25Enter new date (MM_DD_YY) : 8-2-94Enter number for new day (1=MON, 2=TUE ... 7=SUN) : 3Currently WED 08-02-94 10:25:33>AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 3-29
3.12 MIN (Mobile ID Number) CommandEntry: From the > prompt, enter MIN <CR>.Purpose: To display a listing of the last five mobile-answered or mobile-originated accessattempts by mobiles. The EAC-2000 decodes both mobile and cell site control channel data upon call originationor answer. It then keeps track of channel assignments by the mobile telephone number(MIN) which is part of every data transmission. The MIN received from the mobile and thedonor channel assignment sent by the cell site is available as a troubleshooting aid throughthe MIN command.Like the SCS display, the MIN display is a refreshed listing of the last five access attempts.Each listing includes the 10-digit MIN, type of access (mobile-originated or mobile-answered), and activity. Figure 3-10 shows a sample MIN screen.Figure 3-10. Sample MIN ScreenA>minMIN ACTIVITY8015606385 MOBILE ANSWERED CALL DONOR CHAN = 2458015601407 MOBILE ORIGINATED CALL DONOR CHAN = 3088015609843 MOBILE ORIGINATED CALL DONOR CHAN = 568015605627 MOBILE ANSWERED CALL DONOR CHAN = 988015609843 MOBILE ORIGINATED CALL DONOR CHAN = 203The chart on the next page explains the Activities that may occur.Page 3-30 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)
3.12 MIN (Mobile ID Number) Command (Continued)Activity Meaning DONOR CHAN = XXX Most often displayed; indicates that the accesswas repeated, and the donor assigned a channel.NOT BOOSTED - DONOR ISSUED RELEASENOT BOOSTED - DONOR ISSUED REORDERNOT BOOSTED - DONOR ISSUED INTERCEPTNOT BOOSTED - DONOR ISSUED DIRECTED RETRYThese indicate that the access was repeated andreceived by the donor, but that the donorresponded with the indicated message. Thesemessages from the donor are used in variousways by different system manufacturers, butmost often indicate that the cell site was busy,that there was a problem with the dialednumber, or that the subscriber was notvalidated.NOT BOOSTED - DONOR DENIED ACCESS In this case, a valid access or page responsewas received by the EAC-2000, but when theEAC-2000 tried to access the donor, the donordenied the access (i.e., did not flip the B/I bitproperly). This could be because the donor isbusy or could indicate a problem in the EAC-2000 to donor reverse control channel path orequipment.NOT BOOSTED - DONOR ISSUED NO RESPONSE In this case, a valid access or page responsewas received by the EAC-2000, and repeated tothe donor, but the donor failed to respondwithin the maximum allowable time (5seconds). This could indicate a busy cell site,or could also indicate EAC-2000 to donorreverse control channel problems.NOT BOOSTED - STATION POWER CLASS = 1 Indicates that the EAC-2000 did not boost themobile because of the mobile’s power class,which is also displayed. This action iscontrolled by the Station Power Class SelectiveBoosting parameter.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 3-31
3.13 REV (Show Hardware Revisions) CommandEntry: From the > prompt, enter REV <CR>.Purpose: To display a listing of hardware revisions of the various assemblies in the EAC-2000. Also shows the RF board software revision, date code, and serial number.Page 3-32 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)
6HFWLRQ 6SHFLDO&RPPDQGV4.1 IntroductionIn addition to the commands for system setup and monitoring (described inSections 2 and 3), there are special commands intended for hardwareverification. These lower-level commands are less "user friendly" than thecommonly used commands; their use requires detailed knowledge of thehardware and software. However, they are more flexible and therefore morepowerful. WARNING!! It is not recommended that these commands be usedin the field. Contact Allen Telecom Systems, Systems EngineeringDepartment, before using them.4.2 CommandsA summary of these commands is given below. In the command syntaxshown— • Each command is entered at the > prompt. • A, B, and C represent hex data to be entered.• Brackets [ ] enclose optional entries.Entry PurposeRFC Invokes a mode (signified by a # prompt) which allowscommunication with the RF boards directly. The protocolused is beyond the scope of this document. This commandmust be used with caution because it could destroypersonality and calibration data stored on the RF boards.Exit this command using ESC.RUN AAAA Causes program execution to begin at location AAAA inEPROM.CBY AAA[-BBBB] Displays Code BYte[s] (i.e., in EPROM) from locationAAAA [to BBBB] in hex.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95) Page 4-1
4.2 Commands (Continued)Entry PurposeDBY AA[-BB][=CC] Displays Data BYte[s] in internal RAM from hex locationAA [to location BB], or if =CC is included, changes thebytes in the range to CC in hex.XBY AAAA[-BBBB][=CC] Displays/changes eXternal memory BYtes or memorymapped i/o in the range from AAAA [to BBBB].CHK Computes and displays the CHecKsum of program memory(i.e., uses the move instruction) and also displays the storedchecksum.WRP AAAA[=BB] Creates a continuous WRite Pulse to external memorylocation AAAA; data written is 55 hex or BB hex ifincluded. Exit this command by pressing ESC.RDP AAAA[-BBBB] Creates a continuous ReaD Pulse to external memorylocations in the range AAAA [to BBBB], and displays thevalues read on the screen (max of 15 locations displayed).Exit by pressing ESC.WAT Causes pulsing of the WATchdog timer to be suspended,thus allowing it to expire. A power-on reset should followshortly.Page 4-2 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 2, Operating Procedures (27-7656-2, 12/95)
9ROXPH7HFKQLFDO,QIRUPDWLRQ27-7657-2Issue 7/95© Copyright 1995 The Antenna Specialists Co.All Rights Reserved
Field SupportIf you need technical assistance with the EAC-2000™, contact at one of the following telephone numbers:Extend-A-Cell : (800) 800-EAC4 (3224)or (216) 349-8413Systems Engineering Department: (216) 349-8413
&RQWHQWV...................................v.......................................... 1-11.1 About This Volume ................................ 1-11.2 Introduction to Cellular Boosters ........................ 1-21.2.1 Use of Cellular Boosters ....................... 1-21.2.2 Frequency Allocation Plan ...................... 1-4................................. 2-12.1 Introduction ....................................... 2-12.2 EAC-2000 Concept ................................. 2-12.2.1 Control Channel Amplifiers ..................... 2-12.2.2 Voice Channel Amplifiers ...................... 2-22.3 EAC-2000 Operation ................................ 2-32.3.1 Antennas .................................. 2-32.3.2 Forward Path Operation ........................ 2-42.3.3 Reverse Path Operation ........................ 2-42.3.4 Hand-off Messages ........................... 2-52.4 System Board Functions .............................. 2-62.4.1 RF Boards ................................. 2-62.4.2 Backplane Board ............................ 2-72.4.3 Forward Preamp............................. 2-82.4.4 Reverse Preamp ............................. 2-82.4.5 Reverse Combiner ........................... 2-82.4.6 45-Watt PA ................................ 2-82.4.7 PA Interface Board ........................... 2-92.4.8 Mobile Shelf ............................... 2-92.4.9 Power Supply ............................... 2-92.5 How Calls Are Processed ............................ 2-102.5.1 Calls Placed/Answered from Within Booster Coverage Area ....................... 2-102.5.2 In-Progress Calls Entering the Booster Coverage Area . 2-112.5.3 Hand-backs ............................... 2-12AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 3, Technical Information (27-7657-2, 7/95) Page iii
(Continued)2.6 Multi-Hop Operation ............................... 2-142.6.1 Control Channel Response or Access ............. 2-142.6.2 Repeating the Response or Access ............... 2-152.7 Local/Remote Link ................................. 2-162.7.1 Local Link ................................ 2-162.7.2 Remote Link .............................. 2-162.8 Programmable Parameters ............................ 2-162.9 Alarms ......................................... 2-16.............................. 3-13.1 Specifications ..................................... 3-13.2 Equipment Characteristics ............................. 3-53.2.1 Accessories ................................ 3-53.2.2 Interchangeability ............................ 3-53.2.3 Compliance with Standards ..................... 3-53.2.4 Reliability ................................. 3-73.2.5 Service Skills Required for the EAC-2000 ........... 3-73.3 EAC-2000 Illustrations ............................... 3-83.4 EAC-2000 Diagrams ................................ 3-8Page iv AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 3, Technical Information (27-7657-2, 7/95)
1-1. Cellular Booster Operation ................................. 1-31-2. Channel Assignment and Frequency Allocation ................... 1-42-1. EAC-2000 Concept ...................................... 2-22-2.RF Board Block Diagram.................................. 2-73-1. Specifications . . . . ..................................... 3-13-2. EAC-2000, Front View (Door Removed) ...................... 3-123-3. EAC-2000, Back View (Door Removed) ...................... 3-133-4. Regulator Module Wiring Diagram .......................... 3-153-5. AMPS Power Supply Shelf Wiring Diagram ................... 3-17In addition, the following foldout diagrams are included in this section:• Block Diagram• Main Harness Wiring Diagrams• Card Cage Wiring Diagram• Backplane Wiring Diagram• PA Cage Wiring Diagram • Mobile Shelf Wiring DiagramAMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 3, Technical Information (27-7657-2, 7/95) Page v
6HFWLRQ ,QWURGXFWLRQ1.1 About This Volume This volume is the third of three volumes pertaining to the AMPS EAC-2000™booster. It contains descriptions, specifications, and drawings for the EAC-2000.Volume 1 includes installation procedures, and Volume 2 contains operatingprocedures. A set of appendices, a glossary, an index and a parts andaccessories order information section accompany the three volumes.This volume has been divided into three sections, described below. • Outlines the contents of this volume, defineskey terms, and provides an overview of cellular boosters.• Describes EAC-2000 operation,including the operational concept, functions of each of the system boards,and how calls are processed.• Provides specifications forpower, environment, mechanical, interface, RF, and alarm/controlconnections. Describes equipment characteristics, and provides illustrationsand diagrams. AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 3, Technical Information (27-7657-2, 7/95) Page 1-1
1.2 Introduction to Cellular BoostersCellular telephone systems transmit signals in two directions betweencell sites and mobile telephones within the signal coverage area. Thesignal path from the cell site to the mobile is called the path,and the path from mobile to cell site is the path. Weak signal transmissions may occur within the coverage areabecause of indoor applications, terrain obstructions, or distance fromthe transmitter. For example—• Within a large building, signals may be marginal because ofsignal attenuation by the building or because subscribers are onlower floors. • Steep terrain may shield a portion of the coverage area, causingunsatisfactory signal levels.• Coverage of a rural highway may be unsatisfactory because ofits distance from the cell-site transmitter.One solution in these situations is to add more cell sites. However,in low-traffic areas, a signal booster may be a much less expensiveway to extend the transmission range. As shown in Figure 1-1, thebooster has an amplifier in each cell-site/mobile path, which receivesthe signal, amplifies it, and reradiates it. The range is extended by the of the receiving and transmittingantennas and of the booster amplifier itself. Also, the path from thecell site to the booster is typically line-of-sight and therefore has verylow propagation loss when compared to the typical path to a mobile.Figure 1-1. Cellular Booster OperationPage 1-2 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 3, Technical Information (27-7657-2, 7/95)
Cellular frequencies for AMPS-compatible systems are allocated asshown in Figure 1-2. Frequencies 824–849 MHz are used for reversepath transmissions, and 869–894 MHz are used for forward pathtransmissions. These bands of frequencies are divided into 666 full-duplex channel pairs, each 30 kHz wide. The channels are dividedbetween two independent systems (A and B), each system receiving333 channels. Of the 333 channels, 21 are control channels and 312are voice channels. The control channels for the A and B systemsare next to each other in the center of the band.The expanded band segments (A', A", and B") provide an additional2.5 MHz of bandwidth to each licensee. The nonwireline Band Aexpansion is provided in two segments: a 1.5 MHz segment (A')above the B band and a 1 MHz segment ((A") below the A band.The entire 2.5 MHz wireline band B expansion is above the A'segment. The formulas for calculating AMOS frequencies fromchannel numbers are provided in Figure 1-2. Figure 1-2. Channel Assignment and Frequency AllocationBand Designation ChannelNumbers Mobile TransmitFrequency Land TransmitFrequencyBand A" 991 1023 824.040 825.000 869.040 870.000Band A Voice 1 312 825.030 834.360 870.030 879.360Band A Control 313 333 834.390 834.990 879.390 879.990Band B Control 334 354 835.020 835.620 880.020 880.620Band B Voice 355 666 835.650 844.980 880.650 889.980Band A’ 667 716 845.010 846.480 890.010 891.480Band B’ 717 799 846.510 848.970 891.510 893.970 For a given channel, the frequencies may be computed as follows:Channel Number Center Frequency, MHz1 ≤ N ≤ 7998 0.03N + 870.000 MHz991 ≤ N ≤ 1023 0.03 (N-1023) + 870 MHz1 ≤ N ≤ 799 0.03N + 825.000 MHz991 ≤ N ≤ 1023 0.03 (N-1023) + 825 MHzAMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 3, Technical Information (27-7657-2, 7/95) Page 1-3
6HFWLRQ ($& 'HVFULSWLRQ2.1 IntroductionThis section of the manual describes and illustrates the EAC-2000 designconcept and operation and provides descriptions of the various system boards.2.2 EAC-2000 ConceptThe EAC-2000 booster uses 21 separate narrowband amplifiers. The simplifieddiagram in Figure 2-1, shows 4 narrowband amplifiers: 2 (forward and reverse)for the control channel and 2 (forward and reverse) for the voice channel. A forward amplifier boosts and translates the frequency of the controlchannel transmitted from the donor cell site to the mobiles. Areverse amplifier boosts and translates the frequency of the controlchannel transmitted from the mobiles to the donor cell site. The narrowband amplifiers are a single channel (30 kHz) wide andhave dual synthesizers that control input and output channelsindependently. For example, if the cell site, the EAC-2000, and themobiles in the primary coverage area communicate on controlchannel 340, the EAC-2000 could be set up to receive controlchannel 340, amplify it, and reradiate it on channel 335. The mobilesin the booster coverage area that are unable to receive channel 340would lock onto channel 335 and communicate with the cell sitethrough the EAC-2000. The translated control channel is referred toas the .This concept of control channel translation is possible because themobiles lock onto the strongest control channel. This is significantbecause the mobiles will receive only one signal, even if on thefringe of the weak coverage area. Therefore, there is no interferingsignal.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 3, Technical Information (27-7657-2, 7/95) Page 2-1
Figure 2-1. EAC-2000 ConceptThe EAC-2000 also contains narrowband forward and reverseamplifiers for boosting voice channels. These amplifiers, which arekeyed as needed when voice channel activity is detected in theboosted coverage area, translate the frequency of the boosted signal.When a mobile is detected in the coverage area, a voice channelbooster is set up, and a hand-off message is sent to the mobile,causing it to switch to the boosted voice channel.Page 2-2 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 3, Technical Information (27-7657-2, 7/95)
2.3 EAC-2000 OperationSeveral aspects of EAC-2000 operation are described in this section:• Antennas• Forward path operation• Reverse path operation• Hand-off messagesRefer to the block diagram at the end of Section 3 in conjunction with thewritten descriptions.The EAC-2000 uses four antennas:• (lower right corner of block diagram): Primaryantenna facing donor cell site(s), used for:- Reception of control and voice channel signals from donorcell site(s).- Transmission of control and voice signals back to cellsite(s).• (lower left corner of block diagram): Primaryantenna facing mobiles in the booster coverage area, used for:- Transmission of boosted control channel and boosted voicechannels to mobiles.- Diversity reception from mobiles.• (center bottom of block diagram): Second antennafacing mobiles in the booster coverage area, used for:- Sending hand-off messages to mobiles.- Diversity reception from mobiles.- Sending control data to Multi-Donor Units, when installed• (not shown): Antenna for the installedcellular mobile, facing the donor cell site.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 3, Technical Information (27-7657-2, 7/95) Page 2-3
RF signals transmitted by the cell site (on both control and voicechannels) are received at the D1 antenna and passed through theduplexer to the forward preamplifier. The forward preamp amplifiesthe signal and provides RF output to the narrowband forward receiverof the RF boards.The signals coming out of the forward transmitter of each RF boardare fed to a 45-watt power amplifier (PA). The PA outputs arecombined in a transmit combiner. Note that the output channels forthe forward direction are fixed by this combiner. The output of thecombiner is fed to another duplexer, which is coupled to the M1antenna facing the desired coverage area.The reverse path through the system, starting with signals transmittedby the mobiles and received at the M1 antenna, is similar to theforward path. The reverse preamp has an additional RF input fromthe M2 antenna. Each RF board attached to the preamp canindividually select the M1 or the M2 input as part of a diversityalgorithm.An important difference between the two paths is in the output powercapability. The forward path employs separate 45-watt PAs, whichare combined through a conventional transmit combiner. PAs 1–5and 7-11 must operate on the fixed channel to which their associatedcombiner cavity is tuned. By contrast, the reverse path signals areamplified on each board and passively combined in a reversecombiner assembly, allowing the reverse transmitted signals tooperate on any channel.The reverse signals operate at a much lower power level, however,because the link between the cell site and the EAC-2000 is fixed (andprobably line-of-sight), whereas the link between the EAC-2000 andmobiles is not as reliable. A balanced system (that is, a system withsimilar forward and reverse gains) requires higher power PAs in theforward direction. In addition, since the signal from the mobiles maybe weak, diversity is employed by the reverse path receivers on eachRF board.Page 2-4 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 3, Technical Information (27-7657-2, 7/95)
The sixth RF board is used for scanning and sending handoffmessages. • The reverse path portion is used to scan the donor voicechannels for mobiles that may enter the booster coverage area.• The forward path portion of this board is connectedto a 45-watt PA 6, which is connected to the M2 antennaduplexer. Since this path is not combined, the hand-off/locatingboard can transmit with high power level on any channel. Thiscapability is used to send hand-off messages to mobiles, causingthe mobile to tune to one of the fixed forward channelsassociated with boards 1–5 and 7–11.• Board 6 is also used as a backup control channel booster.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 3, Technical Information (27-7657-2, 7/95) Page 2-5
2.4 System Board FunctionsThe EAC-2000 system includes the following boards:• RF boards• Backplane board• Controller board• Forward pre amp• Reverse pre amp• Reverse combiner• 45-watt power amplifier• DC-DC converter shelf• PA interface• Mobile shelfFigure 2-3 shows a more detailed block diagram of one RF path onthe RF boards. Forward and reverse paths differ only in tuning. In the forward direction, one of the signal paths from the preampboard is fed to a mixer/synthesizer on the narrowband forward path.The signal is translated down to the 45 MHz intermediate frequency(IF), where it is further filtered and amplified. The IF filter is onechannel (30 kHz) wide, allowing only the selected channel to beamplified. After passing through the IF filter, the signal is translatedback up by another mixer/synthesizer. Since the two synthesizers arenot tied together, the receive and transmit channels can be setindependently.A on the narrowband boards controls all outputs(input channel, output channel, gain, and antenna select output),monitors inputs (RSSI and synthesizer lock), runs the diversityalgorithm and detects signaling tone.Page 2-6 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 3, Technical Information (27-7657-2, 7/95)
Figure 2-3. RF Board Block DiagramThe controller board contains—• Controller microprocessor • 128 kilobytes of EPROM • 32 kilobytes of nonvolatile RAM • Watchdog timer• RS-232 interface• Reference oscillatorBecause all system parameters (e.g., channel numbers, gains) arestored in non-volatile RAM, the system will resume operation aftera power outage in the same state as before the outage. The RS-232interface connects a serial port to a local terminal. Monitor softwareallows system parameter entry and system monitoring. The RF boards and the controller board plug into the backplaneboard. Connectors on the backplane connect dc and RF with the restof the system.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 3, Technical Information (27-7657-2, 7/95) Page 2-7
The forward preamp board receives input from the D1 antenna viathe D1 duplexer. The board amplifies then splits the signal,providing output to each of the 11 RF boards. The board has net lossof 7 dB typical. The amplifier section is designed for high interceptpoint.The reverse preamp board receives input from the M1 and M2antennas via duplexers. The board amplifies and splits both signals.Each RF board has a control line connecting to the reverse preampthat controls which signal is used (M1 or M2). The reverse preampis designed for good sensitivity and provides about 11 dB gaintypical. The reverse combiner is entirely passive and broadband. Signalsfrom the reverse transmitter of the RF boards are fed in at about +33dBm. The signals are passively combined to a single output with netloss about 12 dB.The 45-watt PA is a standard base station design with added frontend gain. The unit has a pot on the front which allows the poweroutput to be manually adjusted downward 7 to 10 dB. The PA alsohas three digital inputs (only two are used) which allow digital settingof the power output to one of four steps:• Step 0/ = full power• Step 1 = 4 dB down• Step 2 = 8 dB down• Step 3 = 12 dB downThe PA has forward power sense and temperature sense outputs.Page 2-8 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 3, Technical Information (27-7657-2, 7/95)
Each PA cage may contain up to six 45-watt PAs and will containone PA interface board. The purpose of this board is to condense thenumerous control and sense leads required for the PAs to a relativelylow number of wires, which are connected to the controller board viathe cabinet harnessing. This board can be viewed as an "I/OExpander" which is fully controlled by the controller board.The PA interface board has power control outputs to each PA, atemperature sense, and forward power sense coming from each PA.The PA interface board also contains some undedicated outputs andinputs which are routed to the external alarms/controls connector atthe back of the PA cage.The mobile shelf contains— • Interface to cellular mobile • External dialer modem This setup allows remote control of the system via the mobile. Thesystem can be set up to initiate a call over this link when an alarmcondition occurs. The power supply system consists of— • Dual switching 28 volt supplies (supply power for the PAs andfor dc-dc converters)• 28-to-12 volt dc-dc converter (supplies power for the RFportions of the boards)• 28-to-6 volt dc-dc converter (supplies power for the logicportions of the system)The dc-dc converters are contained in the regulator module.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 3, Technical Information (27-7657-2, 7/95) Page 2-9
2.5 How Calls Are ProcessedThe EAC-2000 is capable of boosting up to 10 channels at once, while the donorcell may employ 15 or more channels. The EAC-2000’s call processingalgorithms dynamically allocate the RF boards to service only mobiles in thebooster coverage area.The EAC-2000 identifies mobiles in the booster coverage area by two methods:one for identifying mobiles that place or answer calls from within the boostercoverage area and another for identifying mobiles that enter the area with a callin progress. To identify calls placed or answered from within the booster coveragearea, the EAC-2000 monitors the data streams on the boosted controlchannel, both forward and reverse. When a mobile that is notengaged on a call drives into the booster coverage area, it normallyrescans and locks onto the strongest control channel (the boostedcontrol channel). If, once inside the booster coverage area, thatmobile places or answers a call, the following sequence occurs:1. The mobile accesses the reverse boosted control channel. TheEAC-2000 receives the access, then accesses the reverse donorcontrol channel.• The EAC-2000 waits for the corresponding voice channeldesignation message on the forward channel.• The EAC-2000 modifies the voice channel designationmessage by substituting one of its boosted voice channelsfor the donor voice channel, thus sending the mobile toone of the boosted voice channels.2. A boost path is set up between the mobile and the primarydonor cell site, with the mobile operating on the boosted voicechannel, the donor operating on the donor voice channel, andthe EAC-2000 translating and boosting between the two.The is defined as the cell site whose controlchannel the EAC-2000 is boosting. All mobiles that originate oranswer calls through the EAC-2000's boosted control channel will be.Page 2-10 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 3, Technical Information (27-7657-2, 7/95)
To identify mobiles that maydrive into the boosted coverage area with a call in progress (i.e.,already on a voice channel), the EAC-2000 scans the donor voicechannel in the mobile transmit band and maintains an RSSI averagefor each channel. If the average RSSI exceeds a preset , and the SAT on the channel is correct, the mobile on thatchannel is considered a candidate. Once a candidate is identified, the EAC-2000 forcesthe mobile to one of the boosted voice channels. To do this, thetransmit portion of the hand-off/locating board (board 6) and PA 6 isused to send a hand-off message to the mobile. A boost path is setup for that channel in the same fashion as if the candidate had beenidentified by decoding the data streams. To provide for situations in which in-progress calls may be linked to various neighboring cell sites, themonitoring system allows for entry of three separate , one for each possible SAT frequency. • If the booster is adjacent to a single cell site, the controlchannel of that cell site is the . Thevoice channels used in that cell site may be entered into thedonor voice channel list with the SAT of that cell site to handlemobiles that drive between the donor and booster with a call up.• If the booster is adjacent to several cell sites, the voice channelsof all the neighboring cells are entered into the scan list with theSAT of the neighboring cells. The control channel of one ofthe cell sites is chosen as the donor control channel, and thiscell is then referred to as the . As noted earlier, calls placed or answered fromwithin the booster coverage area (and identified by decoding datastreams) are boosted back to the primary donor cell. By contrast, in-progress calls identified by the channel scanning process are . That is,if a mobile drives in with a call-up to a neighboring cell, the EAC-2000 will boost the call back to that neighbor. This means that theRF path between the EAC-2000 and any possible donor must supportbooster operation. Note that if multiple donors are used, the D1 antenna system at theEAC-2000 must be specially designed for this operation.Specifically, signal strength at the D1 antenna must be close toidentical (within ±2 dB) from all possible donor cell sites.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 3, Technical Information (27-7657-2, 7/95) Page 2-11
Once a booster pair has been set up, the EAC-2000 monitors for oneof the following conditions to determine when to hand back themobile (that is, take down the booster on that channel):•SAT fade • Mobile release (1.8 seconds of signaling tone on the reversevoice channel) • Weak mobile RSSI (RSSI received from the boosted mobilegoes below a preset )• Weak donor RSSIWeak mobile RSSI identifies the mobile as a hand-back candidate.Once a hand-back candidate is identified, the EAC-2000 sends themobile a hand-off message directing it back to the original donorvoice channel. This allows the mobile to be covered as it drives outof the booster coverage area back into the donor cell site coveragearea. Sometimes a mobileleaving the booster area will drive out of cellular coverage. In thissituation, handing the mobile back to the original donor cell wouldresult in a weaker or nonexistent signal. To handle this situation, the EAC-2000 uses the .Shortly after sending the hand-off message, the EAC-2000 tries tohand the mobile back to the booster by sending it a second hand-offmessage (called a ) directing the mobile to comeback to the boosted voice channel. When the grab-back message issent, however, the mobile (because of the first hand-off message) ison the donor voice channel and possibly is receiving signal from thedonor cell site. • If the signal from the donor is stronger than the signal from theEAC-2000, the mobile will ignore the grab-back message andremain on the donor voice channel. The EAC-2000 will thenfree up the equipment it was using to boost the call, since themobile is now being handled directly by the donor.• If the EAC-2000 signal is stronger during the grab-backmessage (as would be the case if the mobile were driving awayfrom the EAC-2000 but not toward the donor cell that washandling the call), the mobile will come back to the boostervoice channel, and the EAC-2000 will continue to boost themobile.Page 2-12 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 3, Technical Information (27-7657-2, 7/95)
(Continued)The entire hand-back/grab-back process takes only about 500milliseconds. Once a mobile comes back to the booster after a hand-back/grab-back, that mobile will not be considered a hand-backcandidate again for several seconds (a programmable parameter),regardless of its signal level. The EAC-2000 will periodically sendhand-back/grab-backs but continue to handle the mobile until thesignal level is unusable. If a mobile being boosted back to onedonor cell drives toward another donor cell, a dilemma occurs. Theserving cellular system thinks the mobile is on one voice channel,while the booster actually has it translated to another channel. The signal level from the booster to the donor is set such that it isbelow the donor’s hand-off candidate threshold. The donor will thusalways identify the boosted mobile as a candidate for hand-off, andthe cellular system will try to find the mobile in the cell sites adjacentto the donor. Since the mobile is actually on the booster’s translatedvoice channel, it will not be seen in any cell site, so a system hand-off will not occur.A solution is to provide a means for the adjacent cell sites to see themobile on the voice channel that the cellular system thinks it is on.Once this is accomplished, the cellular system can determine whichadjacent cell the mobile is driving into, assign a voice channel in thatcell, and then send a hand-off message for the mobile to go to thatchannel.This can be achieved by placing a reverse-translating (Allen Telecom Systems) at each of the cell sites adjacent tothe booster. The unit is connected to the cell-site receive antennas toscan for boosted mobiles and then translate those mobiles back to thedonor’s voice channel for presentation to the cell-site locatingreceiver.The Multi-Donor Units must know the relationships in effect betweenboosted and donor channels for calls being handled by the EAC-2000booster(s). This is accomplished by data signaling between the EAC-2000 and any adjacent Multi-Donor Units on a booster link channel.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 3, Technical Information (27-7657-2, 7/95) Page 2-13
(Continued)The EAC-2000 looks for the boosted mobile signal level to fall belowa settable . If this happens, thebooster encodes and transmits the channel relationships to any Multi-Donor Units that may be listening. However, this does not mean themobile will necessarily be handed off. Transmission of thisinformation merely allows the Multi-Donor Unit to know (if it is ableto see the mobile signal at sufficient level) to which channel it should"untranslate" the mobile.2.6 Multi-Hop OperationMulti-hop operation (illustrated below) involves setting up two or more EAC-2000 units (or EAC-2000 units and EAC-IV units) to operate together in aline—for example, along a major corridor leading into a metropolitan area. DonorCell ⇔Booster#1 ⇔Booster#2 ⇔Booster#3The boosters are set up so that there is a two-way RF path between the donorand booster #1 and between each pair of adjacent boosters. This arrangementcan be used to handle situations in which a mobile— • Places or answers a call while in the coverage area of any of the boosters.• Drives across the coverage boundary: - Donor-to-booster- Booster-to-booster (away from donor)- Booster-to-booster (toward donor)- Booster-to-donor When a mobile places or answers a call, the first exchange ofinformation occurs on the reverse control channel (from mobile todonor). If the call is a mobile-answered call, the exchange is a pageresponse. If it is a mobile-originated call, the mobile does an access.There is little difference in the way EAC-2000 boosters handle thesetwo. Since the mobiles self-locate, the control channel chosen for theaccess determines in which booster's coverage area (if any) themobile is located.Page 2-14 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 3, Technical Information (27-7657-2, 7/95)
All boosters between the terminating booster and the donor cellrepeat the access or page response and decode it. From the decodingthey extract the mobile identification number (MIN). Next, thecellular system assigns a voice channel to that particular mobile bysending, over the forward control channel, an initial voice channeldesignation (IVCD) message consisting of the mobile’s MIN and avoice channel that will be used by the donor for the call.The multi-hop boosters are all monitoring the forward control channeldata stream. The boosters that decoded the access or page responseon the reverse control channel also decode the corresponding IVCDmessage on the forward channel.Booster #1 substitutes its chosen boosted channel for the donor voicechannel in the IVCD message and sets up a boost path between thedonor-assigned voice channel and the boosted voice channel ofbooster #1. Likewise, booster #2 changes the channel number in theIVCD message and sets up a boost path between the boosted voicechannels of boosters #1 and #2.All of the boosters between the terminating EAC-2000, where the callis placed, and the donor cell will in this fashion identify thatparticular mobile as a candidate for repeating and will have decodedthe donor channel assigned.The mobile will decode the IVCD message from the terminatingEAC-2000 and go to the boosted voice channel assigned by it. AllEAC-2000s between the donor and the terminating one willsimultaneously set up boost paths between the previous EAC-2000(or donor) and the next EAC-2000. Thus the path from mobile todonor is complete.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 3, Technical Information (27-7657-2, 7/95) Page 2-15
2.7 Local/Remote LinkThe operating parameters of the EAC-2000 can be programmed and monitoredlocally, through a serial link attached to a standard RS-232, ASCII terminal.The same control can be exercised remotely via a telephone line, modem, andthe same kind of terminal.The local link is established by connecting a conventional ASCII, RS-232 terminal to the 25-way D-sub connector on the EAC-2000controller board. The terminal should be set for 9600 baud, evenparity, 7 data bits, 1 stop bit, full duplex (no local echo), all capitals,disable auto XON/XOFF and soft scroll, and "carriage return only." The EAC-2000 comes equipped with an integral modem attached toan installed cellular mobile radio.This equipment makes it possible to dial up and communicate withthe EAC-2000 using a remote terminal and compatible modem. TheEAC-2000 can also be set up to automatically dial a predeterminedtelephone number if a major fault occurs.Once the remote link is established, the interface with the system isexactly like that on the local link, but at a different baud rate. If bothlinks are up, characters typed on either terminal are echoed to both,along with the resulting EAC-2000 output. This makes it possible foran experienced operator to exercise the system remotely whilesomeone watches locally, or for the two to exercise the systemtogether.2.8 Programmable ParametersVirtually all of the operating parameters of the EAC-2000 are under softwarecontrol. For descriptions of the programmable parameters and the availableoptions for each, refer to Volume 2, Section 2. 2.9 AlarmsThe EAC-2000 constantly monitors and logs a variety of alarm conditions. Fordescriptions of these alarm conditions, see Volume 2, Section 3.8.Page 2-16 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 3, Technical Information (27-7657-2, 7/95)
6HFWLRQ 6SHFLILFDWLRQVDQG'UDZLQJV3.1 SpecificationsSpecifications for power, environment, mechanical, RF, interface, and generalpurpose alarm/control connections are given in Figure 3-1. Figure 3-1. SpecificationsPowerRecommended ac service: AC power requirements(for 10 channel operation):28 Vdc power supply without battery plant28 Vdc power supply with battery plantSystem dc power requirements(supplied by 28 V power supply):200–240 Vac, single-phase50/60 Hz20 amp min.2900 watts max.4000 watts max.19–30 Vdc100 amps max.EnvironmentOperating temperature:Relative humidity:Storage temperature:-30o to +60oC95% max @ +50oC-40o to +75oCMechanicalOutdoor cabinet dimensions (HxWxD):Weight:68 x 24 x 40 in(169.7 x 62.2 x 101.6 cm)Approximately 690 lbs (363 kg)AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 3, Technical Information (27-7657-2, 7/95) Page 3-1
Figure 3-1. Specifications (Continued)RFGain:Overall reverse path noise figure:Channel filter bandwidth Maximum input signal level:Frequency tracking accuracy(for channel boost mode):RSSI range:Reverse:Forward:RF power amplifiers:PAs 1–10 (forward direction):PA 6 (hand-off transmitter):Reverse direction:> 120 dB< 12 dB> 26 kHz @ -6 dB> 75 kHz @ -60 dB-40 dBm±1.5 Hz max per MHz of translation-120 to -20 dBm-100 to -20 dBm45-watt45-watt10 x 2-watt (combined linearly)Programmable frequency control:Spacing:Range:Channels:Output frequency accuracy(for data transmission mode):30 kHz824–849 MHz869–894 MHz1–799, 991–1023±1.5 ppm ±0.25 ppm ±0.25 ppmmax. max. max.Maximum usable power output:(Measured at antenna connector,after internal combiner and duplexerlosses)M1 antenna port (forwarddirection):M2 antenna port (hand-off):D1 antenna port (reversedirection):5-Channel 10-Channel20 watts/channel 15 watts/channel100 watts total 150 watts total20 watts max.100 milliwatts per channel1.0 watt totalPage 3-2 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 3, Technical Information (27-7657-2, 7/95)
Figure 3-1. Specifications (Continued)InterfaceAntenna connectors:Local diagnostic interface:Remote diagnostic interface:Type NRS232, ASCII9600 baud, even parity, 7 data bits, 1 stopbit, full duplexMicrocomm TravelPorte™ (high-speed, errorcorrecting, data compression modem)General Purpose Alarm/ControlConnectionsDigital Inputs (pins 6, 7, 8, 9):Load:Low:High:Open Collector Outputs (pins 2, 3, 4, 5): Analog inputs(pins 10, 11, 12, 13):Load:Range:+5 Vdc source (pin 1):> 100 kΩ < 2 Vdc> 4 Vdc max. +28 VdcMax. +15 Vdc, 20 mAImpedance 733 Ω1 MΩ0–5 Vdc, 20 mV resolution+5 Vdc ±5%, 100 mA max.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 3, Technical Information (27-7657-2, 7/95) Page 3-3
3.2 Equipment CharacteristicsEAC-2000 accessories, module interchangeability, compliance, and reliability aredescribed in this section, along with skills required for servicing the equipment. The following items are supplied with the EAC-2000:• EAC-2000 Technical Manual (Volumes 1, 2, and 3), powersupply manual, mobile manual, modem manualInside the EAC-2000, the following modules are interchangeable:• RF boards (positions 1–11)• 45-watt PAsThe EAC-2000 complies with the applicable agency rules regardingcellular base stations for AMPS systems.• The unit is designed to work insystems that comply with—- EIA/TIA 553A Cellular System Mobile Station–LandStation Compatibility Specification- EIA/TIA IS-20A, Recommended Minimum Standards for800 MHz Cellular Land Stations- EIA/TIA IS-19B, Recommended Minimum Standards for800 MHz Cellular Subscriber Units- RSS-118, Radio Standards Specification, Canada• The EIA/TIA IS54A and IS54BCellular system Dual-Mode Mobile Station - Base StationCompatibility Standard specifies both analog and digital modesof operation. The EAC-2000 is not capable of boosting digitalcalls. However, the EAC-2000 can operate with dual modesystems and dual mode mobiles. The EAC-2000 controlchannel always transmits with the "PCI" bit clear. Dual moderadios operating on the boosted control channel therefore accessusing the EIA 553 (i.e., analog) protocol. The donor cell,whether dual mode or not, will assign an analog channel, andthe EAC-2000 will boost the call.Page 3-4 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 3, Technical Information (27-7657-2, 7/95)
(Continued)• The Motorola NAMPS AirInterface Specification specifies both a 30 kHz wide channeloperation and a 10 kHz wide channel operation. The EAC-2000is not capable of boosting calls assigned to narrow channels.However, the EAC-2000 can operate with both NAMPS radiosand NAMPS systems. The EAC-2000 control channel alwaystransmits with the "EP" bit clear. NAMPS radios operating onthe boosted control channel therefore access using the EIA 553protocol. The donor cell, whether NAMPS capable or not, willassign a wide channel, and the EAC-2000 will boost the call.• This modem is compatible with thefollowing modem standards:Bell 103Bell 212ACCITT V.21CCITT V.22CCITT V.22 BISCCITT V.32CCITT V.42CCITT V.42 BISMNP Class 5MNP Class 10• The cellular radio used for remote modeoperation is a standard unit and complies with applicablestandards.Careful consideration has been given to the reliability of the unitduring design. • In most cases, is based on derating componentspecifications to 50% or less of guaranteed limits. •The has transient protection to guard againstlightning and power line surges. •The circuitry has a low voltage reset andwatchdog timer to provide firmware program reliability. The microprocessor components and circuitry require service bypersonnel skilled in repairing firmware-driven logic assemblies. TheRF circuitry contains surface-mounted components that requirespecial care when being repaired.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 3, Technical Information (27-7657-2, 7/95) Page 3-5
3.3 EAC-2000 IllustrationsFigures 3-2 and 3-3 illustrate front and back views of the AMPS EAC-2000 withthe doors removed.3.4 EAC-2000 DiagramsFigure 3-4 shows the regulator module wiring diagram, and Figure 3-5 showsthe power supply shelf wiring diagram. In addition, the following foldoutdiagrams are included in this section:• Block Diagram• Main Harness Wiring Diagrams• Card Cage Wiring Diagram• Backplane Wiring Diagram• PA Cage Wiring Diagram • Mobile Shelf Wiring DiagramPage 3-6 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 3, Technical Information (27-7657-2, 7/95)
Figure 3-2. AMPS EAC-2000, Front View (Door Removed)AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 3, Technical Information (27-7657-2, 7/95) Page 3-7
Figure 3-3. AMPS EAC-2000, Back View (Door Removed) Page 3-8 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 3, Technical Information (27-7657-2, 7/95)
Figure 3-4. Regulator Module Wiring DiagramAMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 3, Technical Information (27-7657-2, 7/95) Page 3-9
Figure 3-5. Power Supply Shelf Wiring DiagramPage 3-10 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Vol. 3, Technical Information (27-7657-2, 7/95)
$SSHQGLFHV27-7658-3Issue 12/95© Copyright 1995 Allen Telecom SystemsAll Rights Reserved
Field SupportIf you need technical assistance with the EAC-2000™, contact at one of the following telephone numbers:Extend-A-Cell : (800) 800-EAC4 (3224)or (216) 349-8413Systems Engineering Department: (216) 349-8413
$SSHQGL[$7URXEOHVKRRWLQJ*XLGHContentsA.1 Getting Help .........................................A-3A.2 Basic Troubleshooting Tips ............................... A-3A.2.1 Illegible Display ...............................A-3A.2.2 No Display................................... A-3A.2.3 No Power on Channel ........................... A-4A.3 Donor-Dropped Calls ...................................A-6A.3.1 Weak Signals from Donor ........................A-6A.3.2 Cellular System Hand-offs ........................A-7A.3.3 Donor RSSI < Threshold Counts (Nominal Number) ...... A-8A.3.4 Donor RSSI < Threshold Counts (Large Number) ........ A-9A.4 Calls Not Processed ................................... A-10A.5 Poor Talk-Back Range (Mobile-to-Booster) ................... A-11A.6 Dropped Calls Near Edge of Booster Coverage Area ............ A-13A.7 Excessive Hand-backs/Hand-ins on Voice Channel .............. A-15A.8 No Hand-in ......................................... A-16A.9 No Hand-back ....................................... A-16A.10 Dropped Calls Along Multi-Hop Path ....................... A-17A.11 Unsuccessful Setups ................................... A-18A.12 Dropped Calls Due to SAT Fades ......................... A-19A.13 Cross-Talk.......................................... A-20A.14 Erratic Operation of Remote Modem ....................... A-22AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95) Page A-1
Contents (Continued)A.15 Alarms ............................................ A-23A.15.1 SYN LOC Alarms ............................ A-23A.15.2 I2C and EEPROM Alarms ....................... A-23A.15.3 RF COM Alarms ............................. A-23A.15.4 Personality Alarms ............................ A-23A.16 Noise . . ........................................... A-26A.16.1 Burst Noise at the Mobile ....................... A-26A.16.2 Transmitter Output Noise, Forward Direction .......... A-28A.17 Trouble Locking Onto Control Channel...................... A-29Page A-2 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95)
A.1 Getting Help The procedures in this appendix may be used in case of trouble. For helpwith these or any other problems, feel free to contact Allen TelecomSystems’, Extend-A-Cell Technical Hotline:1-800-800-EAC4 (1-800-800-3224)International: 1-216-349-8413Office hours are 8:00 a.m. to 5:30 p.m. EST, Monday–Friday. Twenty-four hour emergency paging is available by following the directions on theHotline voicemail message. Routine assistance at other times can bearranged in advance.A.2 Basic Troubleshooting TipsSymptom: Illegible display when terminal is turned on.Solution: Check terminal setup.Symptom: No display when terminal is turned on.Solution: Power down. Recheck power hookup, terminalhookup, and terminal setup.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95) Page A-3
Symptom: No power on one or more channels.Check the ALA screen:Is there an RF board Out-of-Service alarm? If yes—Is it due to a Personality Mismatch?Solution: Check to make sure that the right IF boardhas been installed and that it is seated correctly onthe back plane connector.Is it due to Serial Data Link alarms?Solution: Swap the board with another position inthe card cage. If the Serial Data Link alarm stayswith the slot position, replace the back plane board.If the Serial Data Link alarm goes with the suspectRF board, replace that RF board.Is it due to Synthesizer Unlock alarms?Solution: Replace the defective RF board.Are there PA Low Power alarms and a PA Out-of-Service alarm?Solution: Continue with the following check items.If no other cause is found, PAs may need to beexchanged or replaced. Page A-4 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95)
(Continued)Are any connections loose? Check, especially, the"Phoenix" connectors that seat in the PA ’D’connectors (accessible through the back of the unit).Solution: Tighten loose connections. Where is power being lost? (Use normal RFtroubleshooting procedures to determine this.)• When keyed, the IF board output shouldbe above -8 dBm, measured at the TNCconnector input to the PA shelf.• The 45W PA output can be checked at theN connector on the panel below the TNCconnectors.Does the power supply current rise by about5–7A when the PA is keyed? If so, the PA is receiving drive and putting outpower. This indicates a problem somewherebetween the output connector and the combiner.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95) Page A-5
A.3 Donor-Dropped CallsCustomers complain that calls are being dropped. SCS and DCS showthat an excessive number of calls are being terminated due to "DONORRSSI < THRESHOLD." (If customer complaints are few, but call statistics indicate a highpercentage of DONOR < RSSI THRESHOLD counts, refer to sectionsA.3.3 and A.3.4 below.)Signals from the donor cell site may be below the default donordisconnect threshold (-80 dBm). The EAC-2000 equipment willdisconnect the call and record it as a DONOR RSSI <THRESHOLD if the received donor signal is below this level. The minimum recommended donor signal level is -75 dBm (-70dBm for Multi-Hop), although operation to -85 dBm can beexpected with some degradation. If this is acceptable, the donorminimum disconnect threshold should be changed to -90 dBm.Under no circumstance should reliable operation be expectedbelow -85 dBm.Weak signals from the donor may be a result of—Improperly engineered donor-repeater RF path.Improperly oriented donor antenna.Insufficient gain in the donor antenna.Excessive loss in the RF cable between the donor antennaand the EAC-2000.Nearby obstructions affecting or blocking the donorantenna.Lossy or bad RF antenna connectors.Defective duplexer within the EAC-2000. Defective forward preamp module. Defective internal RF cabling within the EAC-2000.Page A-6 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95)
The cellular system hands the EAC-2000-processed mobile toanother cell site. This will occur if there is another nearby cell site where thesignal from the EAC-2000 is stronger than at the selected donorcell site, and if the signal from the EAC-2000 to the donor cellsite is below the donor’s hand-off candidate threshold (typically-85 dBm). This will result in a dropped call if the mobile is outof range of the other cell site. If this is happens, any one of thefollowing steps can be used to solve the problem:• Increase the signal level from the EAC-2000 to above thedesired cell site's hand-off candidate threshold.• Reduce the hand-off candidate threshold at the desireddonor cell site to below the signal being received from theEAC-2000.• Reorient and/or replace the donor antenna at the EAC-2000 with a more directional antenna to reduce the signallevel at the nearby cell site to less than that at the desireddonor cell site. • Select the stronger nearby cell site as the donor.Note that the signal level received at the donor cell site from theEAC-2000 will nominally be 20 to 25 dB below that receivedat the EAC-2000 from the donor cell. That is, a signal of -60dBm from the donor cell site at the EAC-2000 generallycorrespond to a -80 to -85 dBm signal at the donor cell sitefrom the EAC-2000. This difference in power levels is neces-sary to prevent the EAC-2000 from interfering with the channelreuse pattern of the other cell sites within the cellular system.Thus, in most cases the signal level from the EAC-2000 at thecell site will be below that cell site's hand-off candidatethreshold. AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95) Page A-7
Calls are processed normally, but DCS statistics indicate thata small percentage (up to 20%) are recorded as beingterminated at the EAC-2000 due to DONOR RSSI <THRESHOLD. This is considered to be a normal condition. The majority ofcalls should end due to MOBILE RELEASE DETECTED.However, there will always be mobiles that drive out of rangeof the EAC-2000, away from the cellular system while trying tomaintain the call. These calls will drop due to SAT FADESeither at the EAC-2000 or at the donor cell site. Usually, theSAT fade timer at the EAC-2000 is synchronized with the timerat the donor cell site. Thus, if the donor cell site drops the calldue to a SAT fade before the EAC-2000’s SAT timer hasexpired, the EAC-2000 will record the call as a DONOR <THRESHOLD reason for termination (as explained below). This number can be reduced if the EAC-2000 SAT fade timeris set to a shorter interval than the cell site’s SAT fade timer.This is not recommended, however, since it may result in somemarginal calls being dropped that otherwise could continue. The recommended setting for the SAT fade timer at the EAC-2000 is the same setting that is used at the cell site (usually 3to 5 seconds). This setting allows the majority of callterminations under these weak-signal conditions to be recordedas SAT FADES, with some nominal number being recorded asDONOR < THRESHOLD.Page A-8 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95)
Calls are processed normally, but a large DONOR < THRESH-OLD count, along with a low number of SAT FADE counts,shows up in DCS statistics as the reason for calls beingterminated. This situation happens when the SAT fade timer in the EAC-2000 is set to a period longer than the SAT fade timer at thedonor cell site. That is, weak mobiles that are dropped by thedonor cell site due to SAT fade will show up as adonor-dropped call at the EAC-2000 because the EAC-2000 isstill looking for the mobile to reappear. Setting the SAT fade timer at the EAC-2000 to a period longerthan the donor cell site fade timer is not necessary (nor is itrecommended), but it does not cause any harm to systemoperation. The SAT fade timer may be set longer than the cellsite if the operator wishes, as long as it is understood that thiswill result in an unusually high number of DONOR RSSI <THRESHOLD counts.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95) Page A-9
A.4 Calls Not ProcessedMobile-originated calls through the EAC-2000 result in an immediate "fastbusy" in the earpiece. Also, calls placed to mobiles in the EAC-2000service area receive an OUT-OF-SERVICE message from the cellularsystem. Mobiles otherwise lock onto the EAC-2000 control channel.This condition may occur for one of two reasons: • This canoccur if the mobile is at the edge of the booster coverage area. Thesignal from the EAC-2000 must be above -110 to -105 dBm forconsistently reliable reverse-path control channel operation. Also,note that many manufacturers' mobiles are capable of locking onto aweak control channel at signal levels far below that usable for voicecommunication.• Check thefollowing hardware to confirm that a reverse RF path exists for themobile to obtain service with the donor cell:RF board in slot 1 (switch with another board)Presence of power to the Reverse Combiner module Reverse RF preamp module*Defective duplexers*Defective mobile M1 or M2 antenna system/cabling *RF cables for open, short, or intermittent connections The mobiles may operate satisfactorily for the last threeconditions (marked *) when near the EAC-2000, but will exhibitthese symptoms when operated at any distance from the EAC-2000. Page A-10 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95)
A.5 Poor Talk-back Range (Mobile-to-Booster)Talk-out range seems to be significantly better than the talk-back range.This problem exhibits itself as particularly noisy signals from the mobilewhile the mobile is receiving relatively noise-free signals from the EAC-2000.This condition may occur for several reasons:• If the signal from theEAC-2000 back to the donor cell site exceeds the power reductionthreshold at the cell site, then the cell site will attempt to reduce the"mobile signal" from the EAC-2000. Since the output from the EAC-2000 is limited at +20 dBm, the cellsite may reduce the mobile to its minimum power step. One way toresolve this problem is to work through the SET functions to reducethe reverse PA power, which is adjustable from +5 to +20 dBm. In addition, the power cutback threshold at the donor cell may beincreased, if necessary, to maintain the signal from the EAC-2000below the cutback threshold. At least a 6 dB margin below thecutback threshold is recommended to prevent the mobiles fromerroneously being powered down.• If base station antennas that areoptimized for the cellular transmit band are used, then the mobilereceive signals in the cellular receive band (mobile transmit band) atthe EAC-2000 will suffer. Antennas that offer gain over the entiretransmit-receive band should be used. This applies to both themobile M1/M2 antennas and the donor D1 antenna.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95) Page A-11
A.5 Poor Talk-back Range (Mobile-to-Booster) (Continued)• Poor isolation between the donor (D1) and mobile service(M1/M2) antennas at the EAC-2000 result in an increased noise floor(and possibly cross-talk) at the EAC-2000's reverse preamp input.This will also reduce the effective mobile EAC-2000 range since thisnoise floor will mask weak signals. Note that the antenna connected to the modem mobile within theEAC-2000 must also have sufficient isolation from the D1 andM1/M2 antennas. Otherwise, the local mobile may cause preampoverload within the EAC-2000, and hence noisy operation for othermobiles that are being repeated.Normally, vertical separation of 40 feet or more between the D1, theM1/M2, and the modem mobile antennas will provide adequateisolation. Appendix D describes how much isolation is needed, howto achieve it, and how to measure it. • A defective reverse preamp will alsocause poor talk-back range. First, check to see if the gain throughthe preamp is within specification (better than 9 dB for each path,exclusive of duplexer losses). If gain is less than this value on eitherpath, then the preamp should be replaced. Ordinarily, diversity willselect the better path if one side of the preamp is bad, but it ispossible that for both paths to be bad, particularly if lightning damageis involved.• Defective duplexers and/or cableswith excessive insertion loss (> 2 dB) will also affect talk-back range.• Since the EAC-2000 (and cell sites)transmit at higher ERPs than the mobiles, some imbalance betweentalk-out and talk-back will exist. Diversity and low-noise preampsare typically used to minimize this imbalance, but some imbalanceusually remains even with these measures.Page A-12 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95)
A.6 Dropped Calls Near Edge of Booster Coverage Area Calls are set up either to or from mobiles when they are relatively closeto the EAC-2000 but are dropped abruptly when they are near the edge ofthe EAC-2000 coverage area away from the donor cell.This situation may occur if the power output from PA 6 (the hand-in PA)is low. Normal operation is for the forward voice channel (PAs 2–5 and7-11) to hand the mobile back to its originally assigned channel when thatmobile drops below the hand-back threshold at the EAC-2000. Thehand-in transmitter (PA 6) is used to hand the mobile back to the boostedchannel, assuming that PA 6 again captures the mobile after it has beensent to its original channel. Thus, low PA 6 power will not hand a mobileback to the booster, thereby causing that mobile to be abruptly dropped ifit is not within range of the donor cell. Low power from PA 6 may be caused by one of the following:• PA 6 power output adjusted too low. The PA 6 power level shouldbe set to at least as high as the voice channel power output setting.• Defective PA 6, providing low power output.• Low RF board 6 output (should be at least -8 dBm). • Defective M2 antenna, including improper vertical alignment.• Defective duplexer associated with PA 6.• Defective RF cabling associated with PA 6. AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95) Page A-13
A.6 Dropped Calls Near Edge of Booster Coverage Area(Continued)In addition to the causes just described, calls may be dropped unnecessarilyby the EAC-2000 if the system parameters are improperly set. Thefollowing two conditions should be checked if an abnormal number ofdropped calls are being reported.• This will place the mobile ina noisy path situation before attempting the hand-back/grab-backsequence. A mobile in a noisy path situation will have a higherprobability of missing the subsequent grab-back message after it ishanded back to its original donor channel. If the mobile does notcorrectly decode the grab-back message, and if it is out of range ofthe donor cell, the call will then be dropped.• This would increase the probability of a grab-backtransmission being missed by the mobile, particularly if a low hand-back threshold is programmed, as in the previous paragraph. Thenumber of attempts should be reduced to minimize the probability ofa missed hand-in transmission under these circumstances.Page A-14 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95)
A.7 Excessive Hand-backs/Hand-ins on Voice ChannelThe mobile user notices an excessive number of hand-offs when in theEAC-2000 area.A certain number of hand-back/hand-in operations are to be expected innormal system operation. These hand-offs will occur when the mobile isnear the fringe of the EAC-2000 area and away from the donor coveragearea. Excessive hand-offs may occur due to improper selection ofhand-back and hand-in thresholds, as follows:• Aminimum of 6 dB between these two thresholds is required, and10 dB is recommended to keep the hand-back attempts to aminimum.• The hand-inthreshold should always be higher than the hand-back threshold (forexample, -75 dBm for hand-in and -85 dBm for hand-back).• This situation will occur ifthere is a minimum of overlap between the donor and the EAC-2000.The EAC-2000 attempts to hand back to the donor, but it is alwaysstronger than the donor because it attempts the hand-back when themobile is still relatively close (and therefore strong) to the EAC-2000.•After determining that the thresholds are properly set, the timebetween the hand-back attempts may be adjusted along with themaximum number of attempts to minimize the effect of excessivehand-offs to the user.• If amultiple-donor installation is involved, improper signal balancingfrom the EAC-2000 back to the donor cell sites can also causeexcessive hand-offs. Refer to the Multi-Donor application note andtroubleshooting guide if this type of installation is involved.Reverse RF boards with improperly calibrated or defective reverse RSSIcircuitry can also cause excessive hand-backs and hand-ins on the voicechannel. However, this will usually be noticed with a particular channelrather than with all channels in the EAC-2000. AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95) Page A-15
A.8 No Hand-in Mobiles drive into the area of the EAC-2000 from the donor area but arenot handed-in until they drive close to the EAC-2000. Calls are otherwiseprocessed normally to and from the mobiles within the EAC-2000 coveragearea.This situation will occur if there is significant overlap of coverage betweenthe donor and the EAC-2000. The signal from the EAC-2000 must be afew dB stronger than the donor at the mobile before hand-in will occur.If desired, the hand-in threshold can be raised to minimize the number ofunnecessary hand-in transmissions.A.9 No Hand-back Mobiles do not hand-back to the donor when driving from the EAC-2000coverage area to the donor coverage area.This condition may occur in the following situations:• If the hand-back threshold is set too high, the EAC-2000 will exceed the maximum number of hand-back attemptsallowed before the mobile is close enough to the donor to keep theEAC-2000 from capturing it with its subsequent hand-in attempt.The hand-back threshold should be decreased while the number ofhand-back attempts is increased.• This condition would be associated withone channel only, rather than all channels. This can be checked bykeying the suspect forward channel via the SET mode, and thenmonitoring the transmitted signal for power output, proper deviation,and the data waveform for excessive distortion.Page A-16 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95)
A.10 Dropped Calls Along Multi-Hop PathMobiles are abruptly dropped or are handed back to the donor channelwhile driving along a multi-hop corridor.This situation will occur if the hand-in and hand-back thresholds areimproperly set at each EAC-2000 along the corridor. Also, minimum ornonexistent overlapping coverage between the EAC-2000s cause calls tobe dropped.• In a multi-hop system, thehand-back thresholds at each EAC-2000 must be set so that they areat least 10 to 15 dB below the received level from the next EAC-2000 down the corridor. This level is determined when the EAC-2000 down the corridor is transmitting back to the current EAC-2000at its maximum limited output (normally +20 dBm). The 10 to 15 dB margin is necessary to allow the mobile to operatedown to nominally -110 dBm at any EAC-2000. Otherwise, anyEAC between the donor and the EAC-2000 serving the mobile coulderroneously hand-back a mobile to the wrong channel and cause adropped call if the 10 to 15 dB margin is not provided. (Forexample, if the maximum received level from the next EAC-2000down the corridor is at -90 dBm, then the hand-back threshold shouldbe set at -105 dBm.)•Calls could also be dropped if there is minimum overlap coveragebetween the EAC-2000s, and if the hand-in threshold is set too high.That is, the mobile could drive down the corridor to an area that isbelow the hand-back threshold of its current EAC-2000 and still notbe above the hand-in threshold of the next EAC-2000. The hand-inthreshold of the next EAC-2000 down the corridor should be set suchthat it will attempt hand-ins to the mobile before that mobile dropsbelow the hand-back threshold of its current EAC-2000. Note thatthis is the case only for those mobiles that are driving down thecorridor away from the donor.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95) Page A-17
A.10 Dropped Calls Along Multi-Hop Path (Continued)• For mobiles that are travelingtoward the donor up a corridor, a too-high hand-back threshold at itscurrent EAC-2000 could also cause a call to be dropped. That is, thecurrent EAC-2000 may have depleted its hand-back attempts to themobile if that mobile has not progressed to the point where the signalfrom the next EAC-2000 up the corridor is stronger than the currentEAC-2000. This is not likely to occur because the hand-backthresholds must be set to a reasonably low level, as described earlier. • It also is possible to have a multi-hopsystem with adequate signal levels for the interconnecting path (dueto antenna heights at the EAC-2000s), but to have a gap between themobile coverage areas of the EAC-2000s. If this is the case, thenmobiles traveling either down or up the corridor will likely have theircalls dropped when they reach this area. To prevent this fromoccurring, the mobile coverage areas should be designed such thatoverlapping coverage is provided, preferably with received signallevels from the mobiles at or above -95 dBm in the overlap area. A.11 Unsuccessful SetupsMobile is identified as "RSSI > Threshold," and call setup is attempted, butthe mobile does not go to the boosted voice channel. These calls arelabeled as "unsuccessful setup" by SCS at the EAC-2000. In this situation, mobiles are not being handed-in from their original voicechannel by the EAC-2000. This can occur in areas where signals areapproximately the same at the mobile from the donor and from theEAC-2000. The EAC-2000 must be at least a few dB stronger than thedonor at the mobile before the EAC-2000 will capture that mobile. Thisis a desirable condition in that it keeps the mobile on the donor whensignals from the donor are adequate.Page A-18 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95)
A.12 Dropped Calls Due to SAT Fades An excessive number of SAT fades are noted in the call statistics, orcustomers are complaining that calls are being dropped.• If excessive SAT fades are noted with one RF board, then a problemmay exist with the reverse receiver portion (450 kHzlimiter-amplifier, discriminator, audio filter, audio switch) of thatboard. In this case, the RF board must be replaced.• If excessive SAT fades are noted with half or all RF boards, thencheck for SAT detector operation as follows:Enter the command. Check to see if the SATfree run frequency reads 6100 ± 50 Hz. Press to exit.Note that SAT fades will be recorded if the mobile subscriber hangs upwithin 10 seconds after the call is placed. This will result in a nominalnumber of SAT fades in the call statistics, which is considered normal.A defective reverse preamplifier could also cause an excessive number ofSAT fades. Check the reverse preamplifier for proper gain (9 dBminimum) and monitor its output with a spectrum analyzer to make surethat it is not generating noise or other spurious signals.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95) Page A-19
A.13 Cross-Talk Cross-talk is heard through the booster on some channels, particularly iftwo or more mobiles are close to the EAC-2000. Cross-talk can be a result of insufficient isolation between the M1/M2 anddonor antennas, and/or too-close spacing between the donor and boostedchannel assignments. • A minimum of 75 dBantenna isolation is recommended. Operation with antenna isolations of less than 80 dB is feasible ifsignal levels from the donor cell are stronger than -65 dBm. Referto the appendix on isolation for suggestions on achieving andmeasuring antenna isolation. For multi-hop installations, adjacent EAC-2000s alongthe corridor should not use channels from the same 21-channelspacing set. If the same channel set is used, the intermodulationproducts from the transmitter outputs in both directions will falldirectly on the receiver inputs. In many cases, the randomnessof the channel assignment by the donor site will minimize thisproblem, but there will be channel assignment combinations thatcould result in significant cross-talk due to intermod. It is bestto avoid this possibility by offsetting the channel sets betweenadjacent EAC-2000s. • Two or more mobiles thatare very close to the EAC-2000 (within a quarter of a mile or so)could cause cross-talk to a weak signal at the EAC-2000 from adistant mobile. The EAC-2000 automatically powers down the twostrong mobiles to minimize this condition, but there could be a fewseconds of cross-talk to the weak mobile until the EAC-2000 has hadtime to power down the strong mobiles.Page A-20 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95)
A.13 Cross-Talk (Continued)• Other noncellular transmittersthat may be operating near the EAC-2000 may also cause cross-talk.Standard procedures for solving this type of problem should be used.The presence of a foreign signal on one of the boosted reverse pathchannels can be checked as follows:1. Enter SET, disable RF board 1, select the hand-in thresholdmenu, record the value, and then set it to 0 (disabled). 2. Exit SET, and monitor SCS for current call activity.3. When all current calls are terminated, enter the followingsequence:Entry FunctionInvokes RF board communication modeEnables "receive only" mode.Either command shows reverse signallevels.4. Repeat the commands several times and note theRSSI levels on each reverse channel. A channel that has anabnormally high RSSI reading (i.e., -100 dBm or so) comparedto the other channels probably has a foreign signal present onone of the boosted reverse channels.5. When this test is completed, exit the RFC mode by pressing, and then enter SET to restore board 1 back to serviceand restore the hand-in threshold to its original value.• Nonlinear or oxidizedconnections near the EAC-2000 can also cause cross-talk. Again,standard procedures should be used to solve this type of problem.• A mobile operating in close proximity to theEAC-2000 may be susceptible to overload by the voice channel orhand-off transmitters. This may result in some mobiles respondingto a hand-off data transmission meant for a different mobile, therebycausing it to end up on the wrong channel.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95) Page A-21
A.14 Erratic Operation of Remote Modem Remote dial-up of the cellular modem results in either not connecting, orif a connection is made, excessive errors.This situation may be caused by any of several different factors:• If insufficient isolation existsbetween the modem mobile antenna and the donor or the M1 and M2antennas, RF overload of the mobile can cause modem connect prob-lems. Antenna isolation problems also cause some modem calls tobe degraded, while others are okay. This is due to the donor cellrandomly assigning the mobile to channels that fall on a spuriousproduct that is generated due to mobile overload. The use of anattenuator at the modem mobile's antenna connector can help in maycases. Contact Field Service for assistance.• Network limitations in some areas degradeoperation. The modems should be set to negotiate an acceptablespeed, but it may help to lower the baud rate to 2400 or even 1200,to force the modems to use a lower speed.• The direct path fromthe donor to the mobile may be inadequate or noisy. The EAC-2000normally does not boost the modem mobile, so that a voice channelwill not be used when remotely monitoring EAC-2000 If this is thecase, either a better antenna (gain) should be used with the modemmobile or the EAC-2000 should be allowed to boost the modemmobile.• If poor results persist, then it may be possiblethat the mobile is defective. Troubleshoot this condition bysubstitution only after the conditions outlined above have beenchecked. Page A-22 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95)
A.15 AlarmsOccasional Synthesizer Unlocked alarms are being logged, butthe boards remain in service.The unlock may be occurring only when transient conditions(e.g., high temperature or an adjacent board keyed) exist. Theboard should be replaced. The board should be replaced, but aslong as the software does not take the board out of service, itcan be left in operation.RF COM alarms are reported.A RF COM alarm indicates that a particular RF board failed torespond correctly to a command from the main controller board.An occasional RF COM alarm may be experienced, whichshould be of no concern because the board will continue tooperate normally. If a hardware problem exists, the maincontroller board will take the affected RF board out of serviceand generate an alarm for subsequent auto-dialing.An IF board generates a personality alarm and the board istaken out of service.A personality alarm indicates the wrong board type in the EAC-2000 (i.e., a JTACS board in an AMPS system).The system is logging PA alarms. PA alarms on a single PA are most often caused by PA failure.PA alarms on multiple PAs indicate a problem with the PAcage wiring or PA interface board. The following may alsocause PA alarms:• PA Power Low Alarm Point set too low• PA power potentiometer set too low• PA improperly seated in page cage• Connectors on PA cage or connectors on PA damaged• Faulty RF board (produces low input power to PA)AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95) Page A-23
(Continued)• Faulty PA interface board• Faulty PA cage or system wiring harness• Installation of PA into unit with power on (causing PA dcbreaker to trip)• Faulty PA dc breakerThe following troubleshooting procedure is recommended.1. Using the SET command, examine the PA Power LowPoint. Use Key Forward PA (Main Menu → PowerAmplifiers Menu → Key Forward PA) to key the PA andexamine the reported power. If the reported power is onlyslightly low, follow the PA power adjustment procedure(see Volume 1, Section 4.7) or adjust the PA Power LowAlarm Point.2. If the power reported with Key Forward PA is acceptable,bring the PA back into service. (See the NOTE followingstep 10 for instructions on how to do this.) Place test callsuntil the call comes up on the board/PA. If an alarmoccurs then, the RF board should be replaced. (Note:Certain failures on the RF board may cause power to begenerated with Key Forward PA but not when used torepeat a call. This is because the RF board uses a locallygenerated oscillator signal with Key Forward PA and usesthe received signal when a call is being repeated.)3. If zero or very low PA power is reported, unkey the PA.Remove it from the card cage and examine the connectorson the PA and in the associated PA slot. In particular,pay close attention to the RF power connectors and the dcpower pins.• If an RF connector in the PA is pushed in, then thePA will have to be replaced.• If the RF connector on the card cage receptacle ispushed out, it is possible to reseat the RF connectorby pushing it in from the rear of the PA cage whilethe PA is installed.4. Examine the coaxial cables that connect the RF card cageto the PA cage, looking for loose connections, brokencoaxial, etc.Page A-24 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95)
(Continued)5. Examine the PA dc breaker associated with the alarmedPA (refer back to Figure 4-3 in Volume 1 for breakerlocations). If the breaker is tripped, reset it.6. Even if no visible problem is seen, reinstall the alarmedPA. Key it again, and examine the reported power. If thepower is acceptable now, the problem may be that the PAwas improperly seated, or that an earlier PA replacementcaused the breaker to trip.7. If reseating the PA does not fix the problem, or if alarmsoccur on the same PA within a few days, replace the PA.Key the new PA and examine the power reported.8. If replacing the PA does not correct the problem, replacethe RF board (or temporarily exchange the board with aboard from another slot).9. If replacing the PA and the RF board does not correct theproblem, replace the PA interface board.10. If none of the above procedures correct the problem,replace the PA cage. Once a PA alarm occurs, that PA will show an Out-of-Service Alarm for an indefinite period of time and will notbe used for calls. To cause the system to more quickly test anout-of-service PA, the operator may reset the system either byusing the RES command or by powering off and then on.However, boosted control channel service will be lost for a fewseconds.It is possible to cause the software to retest a single RF boardand PA without loss of service. To do this, use the SETcommand to bring up RF board status (Main Menu → RFBoards Menu → Position x → Status), and select ENABLED.When the ENABLED option is chosen (even if the board isalready enabled) the board and PA will be fully initialized andretested. The board/PA will be momentarily keyed and allmajor functions—including synthesizer lock, PA power output,etc.—will be checked. If no alarms occur, the board and PAwill be returned to service. This operation will not causecontrol channel interruption unless it is performed on the boardthat is repeating the control channel. To see the results, exitSET and use the ALA command.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95) Page A-25
Page A-26 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95)
A.16 NoiseCustomers complain about noise bursts or periods of mutedaudio.Under certain circumstances, noise bursts or periods of mutedaudio may happen due to the following:• If themobile is in the fringe area of the EAC-2000 out of rangefrom the donor cell, then the mobile will undergo a seriesof noise bursts as the EAC-2000 attempts to hand themobile back to the donor cell, and then takes it back.Since the EAC-2000 has no way of knowing whether themobile is driving back to the donor or out into oblivion,this is a normal consequence. The impact of this operation can be reduced by increasingthe length of time between hand-back attempts, reducingthe number of hand-back attempts, and/or changing thehandback threshold. This can be accomplished throughthe SET menu under System Parameters. • There have been reportedinstances of noise bursts occasionally being heard onboosted mobiles when the EAC-2000 is setting up a newcall. These noise bursts occur when the hand-offtransmitter (PA 6) is keyed on for a hand-in transmissionand when the correct combination of boosted donorchannels exist. The EAC-2000 uses a different channel set for its boostedchannel set. The intermodulation products generated by thehigh-power voice channel signals therefore fall on a channel setdifferent from that used by the donor cell. Thus, theseintermodulation products do not fall on the donor channels thatare being boosted. Using a different channel set in this mannerallows the EAC-2000 to receive -75 dBm signals with just afew channels separation from the high-power +43 dBm boostedsignals. AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95) Page A-27
A.16.1 Burst Noise at the Mobile (Continued)However, hand-in transmissions by PA 6 are performed on thedonor channels. This allows an intermodulation product to begenerated, where the difference in frequency between any twoEAC-2000 boosted voice channels is mixed with the PA 6transmission. This product will thus fall on the adjacent (or amultiple of the adjacent, depending on the combination of EAC-2000 voice channels that are active) donor channel on which thehand-off transmission is made. If this product falls on one ofthe active donor channels which is being boosted, and it is ofsufficient amplitude, then a noise burst will be passed throughthe EAC-2000 to the mobile. If poor antenna isolation exists at the EAC-2000 the hand-offburst could be stronger than the donor voice signal that is beingboosted. In this case, the hand-off intermodulation product willcapture the forward voice channel in the EAC-2000 and thehand-off transmission will be passed to the mobile. In this case, the mobile would be handed to the new channelwith obvious disastrous results. This has been rare and hasoccurred only where the installer has completely disregarded theminimum recommended antenna separation requirements.Meeting the minimum antenna isolation requirements describedin the appendix on isolation will ensure that erroneous hand-offtransmissions are not passed to currently boosted mobiles. The noise burst can be minimized by increasing the isolationbetween the donor and the M1/M2 antennas. This is mosteasily accomplished by placing a 10 dB pad (with TNCconnections) at the input to the forward preamplifier. This padwould normally be placed on the RCV port of the donorduplexer, with the preamp cable being attached to the pad. Inmost cases, the EAC-2000 has sufficient forward gain marginto allow this to be done, even at the minimum acceptable donorinput signal level of -75 dBm. The donor signal will now read10 dB lower (i.e., -85 dBm). If the EAC-2000 is beingoperated at the minimum recommended input signal level, besure to also move the Donor RSSI Disconnect level in the SETmenu down by 10 dB.Page A-28 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95)
(Continued)For donor signals that are stronger than -60 dBm or so, it isrecommended that the pad be placed in the D1 antenna leadrather than at the forward preamp input. The reason for this isthat the reverse signal will likely need to be reduced to preventthe signals arriving at the donor from being "too hot" andtherefore being above the mobile power cutback threshold at thedonor. This pad may be placed either externally on the D1 typeN connector, or on the antenna port (TNC) of the donorduplexer. In either case, the power handling capacity of the padshould be one watt minimum. The noise burst problem does not exist in the reversedirection since there are no "equivalent" transmissions made inthe reverse direction. An alternative approach to eliminating the PA 6 hand-off noiseburst would be to use a boosted channel set separation that isdifferent than the separation used at the donor cell. Forexample, if the donor cell uses a 21-channel spacing, then theEAC-2000 can be assigned a 22-20-22-20-22 channel spacingscheme. This will ensure that intermodulation productsgenerated by PA 6 and the boosted output channels will not fallin one of the EAC-2000 input channels. The EAC-2000 PA outputs occasionally remain with a verynoisy signal output after a call has been terminated.This can happen with an improperly set donor RSSI thresholdor if the donor RSSI threshold has been disabled, and partic-ularly if the SAT fade timer is set for an abnormally long peri-od. To prevent this from happening, the SAT fade time in theEAC-2000 should be set to match the donor cell SAT fade time,and the donor RSSI threshold should be set 10 dB below thesignal level received from the donor cell site.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95) Page A-29
A.17 Trouble Locking Onto Control ChannelSubscribers have trouble locking onto the EAC-2000 boosted controlchannel.The EAC-2000 contains a crystal-based reference oscillator. The frequencycalibration of the reference oscillator is trimmed as close as possible at thefactory. However, like all crystals, the oscillator exhibits an agingcharacteristic, and the calibration may drift over time. If drifting does occur, the frequency of the EAC-2000 boosted controlchannel may need to be adjusted.Refer to Appendix C for adjustment procedures.Page A-30 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95)
$SSHQGL[%,VRODWLRQContentsB.1 Need for Isolation ...................................... B-3B.2 Achieving Antenna Isolation ............................... B-4B.2.1 Physical Separation .............................. B-4B.2.2 Hints for Optimizing Physical Separation ............... B-6B.2.3 Operation with Antenna Isolation of Less Than 80 dB ...... B-9B.2.4 Additional Techniques ............................ B-9B.3 How to Measure Antenna Isolation .......................... B-10B.3.1 Using a Spectrum Analyzer with Tracking Generator ...... B-10B.3.2 Using a Spectrum Analyzer with Signal Generator ....... B-11B.3.3 Using a Spectrum Analyzer and EAC-2000 ............ B-11AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95) Page B-1
B.1 Need for IsolationIn order to discuss narrowband high-power frequency translated repeaters, itis necessary to understand the concept of antenna isolation. This is mosteasily explained by discussing broadband on-frequency boosters (bi-directional amplifiers).Broadband cellular boosters, such as the Antenna Specialists Co.’s Extend-A-Cell® II and Decibel Products' Prism Plus™, require isolation between thedonor and coverage antennas to prevent direct RF oscillation. This oscillationis induced by positive feedback when the output signal is being received andre-amplified by the input. This condition is similar to the audio feedback thatsometimes occurs in public address systems (the squeal or screech).In general, this isolation must be at least 10 dB in excess of the gain set inthe device. If a broadband booster gain of 75 dB is desired, antenna isolationmust be at least 85 dB. This isolation may vary as a function of frequency,so it is important that the isolation be checked across the entire cellularspectrum. It is also important to note that isolation may be degraded byantenna icing, additional antennas or feedlines installed on the antennasupport, as well as other factors.The EAC-2000 high-power translating repeater system also needs asignificant amount of isolation to operate properly. System gain in the EAC-2000 exceeds 120 dB, but direct RF oscillation is not a factor due tofrequency translation and narrowband filtering. Isolation can be significantlybelow 120 dB.There are two reasons that antenna isolation is required in the EAC-2000system:• Because only a few channels may exist between the input and outputfrequencies, the inherent in the high-power transmitting pathcan the donor (forward path) receiver.• The high-power sent by PA 6 on the M2 antenna canmix with the control channel and any voice channels in use and cause. If one of these products falls on the donorinput channel of a call in progress, the mobile may hear a noise burst,or worse, respond to a hand-in message. The result would be a "cross-connected" call or two mobiles on the same EAC-2000 output channel.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95) Page B-3
B.1 Need for Isolation (Continued)If antenna isolation in excess of 80 dB is achievable, then the EAC-2000 willoperate successfully with no other action being required. This appendixdescribes—• Recommended installation techniques and practical hints for achievingantenna isolation. • Techniques for obtaining successful operation under less than idealconditions (< 80 dB antenna isolation). • Techniques for measuring isolation.B.2 Achieving Antenna IsolationThere are two primary ways of achieving antenna system isolation:• between the antennas. This is sometimesaugmented by placing physical barriers between the antennas if there isinsufficient physical space.• in series with the donor antenna path.Physical isolation can be achieved by either vertical or horizontalseparation. Horizontal separation is generally not recommended byitself as it requires a significantly greater distance to obtain theequivalent isolation that would be provided by vertical separation. Horizontal separation is generally successful only when there issome physical barrier between the antennas.Figure B-1 illustrates the isolation typically obtainable withhorizontal separation, unity gain antennas, and no interveningstructures. Note that more than 200 feet (60 meters) is required toobtain only 65 dB of isolation. This distance is impractical formost installations. However, this isolation would be increased bythe front-to-back ratios of directional antennas and transmissionline losses.Figure B-2 shows the isolation obtainable with vertical separation. Twenty-five feet can give up to 65 dB, while 60 feet (18.3 meters)provides more than 75 dB. This will vary depending upon thevertical beamwidths of both antennas, their directionalcharacteristics (if any), their placement on the supporting structure,and the composition of the supporting structure.Page B-4 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95)
Figure B-1. Antenna Isolation versus Horizontal SeparationFigure B-2. (Dipole) Antenna Isolation versus Vertical SeparationAMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95) Page B-5
(Continued)Higher isolations for a given antenna separation are possible wheredirectional antennas are used and their coverage patterns do notoverlap. Metal towers often give better isolation than woodenpoles when directional antennas are mounted on opposite sides ofthe tower. Note that reflections from nearby structures (withinseveral hundred feet) become predominant when trying to achieveisolation in excess of 80 dB.The following list illustrates some of the antenna installationtechniques that may be used to optimize antenna isolation. FigureB-3 depicts a typical tower-mounted antenna installation.1. Place the antennas vertically in-line on the mounting structureto take full advantage of the deep nulls off the ends of high-gain vertically polarized antennas.2. Use high gain antennas. High gain antennas typically havesharper nulls off the ends of the antenna. The use of acircular dish-type parabolic reflector donor antenna reducesthe vertical as well as the horizontal beamwidth of theantenna and thus provides higher isolation to antennasmounted above or below it than does a partial parabolicreflector or corner reflector with a single dipole element. Consider a 60-degree 17 dBd gain sector type antenna over apartial parabolic antenna with a dipole element as this antennatypically has a 6–7 degree vertical beamwidth.3. Consider using a metal antenna support instead of a woodenpole. Isolations observed on wooden poles have been highlyvariable, with some installations having excellent isolation(particularly with directional antennas for both the mobilecoverage and donor antennas) while others have had poorerisolation than that achievable on a metal tower. Also,wooden poles with their attendant antenna installationarrangements (e.g., wooden cross-arms) are subject towarpage or out-of-plumb installation. This can seriously tiltthe antennas and cause poor coverage.Page B-6 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95)
Figure B-3. Tower Mounted Antenna InstallationAMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95) Page B-7
(Continued)4. In addition to vertical separation, place the donor and M1/M2antennas on opposite sides of a metal tower. While thiscontradicts technique 1 above somewhat, the presence of themetal structure between the two antenna systems, whilemaintaining vertical separation, can sometimes provide anadditional 10 dB, or more, of isolation.5. In difficult cases, the use of an ice shield or other metal flat-screen structure between the vertically separated donor andM1/M2 antennas can be used to improve isolation. The metalscreen should have bonded joints and be a minimum of 3 feet(1 meter) square. A 10-feet-square (3-meter-square) screengives superior performance, but may prove to be physicallyimpossible to keep on the tower or pole. The screen shouldbe mounted 1 to 2 feet (.5 to 1 meter) above the donorantenna, shielding it from all view of the coverage antennas. It may be necessary to "fine-tune" the shield placement foroptimum performance.6. Structures found on the roofs of many buildings can provideisolation between antennas even if little or no verticalseparation is possible. For example, mount the donor antennaover the side of the building and mount the coverageantennas at the other side of the roof, preferably with apenthouse or elevator shaft between. Sometimes a penthouse,especially if it is of metal construction, can give sufficientisolation by itself. If construction is of wood or block, metalsheeting may be placed on the inside or outside walls toincrease isolation.7. Very high isolations can be achieved by using earth as theblocking medium. Isolations in excess of 130 dB have beenreported for tunnel applications. Nearby structures, such as other towers orbuildings, can degrade antenna isolation if bothantennas are exposed to reflections from thesestructures.Page B-8 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95)
When separation alone cannot give the required isolation, it isnecessary to use attenuators in the donor signal path. Attenuators, or "pads," will increase isolation dB for dB. That is, a 10 dBpad will improve the isolation by 10 dB. Although a -75 dBm donor input level is specified, this includes a10 dB fade margin which is seldom needed on the point-to-pointpaths found in typical EAC-2000 installations. Also, a high D1input signal level from the donor equates to a high signal levelbeing sent back to the donor from the EAC-2000. This can causethe cell site to make power control decisions based on EAC signalstrength, which could cause dropped calls. In view of the above, the following attenuation guidelines arerecommendations: • With donor signal > -65 dBm, use a 10 dB or greater pad atthe D1 duplexer ANT port. Aim for donor RSSI of -75 dBm± 5 dBm• With donor signal < -65 dBm but > -76 dBm, use a 10 dBpad at the D1 duplexer LOW port. Donor signal levels (afterthe pad) should not fall below -85 dBm. If the signal levelsmay fall below -78 dBm, the Donor RSSI release thresholdmust be reset to -90 dBm.If interference or cross-connected calls still persist after allattempts at improving antenna isolation (either physically orartificially with attenuators) have been exhausted, the followingsuggestions may yield further improvement:• Interference due to the transmitter noise floor can be reducedby increasing the separation between the donor and boostedchannel sets. Increasing the separation to at least 6 and nomore than 11 channels will help many stubborn cases.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95) Page B-9
(Continued)• If short noise bursts or cross-connected calls due to hand-offPA intermod are reported, they can be eliminated by adoptingan alternating boosted channel set spacing. That is, instead ofsetting the boosted channel set spacing to the same increment(usually 21) as the donor, alternate the channel spacing on a20-22-20-22-20 channel basis. This will move any locallygenerated intermodulation products off the channels that arebeing received from the donor.B.3 How to Measure Antenna IsolationAntenna isolation is most effectively measured using a spectrumanalyzer with tracking generator. 1. Connect the tracking generator output to the end of thetransmission line going to the M1 or M2 antenna. 2. Connect the spectrum analyzer to the end of the transmissionline going to the D1 antenna. 3. Set the tracking generator output at maximum (usually0 dBm). Use an accessory amplifier, if available, to boostthis output to at least +20 dBm. 4. Set the spectrum analyzer to sweep first the low split andthen the high split. The isolation is then the spectrumanalyzer reading plus the tracking generator output. (Forexample, if the spectrum analyzer reads -50 dBm and thetracking generator output is +20 dBm, the isolation is 70 dB.)Note that isolation is often frequency dependent, with severalnulls and peaks possible in each band. The highest peak ineither band defines the minimum isolation that is achievedwith this particular antenna configuration. Be sure todiscount any signals being received by the antenna connectedto the spectrum analyzer. Note these signals with thetracking generator turned off. These signals will likely behigher than the signal being generated by the trackinggenerator and may make measuring the actual isolationdifficult. Also, many spectrum analyzers have difficultymeasuring signals below -60 dBm to -70 dBmPage B-10 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95)
(Continued)when sweeping a broad bandwidth. This may limit the ability toaccurately measure isolation unless smaller bandwidths are used.A second method of measuring isolation uses a signal generatorrather than the tracking generator as the signal source. The signalgenerator frequency and amplitude can be manually changed toavoid conflict with existing strong signals from the donor (andother) cell sites. The spectrum analyzer sweep bandwidth can alsobe narrowed to achieve greater sensitivity for measuring actualisolation. The signal generator should be manually swept throughboth the low split and the high split bands to determine theminimum isolation point.A third method to measure isolation uses the EAC-2000 itself asthe signal source and is relatively simple to accomplish with aspectrum analyzer and the following procedure. (This procedureshould be done after the unit is programmed and the combiner istuned.)1. Connect the D1 antenna feedline to a spectrum analyzer.2. Go into SET and select menu B, Power Amplifiers.3. Key up PA 1 through PA 11 in sequence and note the levelon the spectrum analyzer for each channel. Also note the PApower reading in dBm.4. Calculate the isolation:Isolation = PA dBm -3 dB (combiner/duplexer loss) - D1 dBm.Since this D1 dBm measurement is a negative number, thiscan be simplified:Isolation = PA dBm + |D1 dBm| -3AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95) Page B-11
(Continued) PA dBm = 46, D1 dBm = -30, |D1 dBm| = 30 Isolation = 46 +30 -3Isolation = 73 dB 5. Take the highest readings obtained from PAs 1–5 and 7–11 tocalculate an isolation value for the M1 antenna. Take thereadings from PA 6 to calculate the isolation value for theM2 antenna. To get a more accurate reading of isolation onthe M2 antenna, we recommend temporarily exchanging theM1/M2 antenna connections and rereading the valuesreceived when keying PAs 1–5 and 7–11.Page B-12 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95)
$SSHQGL[&5HIHUHQFH2VFLOODWRU$GMXVWPHQWC.1 Adjusting the Reference Oscillator (If Needed)The EAC-2000 contains a crystal-based reference oscillator. The frequencycalibration of the reference oscillator is trimmed as close as possible at thefactory and .However, like all crystals, the oscillator exhibits an aging characteristic, andthe calibration may drift over time. To maintain the specified accuracy overtime, the frequency of the EAC-2000 boosted control channel should bechecked periodically and adjusted, if necessary, to compensate for long-termaging. Do NOT use voice channels as a basis for frequency adjustment,since the EAC-2000 oscillator accuracy contributes only a small part of theaccuracy on voice channels.There are two approved vendors for the oscillator. Thefollowing shows a typical adjustment session for one of them.The procedure for the other vendor merely uses T8 in place ofT7 in the following sequence. The easiest way to tell which vendor oscillator is installed issimply to try one. If the software indicates "acknowledgeerrors," or if the frequency does not move, then use the other.At the command entry level prompt >:RFC<CR> TYPE "H" FOR HELP#T7<CR> TRIMMING POT 7ENTER C, U or D (Center, Up, orDown); RET when finished:CUUUUUDDU<CR> (no response)#<ESC> >AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95) Page C-1
(Continued)The pot should be centered any time an adjustment is made. This not only centers the pot, but also ensures that thesoftware and hardware variables are initialized properly. Thismay actually cause the frequency to move several parts off. If the frequency seems to be very far off,especially at installation time, be sure the measurementequipment you are using is calibrated accurately. The U’s and D’s may then be used to trim it back in.Page C-2 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Appendices (27-7658-3, 12/95)
*ORVVDU\DQG,QGH[27-7659-2Issue 12/95© Copyright 1995 Allen Telecom SystemsAll Rights Reserved
*ORVVDU\AMPS – Advanced Mobile Phone System. Cellular standard that provides compatible operationin the 824–849 and 869–894 MHz band.Boost – To receive, amplify, and reradiate signals to fill in weak coverage areas.Boosted Control Channel – The control channel used between the booster and the mobiles in thebooster coverage area (a different frequency than the donor control channel).Booster – A system that boosts or repeats.Booster Coverage Area – The area where subscribers obtain coverage through the booster.Booster Link Channel – A dedicated channel in an EAC-2000 in Multi-hop configuration. Whenthe EAC-2000 responds to a call, it transmits a continuous data message over the booster linkchannel, which the next booster in the chain decodes in order to identify the channel on which thecall is boosted.Command Entry Level – The level at which the software system accepts three-letter commands.Indicated by the prompt character >.D1 Antenna – The primary antenna facing the donor cell site, used for reception of control andvoice channel signals from the donor cell site and for transmission of control and voice signalsback to the cell site.Donor Cell Site – The cell site in communication with the booster.Donor Control Channel – The control channel used between the cell site and the booster (and allthe mobiles in direct contact with the cell site).EAC-2000™ – The trademarked name for a booster made by Allen Telecom Systems.Forward Path – The path taken by the RF signal transmitted by the donor cell, which is received,amplified, and reradiated by a booster and received ultimately by a subscriber in the boostercoverage area.Grab-back Message – A second voice channel assignment message sent to a mobile leaving thebooster coverage area, directing the mobile to come back to the boosted voice channel. If thedonor's signal is stronger, the mobile will ignore the grab-back message; if the EAC-2000 signalis stronger, the mobile will come back to the boosted voice channel.Hand-back Threshold – Signal level at which a mobile being boosted becomes a candidate forreturning to the original donor site voice channel. This threshold is set as an operating parameterfor the individual system.AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Glossary and Index (27-7659-2, 12/95) Glos-1
Hand-in Threshold – Signal level at which a mobile on one of the donor voice channels becomesa candidate for boosting. This threshold is set as a parameter for the individual system.Hand-off – The process of transferring a boosted call back to the donor cell or to another boosteror cell.Inactivity Timeout – A programmable period of time after which, if no keyboard entries havebeen received, the EAC-2000 software system will terminate any running commands and end thesession. M1 Antenna – Primary antenna facing the mobiles in the booster coverage area. Used fortransmission of the boosted control channel and boosted voice channels to the mobiles, and fordiversity reception from the mobiles.M2 Antenna – Secondary antenna facing the mobiles in the booster coverage area, used forsending hand-off messages to the mobiles and for diversity reception from the mobiles.Mobile Antenna – Antenna for the installed cellular mobile facing the donor cell site.Modem Mobile MIN – Assigned mobile identification number of the mobile cellular telephone.Multi-hop Operation – Two or more EAC-2000 units set up to operate together in a line toprovide seamless cellular coverage (e.g., along a traffic corridor). Each booster in the linecommunicates with the previous and next unit.PA – Power AmplifierPrimary Donor Cell – When a booster is adjacent to several cell sites, the control channel of thecell with the best signal is chosen as the donor control channel, and this cell is referred to as theprimary donor cell.Remote Link – Modem link between the EAC-2000 and another terminal. The remote terminalmay be used to exercise the system.Repeater – Synonymous with booster, usually applied to boosters that translate frequencies. TheEAC-2000 is type-accepted as a repeater.Reverse Path – The path taken by the RF signal transmitted by a subscriber mobile in the boostercoverage area, which is received, amplified, and reradiated by a booster and received ultimatelyby the donor cell site.RSSI – Received Signal Strength Indicator.SAT – Supervisory Access Tone.Glos-2 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Glossary and Index (27-7659-2, 12/95)
,QGH[ Bold Romannumerals indicate volumenumbers.Accessories, III: 3-4 replacing, Apps.: Parts-1 to -5ac breaker locations, I: 4-3, 4-4 connections, I: 3-5 (See also Power)ALA. (See Command(s))Alarm report. (See Command(s), ALA)Alarm(s), Apps.: A-23 connecting external, I: 3-7 to -9, III: 3-3 critical, I: 4-23 to -24, 5-5, II: 2-11, 2-58 log only, I: 4-24 programming, I: 4-19 to -24 RSSI, II: 2-11 (See also individual alarms—e.g., PA alarms)Amplifiers. (See Control channel amplifiers,PAs, Voice channel amplifiers)Antenna(s) connectors, illustrated, I: 3-6 D1, I: 1-7,2-4,2-5,2-6,2-7,2-9, III: 2-3 installation, illustrated, I: 2-8, Apps.: B-7 installing, I: 3-6, Apps.: B-6 to -12 isolation, I: 2-6, 2-7 to -8, 3-6, 7-3, Apps.: B-4 to -10 M1/M2, I: 2-4, 2-5, 2-6, 2-7, III: 2-3 mobile, I: 2-4, 2-5, 2-6, 2-7, III: 2-3 placement/location of, I: 2-2, 2-6 return loss low alarm point, II: 2-10, 2-50 separation, I: 2-6 types, I: 2-4 to-5, III: 2-3Auto-dial delay between retries, II: 2-6, 2-32 dial-up phone numbers, II: 2-6, 2-30 enable, II: 2-5, 2-29 max trial period, II: 2-6, 2-32 trials max, II: 2-6, 2-31Backplane. (See EAC-2000, diagrams, System boards)Back-up control channel option, II: 2-4, 2-22Baud rate. (See Modem—setup, local port,remote port)Block diagram. (See EAC-2000, diagrams)Boards. (See System boards)Boosted control channel(s), II: 2-4, 2-20, III: 2-1 defined, I: 1-3Boosted control channel(s) (Continued) selecting, I: 2-12, 7-4 to -5 setting, I: 4-16Boosted voice channel(s), II: 2-5, 2-27 defaults, II: 2-5 selecting, I: 2-16, 7-4 to -5 setting, I: 4-19Booster link channel, I: 4-15, 8-5, II: 2-4,2-24 - previous EAC, I: 4-15, II: 2-5, 2-24Breaker. (See ac)Burse noise, Apps.: A-26Cabinet footprint, illustrated, I: 3-4 size, I: 2-3, III: 3-1Call processing described, I: 5-4 to -6III: 2-10 to -13 parameters, II: 2-9 problems, Apps.: A-10 recommendations, II: 2-9Card cage wiring diagram. (See EAC-2000, diagrams)Cellular boosters operation, illustrated, III: 1-2 use of, III: 1-2Channel(s) assignment, III: 1-3 for combined multi-cab/-hop/-donoroperation, I: 10-2 selecting, I: 2-11 (See also Control channel(s); Directed retry channels)Combined operation. (See Multi-cabinet,Multi-hop, Multi-donor)Combiner cavity, illustrated, I: 4-27 reverse, III: 2-8 tuning, I: 4-26 to -30Command(s) ALA, I: 4-13, II: 3-14 to -19 basic, I: 4-7 to -10 DCH, II: 3-27 to -28AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Glossary and Index (27-7659-2, 12/95) Index-1
Command(s) (Continued) DCS, II: 3-20 to -26 entering, I: 4-8, II: 1-6 to -8 listed, I: 4-9, II: 1-9 LOC, I: 4-10, II: 1-8 MIN, II: 3-30 to -31Command(s) (Continued) PWR, II: 3-12 RES, I: 4-8, 4-10, II: 1-8 REV, II: 3-32 RSS, II: 3-9 to -10 SAT, II: 3-13 SCS, II: 3-5 to -8 SET, I: 4-8, II: 2-1 to -60 special, II: 4-1 to -2 SSR, I: 4-9, II: 3-11 SSS, I: 4-13, II: 3-1 to -4 syntax, I: 4-7, II: 1-6 system monitoring, II: 3-1 to -32 TIM, I: 4-32, II: 3-29Communication parameters. (SeeModem—setup, Local port, Remoteport)Compliance with standards, III: 3-4Console timeout, II: 2-5, 2-29Continuous cycles, escaping from, I: 4-8, II: 1-8Control channel(s) amplifiers, III: 2-1 boosting, I: 1-5 parameters, II: 2-4 response, I: 7-1, III: 2-14 to -15 RF board to use for, II: 2-4, 2-20 state during "all channels busy", II: 2-4, 2-21 (See also Boosted control channel(s);Donor control channel(s); Revertivecontrol channel; Substitute controlchannel)Controller board. (See System boards)Critical alarm(s). (See Alarms)Cross-talk, Apps.: A-21D1. (See Antenna(s))DCH. (See Command(s))DCS. (See Command(s))Delay between hand-in attempts. (See Hand-in)Dial command. (See Modem—setup)Dial prefix string (See Modem—setup)Dial-up phone numbers. (See Auto-dial)Directed retry channels, I: 2-14, 4-15, II: 2-4, 2-22 setting, I: 4-16Disconnect parameters, II: 2-9Donor control channel(s), I: 1-6, 4-24, II: 2-4, 2-19, III: 2-11 defined, I: 1-3 identifying, I: 2-11Donor control channel(s) (Continued)RSSI, alarm points, I: 4-24, II: 2-59 setting, I: 4-15 (See also Control channel(s))Donor RSSI, II: 2-9, 2-46Donor voice channel(s) identifying, I: 2-15 to -16 lists, I: 1-6, II: 2-5, 2-26 to -27, III: 2-11 RSSI, high alarm point, I: 4-24, II: 2-60 setting, I: 4-17 to -18Doors, securing, I: 3-5Dropped calls, Apps.: A-6, A-14, A-18, A-20Dynamic forward power control algorithm,II: 2-52EAC-2000 answering, I: 5-4 combined with EAC-IVs, I: 7-4 concept, III: 2-1 to -2 diagrams, end of Vol. 3 illustrated, I: 3-2, 3-3, III: 3-6, 3-7, 3-8 operation, I: 1-4 to -7, II: 1-2 to -5, III: 2-3 to -5 originating, I: 5-5 specifications, III: 3-1 to -3Environment, III: 3-1Equipment characteristics, III: 3-4 to -5Erratic operation of EAC-2000, Apps.: A-23External alarms/controls. (See Alarms)Fan activation. (See PA, temperature)Figures, listed, I: vi, II: vi, III: vFootprint. (See Cabinet)Forward PA power low alarm point, II: 2-3, 2-15 power step, II: 2-3, 2-15 (See also Key forward PA)Forward path, I: 1-2, 1-4, III: 2-4 defined, I: 1-3Frequency allocation, I: 1-4, III: 1-3Gain, III: 3-2Grab-back, I: 1-7, III: 2-12Index-2 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Glossary and Index (27-7659-2, 12/95)
Hand-back, I: 1-6, III: 2-12 max num attempts per call, II: 2-9, 2-47 min delay between attempts, II: 2-9, 2-48 mobile power step, II: 2-8, 2-43Hand-back/grab-back control, II: 2-9, 2-49Hand-back threshold(s), II: 2-8, 2-43, III: 2-12 determining, I: 6-1 setting, I: 6-2 setting for Multi-hop, I: 7-5 to -7Hand-in, III: 2-11 delay between attempts, II: 2-8, 2-45 excessive, Apps.: A-15 mobile power step, II: 2-8, 2-43 none (troubleshooting), Apps.: A-16Hand-in threshold(s), II: 2-8, 2-41 determining, I: 6-1 setting, I: 6-2Hand-off(s) cellular system, Apps.: A-7 messages, III: 2-5 noise bursts, Apps.: A-26 to a new cell, III: 2-13Hang-up string (See Modem—setup)Hardware installation, I: 3-1 to -10Inactivity timeout, I: 4-10, II: 1-8Initialization string (See Modem—setup) Inputs/outputs alarm states, II: 2-10 electrical specifications for, I: 3-8 external analog, II: 2-55 external digital, II: 2-56, 2-57 typical wiring for, I: 3-9Interchangeability of equipment, III: 3-4Interface specifications, III: 3-3Isolation achieving, Apps.: B-4 to -9 measuring, I: 2-9, Apps.: B-10 to -12 need for, Apps.: B-3Key forward PA, II: 2-3, 2-16Key reverse PA, II: 2-3, 2-16Local link, III: 2-16 establishing, II: 1-2 to -3Local port baud rate, II: 2-7, 2-35 comm params, II: 2-7, 2-36Locking onto control channel, Apps.: A-29Log only alarms (See Alarms)M1, M2. (See Antenna(s))Main harness wiring diagram. (SeeEAC-2000, diagrams)MDU (See Multi-donor operation)Mechanical installation, I: 3-4 to -5 specifications, III: 3-1Menu(s) Alarms, II: 2-50 Call Processing Parameters, II: 2-48 Control Channels, II: 2-19Menu(s) (Continued) Critical Alarms, II: 2-58 Disconnect Control, II: 2-46 External Analog Inputs, II: 2-55 External Digital Inputs, II: 2-56 External Digital Outputs, II: 2-57 Modem Control, II: 2-28 Power Amplifiers, II: 2-14 RF Board Position, II: 2-13 RF boards, II: 2-12 SET Main, II: 2-12 SET, using, I: 4-11, II: 1-7 SET menu map, I: 4-12, II: 2-2 Site ID, II: 2-17 System Parameters, II: 2-17 Thresholds and Power Control, II: 2-40 Voice Channels, II: 2-25Microcontroller, III: 2-6MIN. (See Command(s))Mobile antenna (See Antenna(s)) checking out, I: 5-2 dynamic power control threshold, II: 2-8,2-41 power control causes PA powercutback, II: 2-10, 2-53 power step, I: 4-25, II: 2-6, 2-39 programming, I: 5-2 RSSI > threshold, II: 2-9, 2-49 shelf, III: 2-9 (See also EAC-2000,diagrams) setting up service, I: 5-2Modem, III: 3-5 control parameters, II: 2-5 to -6 equipment, I: 5-1 erratic operation, Apps.: A-22 mobile MIN, I: 4-25, II: 2-6, 2-38, 3-30 mobile power step, II: 2-6, 2-39 setup parameters, II: 2-6 to -7 setup strings, II: 2-6, 2-33 to -35AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Glossary and Index (27-7659-2, 12/95) Index-3
Mounting the cabinet, I: 3-4 surface, I: 2-4Multi-cabinet operation, I: 10-1 to -3Multi-donor activation threshold, I: 8-2, 8-4,II: 2-8, 2-42, III: 2-14Multi-donor operation, I: 1-6, 2-1, 2-6, 8-1 to -4, III: 2-13 installing EAC-2000 for, I: 8-2 with Multi-cabinet/-hop, I: 10-1 to -3Multi-hop operation, I: 2-2, 2-6, 4-13, 7-1 to -8, II: 2-4, 2-18, III: 2-14 to -15Multi-hop operation (Continued) enabling, I: 7-3 to -4 installing EAC-2000 for, I: 7-2 to -8 with Multi-cabinet/-donor, I: 10-1 to -3 selecting boosted channels for, I: 7-4Noise, Apps.: A-27Optimizing performance, I: 6-1 to -2Output power, setting, I: 4-26 to -31Outputs. (See Inputs/Outputs)Parameter(s) alarm, II: 2-10 to -11 initial, I: 4-13 to -25 power amplifier, II: 2-3 RF board, II: 2-3 summaries, II: 2-3 to -11 system, II: 2-4 to -9Parts, ordering, Apps.: Parts-1 to -5PA(s) 45-watt, III: 2-8 cage wiring diagram. (See EAC-2000,diagrams) to antenna loss - high alarm point, II: 2-10, 2-51 interface board, III: 2-9 power levels, adjusting, I: 4-26 to -30 power potentiometer, illustrated, I: 4-28 setting power low alarm points, I: 4-31 temp - fan activation point, II: 2-10, 2-51 temp - high alarm point, II: 2-10, 2-51 temp - PA power cutback point, II: 2-10,2-52Password(s), I: 4-25, II: 2-5, 2-28 to -29 bypassing, I: 1-3Pin out, external alarm/control connector, I: 3-7Power class. (See Station power class) control parameters, II: 2-8, 2-40 to -45 cutback point. (See PA, temp) levels (See PAs) output, III: 3-2 service requirements, I: 2-3 specifications, III: 3-1 (See also ac connections)Power supply described, III: 2-9 shelf wiring diagram, III: 3-10 voltage parameters, II: 2-10, 2-53 to -54Powering up/down, I: 4-3Preamplifiers, III: 2-8Primary donor cell, I: 1-7, III: 2-10, 2-11PWR. (See Command(s))Quick start procedures, I: ixReference oscillator adjustment, Apps.: C-1 to -2Regulator module, III: 2-9 wiring, illustrated, III: 3-9Reliability, III: 3-5Remote link, III: 2-16 EAC-2000 answering, I: 5-3 EAC-2000 originating, I: 5-4 establishing, II: 1-4 to -5 installing, I: 5-1 to -6 testing, I: 5-4 to -6Remote port baud rate, II: 2-7, 2-36 comm params, II: 2-7, 2-37 handshake, II: 2-7, 2-38Report values, setting, I: 4-32Reports/readings, examples ALA, II: 3-15 DCH, II: 3-28 DCS, II: 3-21 MIN, II: 3-30 PWR, II: 3-12 RSSI, II: 3-9 SAT, II: 3-13 SCS, II: 3-5 SSS, II: 3-2 TIM, II: 3-29REV. (See Command(s))Reverse PA power low alarm point, II: 2-3, 2-16 power set, II: 2-3, 2-15 (See also Key reverse PA)Index-4 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Glossary and Index (27-7659-2, 12/95)
Reverse path, I: 1-3, 1-4, III: 1-2, 2-4 setting output power, I: 4-30Revertive control channel option, I: 2-12, II: 2-4, 2-23, 3-25RF board(s), III: 2-6 diversity, II: 2-3, 2-14 status, II: 2-3, 2-13 to use for control channel, II: 2-4, 2-20RF specifications, III: 3-2RSS. (See Command(s))RSSI, III: 3-2 alarm points, II: 2-11, 2-59 averaging speed, II: 2-8, 2-44 (See also Donor RSSI, Mobile RSSI, Donor control channel(s), Donor voice channel(s))SAT fade timeout, II: 2-9, 2-47 (See also Command(s))SCS. (See Command(s))Separation of antennas, I: 2-6, 3-6, Apps.: B-4 to -6 (See also Antenna(s))Service for mobile, setting up, I: 5-2 skills required , III: 3-5SET, II: 2-1 to -60 exiting, I: 4-11, II: 1-7 menu map, I: 4-12, II: 2-2 moving through menus, I: 4-11, II: 1-7Set defaults feature, II: 2-60Setups, unsuccessful, Apps.: A-18Signal level/strength, I: 2-6, 3-7, 7-3 at MDU, I: 8-3 measuring, I: 2-9 to -10 weak, from donor, Apps.: A-6Site ID, I: 4-14, II: 2-4, 2-18 requirements, I: 2-2 to -4Space recommendations, I: 2-3Specifications, III: 3-1 to -4SSS. (See Command(s))Start-up procedures. (See Quick start)Station power class selective boosting, II: 2-8, 2-45Substitute control channel, I: 2-13, 4-15, II: 2-4, 2-23SYN LOC alarms, Apps.: A-23System boards, III: 2-6 to -9 backplane, III: 2-7 controller, III: 2-7 PA interface, III: 2-9 (See also RF boards)System status, I: 4-13Talk-back range, Apps.: A-11Temperature. (See PA, temperature)Terminal connecting, I: 4-5 location of connector, illustrated, I: 4-5Threshold(s) parameters, II: 2-8, 2-40 to -45 programming, I: 4-19 to -24TIM. (See Command(s))Time values, setting, I: 4-32Transmitter combiner. (See Combiner)Transmitter output noise, Apps.: A-28Troubleshooting, Apps.: A-1 to -27Voice channel(s) amplifiers, III: 2-2 boosting, I: 1-5 parameters, II: 2-5 (See also Boosted voice channel(s); Donor voice channel(s))Warranty, iiiWiring diagrams. (See EAC-2000, diagrams)AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Glossary and Index (27-7659-2, 12/95) Index-5
3DUWV$FFHVVRULHV2UGHU,QIRUPDWLRQThis section provides procedures for ordering or exchanging parts and accessories, alist of replaceable assemblies for the EAC-2000™, and reference drawings. Warrantyinformation is given in the front of this manual. Construction is comprised of machine-placed surfacemount components. Special factory test fixtures are required for repair.Replacing Parts and AccessoriesTo order spare or replacement assemblies, refer to the following instructions:Failed EAC-2000 parts or assemblies that are still under the manufacturer’swarranty can be exchanged by following these procedures:1. Obtain the EAC-2000 serial number. The serial number is labeled on eachof the system components.2. Call the Extend-A-Cell Hotline: (800) 800-EAC4 (3224) or 216-349-8413.Be prepared to supply the unit serial number and any other pertinentinformation. Refer to the following parts list and reference drawings toidentify specific parts and their locations.3. Repair parts/assemblies will be shipped. Allen Telecom Systems will shipreplacement parts or assemblies with a Return Materials Authorizationform. This form must be used to return failed parts or assemblies to AllenTelecom Systems. All parts are shipped next day air, free of charge,unless otherwise instructed by the customer. 4. Return failed parts/assemblies to Allen Telecom Systems according toinstructions on the Return Materials Authorization form. AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Parts & Accessories (27-7660-1, 1/95) Parts-1
Selected EAC-2000 parts or assemblies that are no longer under warranty canbe replaced through Allen Telecom Systems’ exchange program. This programpermits customers to exchange a failed part or assembly for a working part orassembly, for a nominal charge. Contact Allen Telecom Systems, SystemsEngineering Department, to determine which parts and assemblies can beexchanged under this program. To take advantage of this program, follow the procedures listed above under I.Exchange Procedures: Units Under Warranty. Spare parts for the EAC-2000 can be purchased by contacting Allen TelecomSystems, Customer Service Department at or for prices and delivery. Refer to the following list and illustrations to identifyspecific parts and their locations. Parts-2 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Parts & Accessories (27-7660-1, 1/95)
Replaceable Parts/Assemblies for EAC-2000The following list includes service parts/assemblies that are frequently purchased asspares and is not inclusive of all parts/assemblies that are available for the EAC-2000.Items not included in this list may be ordered by contacting Allen Telecom SystemsCustomer Service Department.1 19-5612-1 Reverse Combiner Module2 19-5598-1 Controller Board3 19-5838-1 D1 Duplexer4 19-5613-1 Forward Preamp Module5 19-5599-1 RF Board6 21-117-1 45-Watt Power Amplifier7 19-5588-1 PA Interface Board8 19-5627-1 Power Sensor9 59-12-1 28 Vac Power Supply10 19-5620-1 Regulator Module11 19-5614-1 Reverse Preamp ModuleAMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Parts & Accessories (27-7660-1, 1/95) Parts-3
Reference DrawingsParts-4 AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Parts & Accessories (27-7660-1, 1/95)
Reference Drawings (Continued)AMPS EAC-2000™ Manual: Parts & Accessories (27-7660-1, 1/95) Parts-5

Navigation menu